WO2021180229A1 - Method for restoring biosensor and device using said method - Google Patents

Method for restoring biosensor and device using said method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021180229A1
WO2021180229A1 PCT/CN2021/080609 CN2021080609W WO2021180229A1 WO 2021180229 A1 WO2021180229 A1 WO 2021180229A1 CN 2021080609 W CN2021080609 W CN 2021080609W WO 2021180229 A1 WO2021180229 A1 WO 2021180229A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
measurement
electrode
recharge
silver halide
counter electrode
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/080609
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
黄椿木
陈界行
Original Assignee
华广生技股份有限公司
华广美国公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华广生技股份有限公司, 华广美国公司 filed Critical 华广生技股份有限公司
Publication of WO2021180229A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021180229A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/145Measuring characteristics of blood in vivo, e.g. gas concentration, pH value; Measuring characteristics of body fluids or tissues, e.g. interstitial fluid, cerebral tissue
    • A61B5/1468Measuring characteristics of blood in vivo, e.g. gas concentration, pH value; Measuring characteristics of body fluids or tissues, e.g. interstitial fluid, cerebral tissue using chemical or electrochemical methods, e.g. by polarographic means
    • A61B5/1473Measuring characteristics of blood in vivo, e.g. gas concentration, pH value; Measuring characteristics of body fluids or tissues, e.g. interstitial fluid, cerebral tissue using chemical or electrochemical methods, e.g. by polarographic means invasive, e.g. introduced into the body by a catheter
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N27/00Investigating or analysing materials by the use of electric, electrochemical, or magnetic means
    • G01N27/26Investigating or analysing materials by the use of electric, electrochemical, or magnetic means by investigating electrochemical variables; by using electrolysis or electrophoresis
    • G01N27/28Electrolytic cell components
    • G01N27/30Electrodes, e.g. test electrodes; Half-cells
    • G01N27/327Biochemical electrodes, e.g. electrical or mechanical details for in vitro measurements

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a biosensor and a method for determining the size of its counter electrode, in particular to a biosensor for measuring the physiological signal represented by the physiological parameter associated with the object to be measured, and for prolonging the service life of the biosensor method.
  • CGM continuous glucose monitoring
  • the biochemical reaction signal that depends on the concentration of the analyte is converted into a measurable physical signal, such as an optical or electrochemical signal.
  • a measurable physical signal such as an optical or electrochemical signal.
  • an electrochemical reaction such as glucose oxidase (GOx) catalyzes the reaction of glucose to produce Gluconolactone and reduced enzymes. The subsequent reduced enzymes will interact with the oxygen in the biological fluids in the body. The transfer then generates the product hydrogen peroxide (H 2 O 2 ), and finally the glucose concentration is quantified by the oxidation reaction of the catalyzed product H 2 O 2.
  • the reaction formula is as follows.
  • FAD Fevin Adenine Dinucleotide
  • the basic structure of CGM includes: (a) Biosensor, used to measure physiological signals corresponding to human glucose concentration; and (b) Transmitter, used to transmit these physiological signals.
  • the biosensor can be a two-electrode system or a three-electrode system. In the three-electrode system biosensor, it includes a working electrode (WE), a counter electrode (CE) and a reference electrode (RE).
  • the biosensor of the two-electrode system includes a working electrode (WE) and a counter electrode (CE).
  • the counter electrode also functions as a reference electrode, so it is sometimes called a counter/reference electrode (R/C).
  • the suitable material for the reference electrode in the three-electrode system biosensor and the counter electrode as the reference electrode in the two-electrode system biosensor for stable measurement of glucose concentration is silver/silver chloride (Ag/AgCl).
  • the corresponding reference electrode (RE) or reference/counter electrode (R/C) undergoes a reduction reaction to make the silver chloride
  • the reduction to silver causes the silver chloride to be consumed.
  • the silver chloride on the reference electrode will be lost due to the dissociation of silver chloride in the body fluid, which will cause the problem of drifting to the reference voltage.
  • the reference/counter electrode (R/C) of the two-electrode system due to the reaction of the reference/counter electrode (R/C) of the two-electrode system, the consumption of silver chloride is even higher than that of the three-electrode system. Therefore, the service life of the sensor is limited by the silver chloride content on the counter electrode and/or reference electrode.
  • the consumption of the counter electrode is about 1.73 millicoulombs (mC) per day at an average sensing current of 20 nanoamperes (nA).
  • mC millicoulombs
  • nA nanoamperes
  • the length, width and height of the counter electrode are 3.3 mm, 0.25 mm
  • the electrode capacity (Capacity) of the original design is only 6mC at 0.01 mm
  • the stable measurement state can be maintained for about one day at most.
  • the capacity of the electrode must be at least 27.68mC.
  • the current technology does not change the width and thickness.
  • the length of the counter electrode may need to be as long as 15.2 mm. Therefore, the prior art attempts to extend the length of the counter electrode to more than 10 mm, and in order to avoid implanting deep into the subcutaneous tissue, these biosensors need to be implanted at an oblique angle. Therefore, it causes problems such as a larger implantation wound and a higher risk of infection to the patient, and due to the long implantation length, the pain during implantation is also more pronounced.
  • US 8,620,398 describes a biosensor, which is mainly a three-electrode system.
  • the reference electrode basically does not participate in the chemical reaction, the silver chloride is still gradually consumed in the internal environment, but the consumption rate is slower than that of the two-electrode system, which is disclosed in the article.
  • the step of determining depletion includes determining that the output current of the transmitter is noisy. Will be activated to restore AgCl to the amount required for enough measurements. Then until the next time the noise occurs again, AgCl needs to be recharged again. It can be understood that although US 8,620,398 considers that AgCl will be consumed in the measurement and AgCl recharge is performed when the biosensor fails.
  • the measured value at the time of failure is no longer credible. It is necessary to wait for the biosensor to complete the AgCl refilling procedure to obtain the correct measured value, temporarily adopt the blood sampling method, or skip this measurement directly. This problem is for the patient or People who need to know the blood glucose concentration at the time are always troubled.
  • this type of biosensor since this type of biosensor has to cope with at least several consecutive or even multiple measurements over several days, a large amount of AgCl must be prepared, but it will inevitably cause the problem of a longer implantation length of the biosensor. It has not been proposed that real-time AgCl refilling can be used to provide uninterrupted measurement, a biosensor with a shorter implant length and a longer service life.
  • US9,351,677 is mainly a two-electrode system.
  • the reference/counter electrode (R/C) participates in the chemical reaction, so silver chloride is consumed by the electrochemical reaction.
  • the article proposes an analyte sensor with increased AgCl capacity, which uses H 2 O 2 regenerates the AgCl on the reference electrode, but because H 2 O 2 is easily reduced to H 2 O or oxidized to O 2 , it is not easy to exist stably in the human body. Therefore, during regeneration/recharging, the concentration of H 2 O 2 in the body may not be sufficient to stably recharge enough AgCl, and the biosensor needs to be equipped with a larger AgCl electrode size, and its implanted end is also long. Up to 12mm.
  • the service life of the biosensor depends on the amount of silver halide present in the counter electrode.
  • the size of the counter electrode also depends on the amount of silver halide. The longer the life of the biosensor, the greater the amount of silver halide. The larger the amount of silver halide, the larger the size of the counter electrode. The larger the size of the counter electrode, the longer the implantation length into the patient. The longer the implant length for the patient, the greater the discomfort suffered by the patient.
  • the present disclosure provides a solution to reduce the size of the counter electrode, provides a method for quantifying the initial amount of silver halide required on the counter electrode, and provides a method for intelligently starting the refill halogenation when needed.
  • the silver method and device do not need to wait for the silver halide depletion signal to appear (for example, physiological signal noise) before performing silver halide recharging.
  • an appropriate range can be selected as the threshold interval to control the inventory level of silver halide to be maintained here.
  • the present invention provides a biosensor capable of providing uninterrupted measurement, stable refilling of AgCl, prolonging its service life, and miniaturizing the effect of the small size of the implanted end, which can further reduce the cost of the product. Manufacturing costs, and these effects can solve the aforementioned problems that are difficult to overcome by the known technology.
  • the size of the counter electrode signal sensing section in the micro biosensor of the present invention can be reduced, thereby reducing biological toxicity and enabling the micro biosensor to have a prolonged service life.
  • the reduced size of the electrode can shorten the length of the implanted end of the sensor, thus reducing the pain of implantation for the user.
  • the refilling technology of the present invention is used to control the timing and amount of refilling of silver chloride. Therefore, even when the user's glucose concentration fluctuates greatly, the micro sensor of the present invention can still recharge in real time and automatically. Charge the consumed silver chloride to maintain the inventory of silver chloride within a predetermined interval. Therefore, the obtained physiological signals and physiological parameters maintain a stable proportional relationship.
  • the recharging rate of silver chloride does not have to be completely positively correlated with the decrease rate of silver chloride during the measurement, and it also includes the recharging of silver chloride immediately after each measurement. Charging method.
  • One of the objectives of this case is to provide a method for controlling the recharge of silver halide material in a biosensor that is implanted under the skin to measure the physiological parameters associated with the analyte in the biological fluid.
  • the biosensor at least includes a first electrode and a counter electrode
  • the counter electrode includes a silver halide material and a silver material
  • the silver halide material has an inventory level in the silver halide material and the silver material
  • the refill control method includes the following steps: after a measurement operation, a measurement value of the physiological signal is obtained, wherein the inventory level decreases after the measurement operation; If the condition is met, calculate the variation value of the inventory level during the predetermined number of times, and start the first refill operation to refill the variation value of the inventory level, and the predetermined number of times is a positive integer , Wherein the inventory level substantially changes between the first threshold and the second threshold.
  • One of the objectives of this case is to provide a physiological signal measuring device that can control the inventory level of the silver halide material of the biosensor.
  • the silver halide material has an initial inventory, and the inventory level represents the current
  • the inventory is used to make the physiological signal measurement device perform a refill operation to restore the silver halide material to the inventory level
  • the physiological signal measurement device includes: the biosensor, includes: a first electrode, and The first pair of electrodes includes the silver halide material and the silver material; and a transmission unit, which is coupled to the biosensor, and includes a processor, configured to reduce the consumption of the inventory when the measurement operation is started.
  • the processor controls the inventory level to basically change between a first threshold and a second threshold .
  • the biosensor includes a first electrode and a counter electrode.
  • the counter electrode includes a silver halide material and a silver material.
  • the silver halide material has a stock.
  • the method includes the following steps: after the measuring operation, calculating the change in the inventory level; and activating the first A refill operation is performed to refill the variation value of the inventory level, wherein the inventory level is controlled to vary substantially between a first threshold and a second threshold.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a physiological signal measuring device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2A is a schematic front view of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram of the back of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2C is a schematic cross-sectional view along the line A-A' in Fig. 2A of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2D is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3A is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide material in a biosensor according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3B is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide material in a biosensor according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3C is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide material in a biosensor according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3D is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide material in a biosensor according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3E is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide material in a biosensor according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 4A] to [FIG. 4H] are schematic diagrams of the inventory level of various embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 5A is the constant voltage circuit in the measurement mode in the present invention.
  • FIG. 5B is the constant voltage circuit in the recharging mode in the present invention.
  • FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram of the variation curve of the inventory level according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram of the variation curve of the inventory level according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram of the variation curve of the inventory level according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 6D is a schematic diagram of the variation curve of the inventory level according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 6E is a schematic diagram of the variation curve of the inventory level according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7A is a current schematic diagram of the constant voltage circuit of the present invention in the first mode alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
  • FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram of the current of the constant voltage circuit of the present invention in the second mode alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
  • FIG. 7C is a current schematic diagram of the constant voltage circuit of the present invention in the third mode alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
  • FIG. 7D is a current schematic diagram of the constant voltage circuit of the present invention in the fourth mode alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
  • FIG. 7E is a current schematic diagram of the constant voltage circuit of the present invention in the fifth mode alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
  • FIG. 7F is a current schematic diagram of the constant voltage circuit of the present invention in the sixth mode alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
  • FIG. 8A The constant current circuit with step-switching in the measurement mode of the present invention.
  • FIG. 8B The constant current circuit with step-switching in the recharge mode of the present invention.
  • FIG. 9A The constant current circuit with stepless switching in the measurement mode of the present invention.
  • FIG. 9B The constant current circuit with stepless switching in the recharge mode in the present invention.
  • FIG. 10A is a voltage schematic diagram of the constant current circuit of the present invention in the first mode alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
  • FIG. 10B is a voltage schematic diagram of the constant current circuit of the present invention in the second mode alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
  • FIG. 10C is a voltage schematic diagram of the constant current circuit of the present invention in the third mode alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
  • FIG. 10D is a schematic diagram of the constant current circuit of the present invention alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode in the third mode.
  • Figure 11 is a method for determining an analyte according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 12 is a method for determining an analyte according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 13A is a schematic front view of the first embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • FIG. 13B is a schematic back view of the first embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • FIG. 13C is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A' in Figure 2A of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the fourth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14D is a schematic cross-sectional view of the fifth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14E is a schematic cross-sectional view of the sixth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14F is a schematic cross-sectional view of the seventh embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • FIG. 14G is a schematic cross-sectional view of the eighth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • FIG. 15A is the constant voltage circuit in the measurement mode in the present invention.
  • FIG. 15B is the constant voltage circuit in the recharging mode in the present invention.
  • FIG. 16A The constant current circuit with step-switching in the measurement mode of the present invention.
  • FIG. 16B The constant current circuit with step-switching in the recharge mode in the present invention.
  • FIG. 17A The constant current circuit with stepless switching in the measurement mode of the present invention.
  • FIG. 17B The constant current circuit with stepless switching in the recharge mode in the present invention.
  • FIG. 18A is a schematic front view of the first embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • FIG. 18B is a schematic back view of the first embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • FIG. 18C is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A' in Fig. 2A of the present invention.
  • FIG. 19A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • FIG. 19B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • FIG. 19C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the fourth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • FIG. 20A It is a constant voltage circuit that can execute the measurement mode and the recharge mode according to the first method of the present invention.
  • FIG. 20B is a constant voltage circuit that can perform measurement mode and recharge mode according to the second method of the present invention.
  • FIG. 20C is a constant voltage circuit that can perform measurement mode and recharge mode according to the third method of the present invention.
  • FIG. 21 It is a constant current circuit that can perform stepwise switching between the measurement mode and the recharge mode in the present invention.
  • FIG. 22 is a constant current circuit that can perform stepless switching between the measurement mode and the recharge mode in the present invention.
  • FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram of the constant current or constant voltage circuit of the present invention in a measurement mode and a recharge mode according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram of the constant current or constant voltage circuit of the present invention in the measurement mode and the recharge mode according to another embodiment.
  • FIG. 24 is a flowchart according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • amount refers to the capacity of silver halide (AgX) or silver chloride (AgCl) in the counter electrode, and is preferably measured in microcoulomb ( ⁇ C), millicoulomb (mC) or coulomb (C ) Is expressed in units of, but not limited to, expressed in terms of weight percentage concentration wt%, number of moles, molar concentration, etc.
  • curves or straight lines schematically shown in the drawings do not necessarily represent their true shapes.
  • a straight line or a curve may have fluctuations along the normal direction of the line, or may have various possible turns; or
  • the distance, length or height shown in does not represent an absolute measure, unless explicitly stated.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the physiological signal measuring device of the present invention.
  • the physiological signal measuring device 10 of the present invention can be used to be implanted under the skin to measure the physiological signal of the physiological parameter associated with the analyte in the biological fluid.
  • the physiological signal measurement device 10 of the present invention includes a micro biosensor 100 and a transmission unit 200, wherein the transmission unit 200 is electrically connected to the micro biosensor 100, and has a processor 210, a power supply 220, a voltage application unit 230, a temperature sensing unit 240 and Communication unit 250.
  • the power supply 220 controls the voltage applying unit 230 through the processor 210 to provide voltage to the micro biosensor 100 for measuring the physiological signal, and the temperature sensing unit 240 measures the temperature of the biological body, so the temperature measurement signal and the physiological signal measured by the micro biosensor 100
  • the signal is transmitted to the processor 210, and the processor 210 calculates the physiological signal into a physiological parameter.
  • the communication unit 250 may perform wired or wireless transmission with the user device 20.
  • the transmission unit 200 may optionally include a timer 260 coupled to the processor 210, for example, within 5 seconds, within 15 seconds, within 30 seconds, within one minute, and ten minutes. Timekeeping at a fixed time interval such as within one hour, within two hours, within four hours, within one day, within one week, or within one month.
  • the timer 260 can also be set to send a signal to the processor 210 at one or more settable time points.
  • FIGS. 2A and 2B are schematic diagrams of the front and back of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • the micro biosensor 100 of the present invention includes a substrate 110, a working electrode 120 and a counter electrode 130 disposed on the substrate 110, and a chemical reagent 140 surrounding the working electrode 120 and the counter electrode 130 (as shown in FIG. 2C).
  • the material of the substrate 110 can be any material that is known to be suitable for use in electrode substrates and preferably has flexibility and insulation properties, such as but not limited to polymer materials such as polyester and polyimide.
  • the aforementioned polymer materials can be used singly or in combination of multiple types.
  • the substrate 110 has a surface 111 (that is, the first surface), an opposite surface 112 (that is, the second surface) opposite to the surface 111, a first end 113 and a second end 114, and the substrate 110 is divided into 3 regions, which are respectively close to The signal output area 115 of the first end 113, the sensing area 116 close to the second end 114, and the connection area 117 between the signal output area 115 and the sensing area 116.
  • the working electrode 120 is disposed on the surface 111 of the substrate 110 and extends from the first end 113 to the second end 114 of the substrate 110.
  • the working electrode 120 includes a signal output section 121 located in the signal output area 115 of the substrate 110 and a signal sensing section 122 located in the sensing area 116 of the substrate 110.
  • the material of the working electrode 120 includes, but is not limited to: carbon, platinum, aluminum, gallium, gold, indium, iridium, iron, lead, magnesium, nickel, manganese, molybdenum, osmium, palladium, rhodium, silver, tin, titanium, zinc, Silicon, zirconium, a mixture of the foregoing elements, or derivatives of the foregoing elements (such as alloys, oxides or metal compounds, etc.).
  • the material of the working electrode 120 is a noble metal, a derivative of noble metal, or a combination of the foregoing, more preferably Ground, the working electrode 120 is a platinum-containing material.
  • the counter electrode 130 is disposed on the opposite surface 112 of the substrate 110 and extends from the first end 113 to the second end 114 of the substrate 110.
  • the counter electrode 130 includes a signal output section 131 located in the signal output area 115 of the substrate 110 and a signal sensing section 132 located in the sensing area 116 of the substrate 110.
  • the material on the surface of the counter electrode 130 includes silver and silver halide, and the silver halide is preferably silver chloride or silver iodine, so that the counter electrode 130 also functions as a reference electrode That is, the counter electrode 130 of the present invention can (1) form an electronic circuit with the working electrode 120, so that the working electrode 120 is smoothly connected to ensure that the electrochemical reaction occurs on the working electrode 120; and (2) provide a stable relative potential as Reference potential.
  • the working electrode 120 and the counter electrode 130 of the present invention form a two-electrode system.
  • the silver/silver halide can be mixed with carbon.
  • the silver/silver halide is mixed with carbon glue, and the silver halide content only needs to make the counter electrode 130 stable. Just execute the set measurement action.
  • the surface of the counter electrode 130 can also be covered with a conductive material to prevent silver halide from dissolution, thereby protecting the counter electrode 130.
  • the conductive material is mainly a conductive material that does not affect the measurement performance of the working electrode, such as conductive material. It is Carbon.
  • the biosensor is not limited to a wire-type or stacked-type electrode structure.
  • the initial amount of silver halide may be zero before the biosensor is ready to be shipped out of the factory for sale. In this case, there is no silver halide on the counter electrode 130 of the biosensor. After the biosensor is subcutaneously implanted in the patient and during the initial recharge period before the first measurement, the silver coated on the counter electrode 130 through oxidation can be recharged with the initial amount of silver halide on the counter electrode 130 .
  • the chemical reagent 140 covers at least the signal sensing section 122 of the working electrode 120 and the surface of the counter electrode 130 located in the sensing area 116. In another embodiment, the chemical reagent 140 covers at least the signal sensing section 122 of the working electrode 120 (not shown). In other words, the counter electrode 130 may not be covered by the chemical reagent 140.
  • the sensing area 116 of the micro biosensor 100 can be implanted subcutaneously so that the signal sensing section 122 of the working electrode 120 measures the physiological signal associated with the analyte in the biological fluid, and the physiological signal will be transmitted to the signal output of the working electrode 120 In section 121, the signal output section 121 is sent to the processor 210 to obtain physiological parameters. In addition to obtaining the physiological parameters from the transmission unit 200, the physiological parameters may also be transmitted to the user device 20 via wireless/wired communication, such as a smart phone, a physiological signal receiver, or a blood glucose meter.
  • FIG. 2C is a schematic cross-sectional view along the line AA' in FIG.
  • the working electrode 120 is disposed on the surface 111 of the substrate 110
  • the counter electrode 130 is disposed on the opposite side surface 112 of the substrate 110
  • the surfaces of the working electrode 120 and the counter electrode 130 are covered with a chemical reagent 140.
  • the chemical reagent 140 covers at least a part of the surface of the working electrode 120.
  • the micro biosensor 100 of the present invention performs the measurement step during the measurement period, and performs the recharge step during the recharge (ie regeneration) period.
  • the voltage of the working electrode 120 is higher than the voltage of the counter electrode 130, so that the current flows from the working electrode 120 to the direction of the counter electrode 130, so that the working electrode 120 undergoes an oxidation reaction (that is, the working electrode 120, the chemical reagent 140)
  • the electrochemical reaction between the analyte and the analyte) is used to measure the physiological signal, and a reduction reaction occurs on the counter electrode 130, so that the silver halide in the counter electrode 130 is consumed and dissociated into silver (Ag) and halide ions (X ⁇ ). Since the silver halide in the counter electrode 130 is consumed, the silver halide in the counter electrode 130 needs to be recharged to perform the next measurement step.
  • the voltage of the counter electrode 130 is higher than the voltage of the working electrode 120, so that the current flows from the counter electrode 130 to the direction of the working electrode 120, and the counter electrode 130 is oxidized to cause the silver to react with the halide ions in the living body. Or AgCl oxidized (or dissociated) Cl - combined to recharge the silver halide.
  • the detailed measurement steps and recharge steps are shown in Figure 11.
  • the working electrode 120 and the counter electrode 130 of the present invention may be disposed on the same surface of the substrate 110, that is, both the working electrode 120 and the counter electrode 130 are disposed on the surface 111 or the opposite surface 112 of the substrate 110, such as Shown in Figure 2D.
  • the measurement step when the measurement step is performed, current flows from the working electrode 120 to the counter electrode 130, and the working electrode 120 is oxidized to measure physiological signals.
  • the silver halide in the counter electrode 130 is consumed and dissociated into silver ( Ag) and halogen ions (X -).
  • the recharging step current flows from the counter electrode 130 to the working electrode 120, so that the counter electrode 130 undergoes an oxidation reaction to combine silver and halide ions to recharge the silver halide.
  • a layer of conductive material such as carbon
  • a conductive layer such as silver
  • the impedance of the output end makes the counter electrode 130 of the present invention form a conductive layer, a carbon layer, and a silver/silver halide layer in sequence starting from the opposite surface 112 of the substrate 110.
  • the silver halide of the counter electrode material is not excluded as silver chloride or silver sulfide, or other electrode materials based on silver redox reaction, such as silver acetate, phosphoric acid.
  • Silver (silver phosphate) the method for restoring the inventory level of electrode materials of the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned materials. For example, all other electrodes with similar features can be applied to the method of restoring the biosensor and the device using this method.
  • the present invention proposes a physiological signal measuring device 10 that can control the inventory level of silver halide materials of the micro biosensor 100.
  • the silver halide material has an initial inventory I 0 .
  • the inventory level represents the inventory of silver halide materials at the time and is used to make the physiological signal measurement device perform a refill operation to restore the inventory level of the silver halide material.
  • the physiological signal measurement device 10 includes: a biosensor 100, including: a first electrode and The counter electrode 130, in a two-electrode system, the first electrode is the working electrode 120, and the counter electrode 130 includes a silver halide material and a silver material; and a transmission unit 200, coupled to the micro biosensor 100, and includes: a processor 210 , Is configured to reduce the consumption of inventory when the measurement operation is started, and increase the inventory when the refill operation is started, and calculate the inventory level.
  • the processor controls the inventory level to basically vary between the first threshold and the second threshold. In other embodiments, it can also be implemented in the electrode system as shown in FIG. 13C or FIG. 14A-F.
  • 3A-3E are flowcharts of methods for recharging silver halide materials in biosensors according to different embodiments of the present invention.
  • 3A is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide material in a biosensor according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the silver halide material has an inventory level, and the inventory level changes with the measurement and refilling operations: in the measurement operation, the inventory level will decrease; and in the refilling operation, the inventory level will increase .
  • the recharging method of the present invention includes step S11: the processor 210 receives the measurement instruction; step S12: the power supply 220 controls the voltage applying unit 230 through the processor 210 to provide voltage to the biosensor 100 to measure the physiological signal and obtain the measured value; Step S13: The processor determines the operating conditions for recharging according to the measured value. For example, it determines the application time and the magnitude of the recharging voltage according to the accumulated consumption to start the recharging, and stops the recharging when the time is reached.
  • Step S14 Perform refilling according to the operating conditions of refilling;
  • Step S15 Calculate the current inventory level during the refilling operation;
  • Step S16 The processor performs the refill according to different preset thresholds (Th1, Th2, Th3, Th4, predetermined value S, etc.), determine whether the inventory level is between the first threshold and the second threshold: if not, continue the current refill operation, or go to step S11 to wait for the next measurement instruction to proceed to the next measurement and Refill cycle; if so, stop refilling and go to step S11 to receive the measurement instruction again, or go directly to step S12 for the next measurement and refill cycle.
  • Th1, Th2, Th3, Th4, predetermined value S, etc. The processor performs the refill according to different preset thresholds (Th1, Th2, Th3, Th4, predetermined value S, etc.), determine whether the inventory level is between the first threshold and the second threshold: if not, continue the current refill operation, or go to step S11 to wait for the next measurement instruction to proceed to the next measurement and Refill cycle; if so, stop refilling
  • the refill time and refill amount of the inventory level when the processor performs the refill operation can be calculated based on a consumption of each measurement operation performed, such as total consumption, partial consumption or average consumption, and a period of execution.
  • a consumption of each measurement operation performed such as total consumption, partial consumption or average consumption, and a period of execution.
  • One or a combination of the cumulative amount of consumption of each measurement operation in the measurement operation, the natural consumption of the electrode, or a combination thereof is dynamically adjusted.
  • the calculation of the refill inventory can also be matched with the user’s glucose concentration index factor. The higher the glucose concentration, the more the consumption of silver halide materials, so that the reduction rate of silver halide materials during the measurement operation does not have to be the same as that of silver halide materials.
  • the generation rate is positively correlated, and the timing and amount of regeneration of the silver halide material can be controlled by the charging method.
  • the inventory level is based on the percentage of the silver halide material in the counter electrode in the silver halide material and the silver material, or the cumulative value of the consumption of the silver halide material in each measurement operation and each recharge operation. The difference between the cumulative value of the silver halide material refilling amount is used as the calculation method.
  • the inventory level can also be a unit amount of the silver halide material in the counter electrode between the silver halide material and the silver material, for example, in coulombs. The number is presented, but is not limited to the weight percentage concentration wt%, the number of moles, and the concentration of moles.
  • other mathematical methods or electrical units can also be used to calculate the inventory level.
  • 3B is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide materials in a biosensor according to another embodiment of the present invention, using the difference as the inventory level as the judgment parameter to be applied to the physiological signal measuring device to perform the recharging operation .
  • the difference here is replaced with the inventory level, it can also be applied in Figure 3B.
  • the silver halide material has an inventory.
  • the recharging method includes step S21: the processor 210 receives the measurement instruction; step S22: the power supply 220 controls the voltage applying unit 230 through the processor 210 to provide voltage to the biosensor 100 for physiological signal measurement , Obtain the measured value, and convert the current consumption of the silver halide material; Step S23: The processor calculates the silver halide inventory level (the proportion of silver halide, or the cumulative value of each consumption and the accumulation of each recharge Step S24: Determine whether the current proportion (or difference) satisfies the recharge condition: if not, wait for the next measurement instruction; if yes, then Step S25: start the recharge operation; measure and measure Measurement step S26: Determine whether the proportion (or difference) meets the conditions for stopping recharging, if not, continue the current rechar
  • FIG. 3C is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide materials in a biosensor according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Step S33 Calculate the proportion of the inventory (or a difference between the cumulative value of each consumption and the cumulative value of each refill).
  • Step S34 Determine whether one of the inventory level, the difference value, and the cumulative value of the measurement times meets the refilling condition, if not, wait for the next measurement instruction; if yes, then step S35: start the refill operation; step S36: Calculate the gradually increasing inventory level in the refilling operation; step S37: determine whether the inventory level meets the refilling stop condition: if not, continue the current refilling operation; if so, stop the refilling and wait for the next measurement instruction.
  • Step S38 The cumulative value of the number of measurements is reset to zero. After the measurement instruction is received again, step S31 is entered again.
  • 3D is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide material in a biosensor according to another embodiment of the present invention. Please refer to FIG. 3D, steps S44 to S47 are similar to steps S34 to S37 of FIG. 3C.
  • This method can be controlled after each measurement (of course, it can also be after each measurement, such as after a single measurement operation that consumes too much, or the cumulative consumption of multiple measurement operations. Large time) start a recharge operation.
  • step S51 receiving measurement instructions
  • step S52 measuring and obtaining the measured value
  • step S53 calculating the current consumption and cumulative consumption (if it is the first measurement, the cumulative consumption is the current Consumption)
  • step S54 Determine whether the accumulated consumption satisfies the recharge condition: if not, wait for the next measurement instruction; if it is, then Step S55: Determine the operating condition for recharge.
  • the size and/or time of the applied recharge voltage is determined according to the amount of accumulated consumption, or different threshold values (Th1, Th2, Th3, Th4, predetermined value S, etc.) are given.
  • Step S56 Start the refilling operation; Step S57: Calculate the gradually increasing inventory level during the refilling operation; Step S58: Determine whether the inventory level meets the conditions for stopping the refilling: If not, continue the current refilling operation; if so, then Stop refilling and wait for the next measurement instruction. After the measurement instruction is received again, step S51 is entered again.
  • FIGS. 4A-4H are schematic diagrams of the variation curve of the inventory level of various embodiments of the present invention, in which FIGS. 4A-4D and 4H are schematic diagrams of the variation of the inventory level that may occur when only the method of FIG. 3B, 3C or 3D is used .
  • the inventory quantity starts from the initial inventory quantity I 0.
  • the refill operation is initiated until the inventory level reaches the second threshold. Stop recharging operation at Th2.
  • a predetermined value S can be set between the first threshold Th1 and the second threshold Th2 as another threshold.
  • the refill operation is stopped.
  • the predetermined value S is set equal to the initial inventory I 0 to replace the second threshold Th2. Therefore, after the refill operation is started, the refill operation is stopped when the inventory level reaches the initial inventory level I 0.
  • the predetermined value S is set to be greater than the initial inventory I 0 and less than the second threshold Th2. Therefore, after the refill operation is initiated, the inventory level rises to a predetermined value S greater than the initial inventory I 0 and then the refill operation is stopped.
  • the predetermined value S is set to be less than the initial inventory amount and greater than the first threshold Th1. Therefore, after the refill operation is started, the inventory level rises to a predetermined value S less than the initial inventory I 0 and then the refill operation is stopped.
  • FIGS. 3B to 3D are schematic diagrams of possible changes in inventory levels when the method of FIG. 3A or 3E is combined with one of the methods of FIGS. 3B to 3D.
  • FIG. 4F after one or more determination operations have been initiated and the first refill operation of the method shown in FIG. 3A or 3E has been started once or more times, when the inventory level gradually rises to be greater than or equal to the second threshold Th2, The second recharging operation as shown in FIGS. 3B to 3D will not be started, and the second recharging operation will not be started until the inventory level is less than or equal to the first threshold Th1.
  • Fig. 6A is a schematic diagram of an inventory level curve implemented in conjunction with the refilling method of Figs. 3B and 3X. Please refer to Figure 6A.
  • the vertical axis in the above figure is the proportion of AgCl
  • the vertical axis in the middle figure is the applied measured voltage (V1) and the recharge voltage (V2)
  • the vertical axis in the figure below is the condition of applying a constant voltage.
  • the horizontal axis is the same time, and the vertical dashed line indicates the same point in time. If the proportion of AgCl is initially 50%, the measurement voltage of V1 is applied in the first measurement, and the proportion of AgCl gradually decreases until the measurement operation stops.
  • the recharging operation Since the proportion of AgCl at this time is not less than or equal to the first threshold Th1, the recharging operation will not be started yet. Until after several measurement operations, the proportion of AgCl is less than (or equal to) the first threshold Th1, the recharging operation is started, and the recharging operation is stopped when the proportion of AgCl reaches (slightly greater than or equal to) the second threshold Th2.
  • Fig. 6B is a schematic diagram of another inventory level curve implemented in conjunction with the refilling method of Figs. 3B and 3X. Please refer to Figure 6B.
  • the vertical axis in the above graph is the difference between the accumulated consumption of AgCl and the accumulated recharge (the difference is initially 0), and the vertical axis in the middle graph is the applied measured voltage (V1) and the recharge voltage (V2), the vertical axis of the figure below is the measured current (area without diagonal lines) and the recharge current (area with diagonal lines) under the condition of applying a constant voltage.
  • the horizontal axis is the same time, and the vertical dashed line indicates the same time point. In the first measurement, the measurement voltage of V1 was applied, and the difference gradually decreased until the measurement operation was stopped.
  • the recharging operation Since the difference at this time is not less than or equal to the first threshold Th1, the recharging operation will not be started yet. Until after several determination operations, the difference is less than (or equal to) the first threshold Th1, the recharging operation is started, and the recharging operation is stopped when the difference reaches (slightly greater than or equal to) the second threshold Th2.
  • Another embodiment of the present invention hopes to control the inventory level between Th1 and Th2, and calculate the current fluctuation amount after each measurement and immediately reclaim the secondary fluctuation amount, but the current recharge amount is not necessarily It is exactly equal to the current change amount, so there will be a change amount between each measurement and the inventory before and after each refill. However, if the single consumption is too large and is less than or equal to another lower limit threshold Th3, the inventory level can be greatly increased to Th2.
  • FIGS. 3A and 3B are graphs showing the inventory level in accordance with the embodiment of the refilling method of FIGS. 3A and 3B.
  • the curve of Fig. 6C can be controlled by the method of Fig. 3A as the main axis, Th1 and Th2 are set so that the inventory level is controlled between them, and the method shown in Fig. 3B is used, so that in case the inventory level is suddenly large When the consumption is lower than Th3, the inventory level can be effectively kept away from Th3 in the subsequent refill operation; or when the inventory level is instantly higher than Th4 due to sudden and large consumption, it can be temporarily terminated afterwards
  • the refilling operation or reducing the refilling amount of the refilling operation effectively keeps the inventory level away from Th4.
  • the vertical axis is the AgCl inventory level
  • the horizontal axis is time
  • the refilled inventory level is initially the initial inventory level.
  • the first refilling method shown in Figure 3A is used. After the first measurement (M1), the first refill is initiated and the first refill (R1) is implemented. The subsequent inventory The amount level has not reached S.
  • the inventory level (for example, the proportion in FIG. 3B) is lower than Th3.
  • the inventory level can be increased to between Th2 and Th4.
  • other conditions that can also allow the biosensor to maintain the measurement accuracy can be selected as the default value.
  • S the inventory level
  • the inventory level will fluctuate like the curve of M7-M8-R7-M9. If not designed in this way, the inventory level curve after M7 (not shown as M7-M9 in Figure 6C) can be similar to the change in inventory level between R1-M6, and the change in inventory level is smoother.
  • FIG. 6D is roughly similar to FIG. 6C, except that the predetermined value S is set between I 0 and Th2.
  • the inventory level can be changed between Th1 and Th2, but it is more gentle than the latter curve (M6-M9) shown in Figure 3C.
  • the inventory level in addition to using the calculation method of the proportion or the difference, can also be calculated by setting the threshold value (ie, the upper and lower limit) of the coulomb number of the silver halide.
  • the inventory level is calculated based on the coulomb amount.
  • the proportion, the difference or the coulomb amount or a combination thereof can be applied to the inventory level as a measurement parameter.
  • Th3 and Th4 may also include: when the processor confirms that the inventory level exceeds Th3 and Th4, it gives an abnormal signal, and the system can determine that the biosensor is suspended or ends the measurement operation.
  • the transmission unit may optionally include a timer 260
  • the method of the present invention further includes the following steps: every time the fixed time interval of each measurement operation is satisfied, another recharging operation is initiated, wherein the fixed time The interval is within 15 seconds, within 30 seconds, within one minute, within ten minutes, within one hour, within two hours, within four hours, within one day, within one week or within one month.
  • the first threshold Th1 when the inventory level is the proportion of silver halide materials in the proportion of silver halide materials and silver materials, the first threshold Th1 is selected from 1% to 98%, and the second threshold Th2 is selected from 2. % To 99%.
  • the second threshold Th2 when the first threshold Th1 is 1%, the second threshold Th2 can be a value from 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, ... to 99%; or, when the second threshold Th2 is 99% , The second threshold Th2 can be a value of 98%, 97%, 96%, 95%, ...
  • the second threshold Th2 up to 1%, or selected from the first threshold Th1 at 20%, and the second threshold Th2 at 80%, or selected from The first threshold Th1 is at 30%, the second threshold Th2 is 70%, or the first threshold Th1 is at 40%, the second threshold Th2 is 60%, or the first threshold Th1 is at 50%, the second threshold Th2 Is 60%.
  • the first threshold Th1 is -1% to -99 of the initial inventory
  • a value between% and the second threshold Th2 is a value between 1% and 99% of the initial inventory.
  • the cumulative consumption may be a single consumption after only one measurement, or may be the cumulative consumption after multiple measurements.
  • the recharge control of the biosensor of the present invention and the method for restoring a biosensor to a proper working state can not only be applied to a biosensor having an electrode structure with a working electrode and a counter electrode, but also can be applied to a biosensor with a working electrode and a counter electrode.
  • the biosensor with the electrode structure of the counter electrode and one auxiliary electrode it can also be applied to the biosensor with the electrode structure of one working electrode, two counter electrodes and one auxiliary electrode; or it can also be applied to the biosensor with two working electrodes and two A biosensor of the electrode structure of the counter electrode.
  • the recharge control method of the biosensor of the present invention also covers the requirement of raising the inventory during the warm-up period. For example, before performing the refilling operation, it further includes the following steps: the physiological signal measuring device forcibly executes the refilling operation, and stopping the refilling operation when the inventory level increases to be greater than or equal to the second threshold Th1.
  • the application of the recharge voltage is implemented by applying a fixed potential difference or a fixed current value.
  • the fixed potential difference or a fixed current value is essentially dynamically adjusted according to the change in AgCl consumption.
  • Detailed implementation Please refer to Figure 5 to Figure 10 for the mechanism.
  • the present invention also provides a method for restoring a biosensor to a proper working state.
  • the biosensor includes a first electrode and a counter electrode.
  • the counter electrode includes a silver halide material and a silver material.
  • the silver halide material has a stock
  • the method of the present invention includes the following steps: after the measurement operation, the change in the inventory level is calculated; and the first refill operation is initiated to recover The variation value of the replenishment inventory level, wherein the inventory level is controlled to fluctuate between the first threshold Th1 and the second threshold Th2.
  • the first refill operation is started to refill the consumed silver halide material, so that the inventory level is increased to the first threshold Th1 and higher than the first threshold Th1 A predetermined value between the second threshold Th2.
  • the method of the present invention further includes at least one of the following steps: each time the predetermined number of measurement operations is met, calculating the change value of the inventory level during the predetermined number of times, and starting The first refill operation (that is, another refill operation) is to refill the change value of the inventory level; and every time the fixed time interval of each measurement operation is met, the second refill operation is started.
  • data related to the inventory level can also be transmitted to the remote control system.
  • the remote control system monitors the inventory level, and provides update instructions to the physiological signal measurement device when necessary to perform refilling conditions. renew.
  • Figures 5A-5B and 7A-7D show the constant voltage circuit in the measurement mode and the recharge mode of the present invention.
  • Figures 7A-7D show the constant voltage circuit alternately in different ways.
  • the measurement mode can be started and stopped by applying the measurement potential difference V1 and removing the measurement potential difference V1, respectively, and the corresponding current is represented by Ia.
  • the measurement potential difference V1 is applied between the working electrode W and the counter electrode R/C during the measurement period T1, so that the voltage of the working electrode W is higher than the voltage of the counter electrode R/C.
  • the switches S1 and S4 are in the closed state at this time, while the switches S2 and S3 are in the open state, the working electrode W is +Vl, and the counter electrode R/C is grounded, so that the working electrode W undergoes oxidation reaction, and The chemical reagent and the analyte are electrochemically reacted to output a physiological signal Ia, and at the same time, the AgCl of the counter electrode R/C has a consumption corresponding to the physiological signal Ia.
  • T1 between the plurality of measurement periods T1 is a period T2 during which no measurement is performed. In some preferred embodiments, T2 is a fixed value.
  • the recharging mode can be started and stopped by applying the recharging gap V2 and removing the recharging gap V2 respectively, and the corresponding current is represented by Ib.
  • V2 is a fixed value between 0.1V and 0.8V, preferably a fixed value between 0.2V and 0.5V.
  • the recharge mode apply the recharge potential V2 between the working electrode W and the counter electrode R/C for the recharge period t2 (t2 is between 0 and T2), so that the voltage of the counter electrode R/C is higher than The voltage of the working electrode W.
  • the switches S1 and S4 are in the open state at this time, while the switches S2 and S3 are in the closed state, the working electrode W is grounded, and the counter electrode R/C is +V2, so that the Ag on the counter electrode R/C The oxidation reaction proceeds, and the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C is recharged to a recharge.
  • the recharge potential V2 in the constant voltage circuit is a fixed voltage, and the measured output current is Ib.
  • the present invention defines the capacity of AgCl by calculating the area under the current curve (Capacity, unit coulomb, represented by the symbol "C"), so the consumption of AgCl in the measurement mode is Ia*Tl, and the recharge of AgCl in the recharge mode The amount is Ib*t2.
  • the recharge amount of AgCl can be controlled by regulating the application time t2 of the recharge potential V2.
  • the recharge amount can be made equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) the consumption.
  • the horizontal axis in FIGS. 7A-7D represents time, the line of V1 represents the application and removal of the measured potential difference V1, and the line of V2 represents the application and removal of the recharge potential difference V2.
  • V2 and T2 are both fixed values, and the application time t2 of V2 (that is, the recharging period) is a variable value.
  • the recharge period t2 is dynamically adjusted from 0 to T2 based on the physiological signal Ia measured in the measurement mode and the measurement period T1. As shown in FIG. 7A, t2 can be t2', t2', or t2''.... In other words, the recharge period t2 can be changed according to the consumption of AgCl.
  • the consumption of AgCl is large, it can be recharged for a longer period of time to keep the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C within the safe inventory.
  • the amount of AgCl recharged during t2'' will be greater than the amount of AgCl recharged during t2'.
  • T2 1/2 of T2, 2/5 T2, 3/5 T2, etc.
  • FIGS. 7E and 7F show the current schematic diagrams of the constant voltage circuit of the present invention alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode in different ways.
  • the horizontal axis is time and the vertical axis is current
  • the curve represents the physiological parameter value curve converted from the measured physiological signal Ia.
  • V2 and T2 are fixed values, and t2 during the recharge period is a variable value.
  • the white area under the curve represents the AgCl consumption in the measurement mode (Ia*Tl)
  • the oblique area represents the AgCl recharge in the recharge mode (Ib*t2).
  • the recharge period t2 is based on the measured physiological signal Ia and the measurement period T1 and is set between 0 and T2. Dynamic adjustment between time. According to needs, the recharging mode can be selected in the front part (as shown in FIG. 7E) or the back part (as shown in FIG. 7F) of the period (T2) in which the measurement mode is not performed.
  • Figures 8A-8B and Figures 10A-10C show the constant current circuit in the measurement mode and the recharge mode of the present invention
  • Figures 10A-10C show the constant current circuit of the present invention.
  • the current circuit alternately performs three voltage schematic diagrams of measurement mode and recharge mode in different ways.
  • the measurement mode can be started and stopped by applying the measurement potential difference V1 and removing the measurement potential difference V1, respectively, and the corresponding current is represented by Ia.
  • the measurement potential difference V1 is applied between the working electrode W and the counter electrode R/C for the measurement period T1.
  • the switches S1 and S4 are in the closed state at this time, while the other switches are in the open state.
  • the working electrode W is +V1, and the counter electrode R/C is grounded, so that the working electrode W undergoes oxidation reaction and interacts with The chemical reagent and the analyte undergo an electrochemical reaction to output a physiological signal Ia, and at the same time, the AgCl of the counter electrode R/C has a consumption corresponding to the physiological signal Ia.
  • T1 between the plurality of measurement periods T1 is a period T2 during which no measurement is performed.
  • T2 is a fixed value.
  • the recharging mode can be started and stopped by applying the recharging gap V2 (V2 is a variable value) and removing the recharging gap V2, and the corresponding current is represented by Ib.
  • V2 is a variable value
  • Ib the recharging current
  • the recharging level difference V2 is applied between the working electrode W and the counter electrode R/C for the recharging period t2 (t2 is between 0 and T2).
  • switches S1 and S4 are in an open state, and at least one switch corresponding to S2 and I_F1 to I_Fn is in a closed state (the figure exemplarily shows that the switches corresponding to I_F1 and I_F3 are in a closed state), and work
  • the electrode W is grounded, and the counter electrode R/C is +V2, so that the Ag on the counter electrode R/C is oxidized, and then AgCl is recharged.
  • At least one switch corresponding to I_F1 to I_Fn can be selected to output a fixed current Ib, and the AgCl can be controlled by regulating the application time t2 of the potential difference V2 The amount of recharge.
  • the recharge amount can be made equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) the consumption.
  • FIGS. 9A-9B and FIGS. 10A-10C show the stepless switching constant current circuit in the measurement mode and the recharge mode in the present invention.
  • the measurement mode and recharge mode of this embodiment are similar to those in Figs. 8A-8B, so they will not be repeated here.
  • the difference from the embodiment of Figs. 8A-8B is only when the embodiment is in the recharge mode, according to the physiological signal Ia
  • a fixed current Ib is output by the control of a digital-to-analog converter (DAC), and the recharge amount of AgCl is controlled by adjusting the application time t2 of the potential difference V2.
  • the recharge amount can be made equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) the consumption.
  • the horizontal axis is time and the vertical axis is current.
  • the line of V1 represents the application and removal of the measured potential difference V1
  • the line of V2 represents the application and removal of the recharge potential V2.
  • T2 is a fixed value
  • the application time t2 of V2 and V2 (that is, the recharging period) is a variable value.
  • the recharge period t2 is dynamically adjusted from 0 to T2 based on the physiological signal Ia measured in the measurement mode and the measurement period T1.
  • t2 can be t2', t2'', or t2'''...
  • the recharge period t2 can be changed according to the consumption of AgCl. If the consumption of AgCl is large, it can be recharged for a longer period of time to keep the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C within the safe inventory.
  • V2 is a variable value
  • V2 is dynamically adjusted according to the consumption of AgCl in the physiological signal measurement step (that is, in the measurement mode).
  • One example of the dynamic adjustment method is as follows. For example, the above-mentioned constant current circuit with segment switching is used. The circuit has n fixed current sources and n switches, and each fixed current source corresponds to a switch.
  • At least one of the n switches is selected to be turned on (even if the switch is in a closed state) to output a fixed current value.
  • the recharge period t2 is a fixed value
  • the recharge amount of AgCl can be controlled by selecting different fixed current outputs.
  • V2 is a variable value
  • the measurement mode and the recharge mode are seamlessly alternated, and the period during which no measurement is performed is the recharge period.
  • a constant current circuit with segment switching can control multiple current paths through multiple switches, and can recharge with a segmented constant current according to the amount of current required.
  • the method is more power-efficient and can reduce costs.
  • the potential difference can come from a DC power supply or an AC power supply.
  • FIGS. 7A to 10C describe the alternate cycle of the measurement step and the refilling step. That is, there is an AgCl refilling step between each measurement step. This method can better ensure that AgCl is kept safe. Within inventory. However, in some preferred embodiments, Y times of AgCl recharge can also be selectively matched during N measurements, where Y ⁇ N, so that the cumulative recharge of AgCl can still be kept within the safety stock range. .
  • the measurement step and the refilling step do not necessarily need to be performed in an alternating cycle, and the refilling step may be performed again after several measurement steps, or the refilling step may be performed only after a predetermined measurement time. For example, the refilling step can be performed again after 10 measurements, or the refilling step can be performed only after the cumulative measurement time reaches 1 hour.
  • FIG. 10D shows a schematic diagram of the constant current circuit of the present invention alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode in a manner similar to FIG. 10C.
  • the curve represents the physiological parameter value curve converted from the measured physiological signal Ia, and is similar to Fig. 10C, T2 and t2 are both fixed values, and V2 is a variable value.
  • the white area under the curve represents the consumption of AgCl in the measurement mode (Ia*Tl), and the slanted area represents the recharge volume of AgCl in the recharge mode (Ib*t2). It can be seen from the figure that, in order to make Ib*t2 close to Ia*Tl or within a certain range of Ia*Tl, the recharge position difference V2 is dynamically adjusted according to the consumption of AgCl.
  • each physiological parameter value is not limited to the output when the measurement is completed or during the recharge period.
  • the AgCl refilling step is not limited to being executed after each physiological parameter is output or after the physiological signal is obtained.
  • FIG. 11 shows a method for determining an analyte according to an embodiment of the present invention, by which the service life of the micro biosensor can be prolonged.
  • the miniature biosensor may be, for example, the miniature biosensor shown in FIGS. 2A-2D, which is implanted subcutaneously to measure the physiological signal of the physiological parameter associated with the analyte in the biological fluid (for example, tissue fluid).
  • the analyte may be glucose in the tissue fluid
  • the physiological parameter is the glucose value in the human body
  • the physiological signal is the current value measured by the micro biosensor.
  • the method for measuring the analyte includes repeatedly executing the measuring step (S901) and the refilling step (S902).
  • the measurement step (S901) includes using the aforementioned constant voltage or constant current circuit to perform the aforementioned measurement mode during the measurement period T1 to output a physiological signal (ie, current value), and at the same time, the AgCl of the counter electrode has a consumption corresponding to the current value.
  • the measuring step (S901) further includes stopping the measuring step by stopping the aforementioned measuring mode, and the current value is calculated to output a physiological parameter (ie, a glucose value).
  • the recharging step (S902) includes using the aforementioned constant voltage or constant current circuit to perform the aforementioned recharging mode during the recharging period, so that the AgCl on the counter electrode has a recharging amount corresponding to the consumption, so that the AgCl on the counter electrode
  • the amount is controlled within the safety stock range.
  • the potential difference between the working electrode and the counter electrode can be kept stable, so that the obtained current value can still maintain a stable proportional relationship with the glucose value (if the detected substance is other analytes, it may also be proportional. It may also be an inverse relationship). In other words, it is possible to maintain a stable proportional relationship between the next current value obtained in the next measurement step and the next glucose value.
  • the recharging step (S902) also includes stopping the recharging step by stopping the aforementioned recharging mode. After the refilling step (S902) is finished, loop back to perform the measurement step (S901) until the measurement step (S901) and the refilling step (S902) are executed N times.
  • the positive potential on the counter electrode 130 promotes the following oxidation reaction on the counter electrode 130:
  • the human body can obtain chloride ions and iodide ions through iodine-doped table salt, so the available halide ions include at least chloride ions and iodide ions, which are used to recharge the silver halide.
  • each measurement potential difference V1 is applied during the measurement period T1
  • each recharge level difference V2 is applied during the recharge period t2
  • the measurement period T1 is a fixed value, which can be within 3 seconds, 5 seconds Within, within 10 seconds, within 15 seconds, within 30 seconds, within 1 minute, within 2 minutes, within 5 minutes, or within 10 minutes.
  • the time value is preferably within 30 seconds.
  • the measurement period T1 is a fixed value, and can be 2.5 seconds, 5 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2.5 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, or 30 minutes, preferably 30 seconds.
  • each measurement period T1 plus each recharge period t2 is a fixed value.
  • each recharge level difference V2 has a fixed voltage value, and each recharge period t2 is dynamically adjusted according to each consumption of AgCl (as shown in FIG. 7A).
  • the output physiological parameters are obtained by calculating the physiological signals at a single measurement time point in each measurement period T1.
  • the output physiological parameters are obtained through a mathematical operation of a plurality of physiological signals at a plurality of measurement time points in each measurement period T1.
  • the aforementioned mathematical operation value is, for example, the accumulated value, the average value, the median, the average value of the median, and so on.
  • the amount of each refill to be equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) each consumption, and controlling the amount of AgCl of the counter electrode within the safety stock interval, the lower
  • the next physiological signal obtained in a determination step maintains a stable proportional relationship with the next physiological parameter.
  • the step of removing each measured potential difference V1 is to disconnect the circuit that connects the working electrode and the counter electrode, or set each measured potential difference V1 to zero.
  • the power can be turned off to make the measuring circuit have an open state; or, a 0 volt voltage can be applied between the working electrode and the counter electrode, wherein the operation time of either of the two operations is 0.01 to 0.5 seconds.
  • Removing the step of measuring the potential difference V1 can avoid the generation of ⁇ -shaped physiological signals.
  • the step of removing each regenerative level difference V2 is to disconnect the circuit that connects the working electrode and the counter electrode, or set each regenerative level difference V2 to zero.
  • the measurement period T1 can be a variable value or a combination of a variable value and a fixed value (for example, a variable value + a fixed value.
  • the variable value can be 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, or 24 hours.
  • the fixed value may be, for example, 30 seconds).
  • the present invention uses voltage applied to the counter electrode R/C to measure the reaction current of the counter electrode in a period, and the reaction current in the period is calculated by mathematical operation. Knowing the initial capacity of AgCl, for example, by calculating the area under the reaction current curve to define the initial capacity of AgCl, also known as the initial amount or initial coulombic amount (C initial ), the following are all explained by the amount.
  • each measurement step (S901) the consumption of AgCl (expressed as C consume ) is defined by calculating the area under the current curve of the working electrode W.
  • the safety stock interval is represented by the ratio of Ag to AgCl.
  • the present invention uses the coulombic amount (C) measured on the counter electrode to reflect the ratio of Ag to AgCl.
  • the ratio of Ag to AgCl is 99.9%: 0.1%, 99%: 1%, 95%: 5%, 90%: 10%, 70%: 30%, 50%: 50% , 40%:60% or 30:70%, so that AgCl has a certain amount of AgCl on the counter electrode without being exhausted, so that each physiological signal measurement step can be performed stably.
  • the remaining amount of AgCl is the sum of the refill amount and the initial amount minus the consumption.
  • the remaining amount of AgCl may gradually decrease, gradually increase, or change steadily or arbitrarily within an interval, but still within the interval.
  • FIG. 12 shows a method for determining an analyte according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the miniature biosensor may be, for example, the miniature biosensor shown in FIGS. 2A-2D, which is implanted subcutaneously to measure the physiological signal of the physiological parameter associated with the analyte in the biological fluid (for example, tissue fluid).
  • the electrode material of the counter electrode of the micro biosensor includes silver and silver halide.
  • the analyte can be glucose in tissue fluid
  • the physiological parameter is the glucose value in the human body
  • the physiological signal is the micro biosensor. The measured current value.
  • the method of this embodiment starts with the following steps: applying a measuring voltage to drive the working electrode to measure a physiological signal for obtaining a physiological parameter, in which a specific amount of silver halide is consumed (hereinafter referred to as a consumption amount) (S1001).
  • the value of the deconsumption amount (that is, the remaining amount mentioned above) is controlled within the range of the initial amount plus or minus a specific value.
  • the above-mentioned control steps are achieved by controlling the refilling amount to be equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) the consumption, so as to maintain the amount of silver halide within the safety stock range.
  • the increase or decrease of the number of moles of silver halide corresponds to the increase or decrease of the number of moles of silver, so for the convenience of explanation, the consumption of silver halide corresponds to the increase of simulated silver.
  • the value of the remaining amount is controlled such that the ratio of the amount of silver halide to the amount of silver plus the amount of silver halide (AgCl/Ag+AgCl) is greater than 0 and less than 1, also That is, there is only one amount of silver halide in the counter electrode, preferably between 0.01-0.99, between 0.1-0.9, between 0.2-0.8, between 0.3-0.7, or between 0.4- Between 0.6.
  • the application of the recharge voltage is stopped (S1005). Then it loops to step S1001 to execute the next loop.
  • a method for calculating the size of the Ag/AgCl material of the electrode signal sensing section is taken as an example with a biosensor service life of 16 days.
  • the average measured current of the analyte for each measurement is 30 nA
  • the measurement period (T1) is 30 seconds
  • the recharge period (t2) is 30 seconds.
  • the daily consumption of AgCl (C consume/day ) 1.3mC/day.
  • the service life requirement of the sensor is 16 days
  • the required length of the counter electrode is at least:
  • the length of the counter electrode needs to exceed 16 mm in order to make the sensor life up to 16 days.
  • the counter electrode signal sensing section needs to be equipped with a correspondingly larger Ag/AgCl material size to achieve the sensor life of 16 days.
  • the silver halide recharging step is performed between the two measurement steps.
  • the consumption and recharging of the silver halide can be repeated in a short period of time (recharge when used), so it can be reduced
  • the amount of Ag/AgCl material in the sensor further miniaturizes the sensor, so there is no need to prepare 16 days of AgCl capacity for the electrode signal sensing section material for consumption.
  • the senor by preparing the capacity of AgCl for about 1 to 2 days, the sensor can be used for 16 days, thereby achieving the effect of extending the service life of the sensor.
  • the capacity of AgCl for 1 to 2 days also refers to the initial amount of AgCl in the counter electrode before leaving the factory or before performing the first measurement, for example, between about 1.3 and 2.6 mC.
  • the initial amount can also be other smaller Or a larger range.
  • different AgCl capacities may be prepared for 1 to 5 days, 1 to 3 days, 6 to 24 hours, and 6 to 12 hours.
  • the material size of the signal sensing section of the counter electrode only needs to have the capacity to enable the stable execution of each glucose measurement step and the positive correlation between the measurement current and the glucose concentration in the body.
  • the prior art will increase the electrode length/area so that the sensor can meet the required number of days.
  • the length of the implanted end of the sensor is about 12mm. Because of the long implantation length, in order to avoid implanting deep into the subcutaneous tissue, it needs to be implanted under the skin at an oblique angle, and the implantation wound is relatively large.
  • the capacity of AgCl for 1 to 2 days is about 1.3 to 2.6 mC
  • the length of the counter electrode for 1 to 2 days is 2.5 to 5 mm, which is compared with that without the silver halide of the present invention.
  • the present invention can effectively reduce the size of the required counter electrode.
  • the length of the implanted end can be shortened, for example, the length is reduced to no more than 10 mm.
  • the lower half of the connecting area 117 to the second end 114 of the micro biosensor 100 disclosed in FIGS. 2A-2B of the present invention belong to the short implanted end 118 (as shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B), and the short implanted end 118 is implanted
  • the penetration depth must at least meet the depth of the tissue fluid glucose that can be measured in the dermis.
  • the longest side of the short implant end 118 is not greater than 6 mm, so that the micro biosensor 100 can be perpendicular to the biological
  • the method of the body surface is partially implanted under the surface of the living body.
  • the longest side of the short implant end 118 is preferably no greater than 5 mm, 4.5 mm, 3.5 mm, or 2.5 mm.
  • the short implant end 118 of the present invention includes the signal sensing section 132 of the counter electrode, and the longest side of the signal sensing section 132 is not greater than 6mm, preferably 2-6mm, 2-5mm, 2-4.5mm, 2- 3.5mm, 0.5-2mm, 0.2-1mm.
  • the silver halide recharging method of the present invention can effectively extend the service life of the sensor, and can greatly reduce the use of Ag/AgCl material on the counter electrode, so that The size of the counter electrode signal sensing section can be reduced.
  • the sensor can be miniaturized and biological toxicity can be reduced.
  • the reduction of the electrode size particularly refers to shortening the length of the implanted end of the sensor, thus reducing the pain of implantation of the user.
  • FIGS. 13A and 13B are schematic diagrams of the front and back of the first embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • the micro biosensor 300 of the present invention includes a substrate 310, a working electrode 320 disposed on the substrate 310, a counter electrode 330 and an auxiliary electrode 340, and a chemical reagent 350 surrounding the working electrode 320, the counter electrode 330 and the auxiliary electrode 340 (as shown in FIG. 13C Shown).
  • the material of the substrate 310 can be any material that is known to be suitable for use in electrode substrates and preferably has flexibility and insulation properties, such as but not limited to polymer materials such as polyester and polyimide. The aforementioned polymer materials can be used singly or in combination of multiple types.
  • the substrate 310 has a surface 311 (that is, the first surface), an opposite surface 312 (that is, the second surface) opposite to the surface 311, a first end 313 and a second end 314, and the substrate 310 is divided into 3 regions, which are respectively close to The signal output area 315 of the first end 313, the sensing area 316 close to the second end 314, and the connection area 317 between the signal output area 315 and the sensing area 316.
  • the working electrode 320 is disposed on the surface 311 of the substrate 310 and extends from the first end 313 to the second end 314 of the substrate 310.
  • the working electrode 320 includes a signal output section 321 located in the signal output area 315 of the substrate 310 and located on the substrate 310 The signal sensing section 322 of the sensing area 316.
  • the counter electrode 330 and the auxiliary electrode 340 are disposed on the opposite side surface 312 of the substrate 310 and extend from the first end 313 to the second end 314 of the substrate 310.
  • the counter electrode 330 includes a signal sensing section 332 located in the sensing area 316 of the substrate 310 and the auxiliary electrode 340 includes a signal sensing section 342 located in the sensing area 316 of the substrate 310.
  • the sensing area 316 of the micro biosensor 300 can be implanted subcutaneously so that the signal sensing section 322 measures the physiological signal associated with the analyte in the biological fluid.
  • the physiological signal will be transmitted to the signal output section 321, and then the signal output section 321 is transmitted to the processor 210 to obtain physiological parameters.
  • the physiological parameters may also be transmitted to the user device 20 via wireless/wired communication, such as a smart phone, a physiological signal receiver, or a blood glucose meter.
  • the material on the surface of the counter electrode 330 includes silver and silver halide, and the silver halide is preferably silver chloride (Silver Chloride) or silver iodide (Silver Iodine), so that the counter electrode 330 also functions as a reference electrode That is, the counter electrode 330 of the present invention can (1) form an electronic circuit with the working electrode 320, so that the working electrode 320 is smoothly connected to ensure that the oxidation reaction occurs on the working electrode 320; and (2) provide a stable relative potential as a reference Potential. Therefore, the working electrode 320 and the counter electrode 330 of the present invention form a two-electrode system.
  • the silver halide is preferably silver chloride (Silver Chloride) or silver iodide (Silver Iodine)
  • the counter electrode 330 of the present invention can (1) form an electronic circuit with the working electrode 320, so that the working electrode 320 is smoothly connected to ensure that the oxidation reaction occurs on the working electrode 320; and (2) provide a
  • the silver/silver halide can be mixed with carbon.
  • the silver/silver halide is mixed with carbon glue, and the silver halide content only needs to make the counter electrode 330 stable. Just execute the set measurement action.
  • the outermost surface of the counter electrode 330 can also be covered with a conductive material to prevent silver halide from dissolution, thereby protecting the counter electrode 330.
  • the conductive material is mainly selected from conductive materials that do not affect the measurement performance of the working electrode, such as The conductive material is Carbon.
  • the biosensor is not limited to a wire-type or stacked-type electrode structure.
  • the initial amount of silver halide may be zero before the biosensor is ready to be shipped out of the factory for sale. In this case, there is no silver halide on the counter electrode 330 of the biosensor. After the biosensor is subcutaneously implanted in the patient and during the initial recharge period before the first measurement, the silver coated on the counter electrode 330 through oxidation can be recharged with the initial amount of silver halide on the counter electrode 330 .
  • the auxiliary electrode 340 forms an electronic circuit with the counter electrode 330 during the recharging step, so that the counter electrode 330 is smoothly powered to ensure that the oxidation reaction occurs on the counter electrode 320.
  • the electrode material is selected from the same material as the working electrode 320 or the same material as the working electrode 320
  • the working electrode 320 has a lower sensitivity to hydrogen peroxide than a material, such as carbon.
  • the chemical reagent 350 covers at least the signal sensing sections 322, 332, and 342 of each electrode. In another embodiment, the chemical reagent 350 covers at least the signal sensing section 322 of the working electrode 320 (not shown in the figure). In other words, the counter electrode 330 may not be covered by the chemical reagent 350.
  • the sensing area 316 of the micro biosensor 300 can be implanted subcutaneously so that the signal sensing section 322 of the working electrode 320 measures the physiological signal associated with the analyte in the biological fluid, and the physiological signal will be transmitted to the signal output of the working electrode 320
  • the signal output section 321 transmits to the processor 210 to obtain physiological parameters. In addition to obtaining the physiological parameters from the transmission unit 200, the physiological parameters may also be transmitted to the user device 20 via wireless/wired communication for obtaining.
  • FIG. 13C is a schematic cross-sectional view along the line AA' in FIG.
  • the working electrode 320 is disposed on the surface 311 of the substrate 310
  • the counter electrode 330 and the auxiliary electrode 340 are disposed on the opposite surface 312 of the substrate 310
  • the surfaces of the working electrode 320, the counter electrode 330 and the auxiliary electrode 340 are covered with chemical reagents. 350.
  • the chemical reagent 350 covers at least a part of the surface of the working electrode 320.
  • the micro biosensor 300 of the present invention performs the measurement step during the measurement period, and performs the refill step during the refill period.
  • the voltage of the working electrode 320 is higher than the voltage of the counter electrode 330, causing the current to flow from the working electrode 320 to the direction of the counter electrode 330, thereby causing the working electrode 320 to undergo an oxidation reaction (that is, the working electrode 320, the chemical reagent 350 and an electrochemical reaction between the analyte) is measured physiological signals, reduction reaction of the electrode 330, the counter electrode 330 so that the silver halide (AgX) consumption dissociate into silver (Ag) and a halide ion (X -) . Since the silver halide in the counter electrode 330 is consumed, the silver halide in the counter electrode 330 needs to be recharged to perform the next measurement step.
  • an oxidation reaction that is, the working electrode 320, the chemical reagent 350 and an electrochemical reaction between the analyte
  • the voltage of the counter electrode 330 is higher than the voltage of the auxiliary electrode 340, so that the current flows from the counter electrode 330 to the direction of the auxiliary electrode 340, and the counter electrode 330 is oxidized to cause the silver to react with the halide ions in the living body. Or combined and refilled with silver halide, the detailed measurement steps and refilling steps are shown in Figure 11.
  • FIG. 14A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • the working electrode 320 and the auxiliary electrode 340 of the present invention may be disposed on the surface 311 of the substrate 310, the counter electrode 330 is disposed on the opposite surface 312 of the substrate 310, and the working electrode 320, the counter electrode 330 and the auxiliary electrode The surface of 340 is covered with a chemical reagent 350.
  • the current flows from the working electrode 320 to the counter electrode 330, and the working electrode 320 is oxidized to measure the physiological signal.
  • the silver halide in the counter electrode 330 is consumed and dissociated.
  • FIG. 14B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • the micro biosensor 300 of the present invention may have two working electrodes, which are a first working electrode 323 and a second working electrode 324, respectively, and the second working electrode 324 replaces the auxiliary electrode.
  • the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode 324 are provided on the surface 311 of the substrate 310
  • the counter electrode 330 is provided on the opposite side surface 312 of the substrate 310
  • the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324 and the opposite The surface of the electrode 330 is covered with a chemical reagent 350.
  • the first working electrode 323 or the second working electrode 324 can be selected to measure physiological signals, and in the recharging step, the first working electrode 323 or the second working electrode 324 helps to recharge the electrode 330 with silver halide . Therefore, in this embodiment, when the measurement step is performed, the current flows from the first working electrode 323 or the second working electrode 324 to the counter electrode 330, so that the first working electrode 323 or the second working electrode 324 is oxidized. The physiological signal is measured in response, and the silver halide in the counter electrode 330 is consumed and dissociated into silver (Ag) and halide ions (X ⁇ ).
  • FIG. 14C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the fourth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • the micro biosensor 300 of the present invention may have two working electrodes, which are a first working electrode 323 and a second working electrode 324, respectively, and the second working electrode 324 replaces the auxiliary electrode.
  • the first working electrode 323 is provided on the surface 311 of the substrate 310
  • the counter electrode 330 and the second working electrode 324 are provided on the opposite side surface 312 of the substrate 310
  • the surface of the electrode 330 is covered with a chemical reagent 350.
  • the area of the first working electrode 323 can be increased as the electrode for measurement, and the area of the second working electrode 324 can be reduced as the electrode for recharging. Therefore, in the measurement step, the first working electrode 323 is used as the electrode. The physiological signal is measured, and during the recharging step, the second working electrode 324 helps the electrode 330 to recharge the silver halide. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the measurement step is performed, the current flows from the first working electrode 323 to the counter electrode 330, so that the first working electrode 323 undergoes an oxidation reaction to measure physiological signals, and the halogenation in the counter electrode 330 silver is dissociated into silver (Ag) and a halide ion (X -) solution consumption. When the recharging step is performed, current flows from the counter electrode 330 to the second working electrode 324, so that the counter electrode 330 undergoes an oxidation reaction to combine silver with halide ions to recharge the silver halide.
  • FIG. 14D is a schematic cross-sectional view of the fifth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • the fifth embodiment is the first embodiment with one more working electrode. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the micro biosensor 300 of the present invention has two working electrodes, the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode 324, respectively. One counter electrode 330 and one auxiliary electrode 340.
  • FIG. 14D is a schematic cross-sectional view of the fifth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • the fifth embodiment is the first embodiment with one more working electrode. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the micro biosensor 300 of the present invention has two working electrodes, the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode 324, respectively. One counter electrode 330 and one auxiliary electrode 340.
  • FIG. 14D is a schematic cross-sectional view of the fifth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode 324 are disposed on the surface 311 of the substrate 310, the counter electrode 330 and the auxiliary electrode 340 are disposed on the opposite surface 312 of the substrate 310, and the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode
  • the surface of the electrode 324, the counter electrode 330, and the auxiliary electrode 340 are covered with a chemical reagent 350.
  • the first working electrode 323 or the second working electrode 324 can be selected to measure the physiological signal
  • the auxiliary electrode 340 helps the electrode 330 to be recharged with silver halide.
  • the current flows from the first working electrode 323 or the second working electrode 324 to the counter electrode 330, so that the first working electrode 323 or the second working electrode 324 is oxidized.
  • the physiological signal is measured in response, and the silver halide in the counter electrode 330 is consumed and dissociated into silver (Ag) and halide ions (X ⁇ ).
  • the recharging step is performed, current flows from the counter electrode 330 to the auxiliary electrode 340, so that the counter electrode 330 undergoes an oxidation reaction to combine silver with halide ions to recharge the silver halide.
  • FIG. 14E is a schematic cross-sectional view of the sixth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • the micro biosensor 300 of the present invention may have three working electrodes, which are a first working electrode 323, a second working electrode 324, and a third working electrode 325, and the third working electrode 325 replaces the auxiliary electrode.
  • the third working electrode 325 replaces the auxiliary electrode.
  • the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode 324 are provided on the surface 311 of the substrate 310
  • the counter electrode 330 and the third working electrode 325 are provided on the opposite side surface 312 of the substrate 310
  • the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode The surfaces of the second working electrode 324, the third working electrode 325, and the counter electrode 330 are covered with a chemical reagent 350.
  • the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324, or the third working electrode 325 can be selected to measure physiological signals, and in the recharging step, the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode 324 can also be selected.
  • the third working electrode 325 helps to recharge the electrode 330 with silver halide.
  • the current flows from the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324, or the third working electrode 325 to the counter electrode 330, so that the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode
  • the second working electrode 324 or the third working electrode 325 undergoes an oxidation reaction to measure physiological signals, and the silver halide in the counter electrode 330 is consumed and dissociated into silver (Ag) and halide ions (X ⁇ ).
  • the current flows from the counter electrode 330 to the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324, or the third working electrode 325, so that the counter electrode 330 undergoes an oxidation reaction and the silver and halide ions are combined and returned. Filled with silver halide.
  • FIG. 14F is a schematic cross-sectional view of the seventh embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • the seventh embodiment is a variation of the electrode configuration of the sixth embodiment.
  • the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324, and the third working electrode 325 are all disposed on the surface 311 of the substrate 310, and the counter electrode 330 is disposed on the opposite surface 312 of the substrate 310.
  • the surfaces of the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324, the third working electrode 325, and the counter electrode 330 are covered with a chemical reagent 350.
  • the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324, or the third working electrode 325 can be selected to measure physiological signals, and in the recharging step, the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode 324 can also be selected. Or the third working electrode 325 helps to recharge the electrode 330 with silver halide.
  • the current flows from the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324, or the third working electrode 325 to the counter electrode 330, so that the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode
  • the second working electrode 324 or the third working electrode 325 undergoes an oxidation reaction to measure physiological signals, and the silver halide in the counter electrode 330 is consumed and dissociated into silver (Ag) and halide ions (X ⁇ ).
  • the current flows from the counter electrode 330 to the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324, or the third working electrode 325, so that the counter electrode 330 undergoes an oxidation reaction and the silver and halide ions are combined and returned. Filled with silver halide.
  • FIG. 14G is a schematic cross-sectional view of the eighth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • the difference is that the second working electrode 324 is U-shaped.
  • the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode 324 are disposed on the surface 311 of the substrate 310, and the second working electrode 324 is adjacent to
  • the counter electrode 330 and the auxiliary electrode 340 are disposed on the opposite side surface 312 of the substrate 310 and are arranged around the side of the first working electrode 323.
  • the current flows from the first working electrode 323 to the counter electrode 330, so that the first working electrode 323 undergoes an oxidation reaction to measure physiological signals, and the silver halide in the counter electrode 330 is consumed dissociate into silver (Ag) and a halide ion (X -).
  • the recharging step is performed, current flows from the counter electrode 330 to the auxiliary electrode 340 or the second working electrode 324, so that the counter electrode 330 undergoes an oxidation reaction to combine silver with halide ions to recharge the silver halide.
  • the substrate 310 of the present invention is an insulator.
  • the electrode materials of the working electrode 320 and the first working electrode 323 of the present invention include but are not limited to: carbon, platinum, aluminum, gallium, gold, indium, iridium, iron, lead, magnesium, nickel, manganese, molybdenum, osmium, palladium, Rhodium, silver, tin, titanium, zinc, silicon, zirconium, mixtures of the foregoing elements, or derivatives of the foregoing elements (such as alloys, oxides or metal compounds, etc.), preferably, the working electrode 320 and the first working electrode 323
  • the material is precious metal, precious metal derivative or a combination of the foregoing.
  • the working electrode 320 and the first working electrode 323 are made of platinum-containing materials.
  • the second working electrode 324 and the third working electrode 325 can also use the elements or their derivatives as exemplified in the above-mentioned working electrode 320 and the first working electrode 323.
  • the electrode materials of the second working electrode 324 and the third working electrode 325 are selected from materials having a lower sensitivity to hydrogen peroxide than the first working electrode 323, such as carbon.
  • the electrode material of the counter electrode 330 of the present invention includes silver and silver halide (Ag/AgX), it has the functions of a well-known counter electrode and a reference electrode at the same time, that is, the counter electrode 330 of the present invention can be (1) formed with the working electrode 320
  • the electronic circuit enables the working electrode 320 to be energized smoothly to ensure that the electrochemical reaction occurs on the working electrode 320; (2) to form an electronic circuit with the auxiliary electrode 340 to make the counter electrode 330 to be energized smoothly to ensure that the oxidation reaction occurs on the counter electrode 330 And (3) provide a stable relative potential as a reference potential. Therefore, the working electrode 320, the counter electrode 330 and the auxiliary electrode 340 of the present invention form a three-electrode system which is different from the traditional three-electrode system.
  • the auxiliary electrode 340 of the present invention can also be used as an electrode for measuring physiological signals.
  • a layer of conductive material such as carbon
  • a conductive layer such as silver
  • the impedance of the output end makes the counter electrode 330 of the present invention form a conductive layer, a carbon layer, and a silver/silver halide layer in order from the opposite surface 312 of the substrate 310.
  • Figures 15A-15B and 7A-7D respectively show the constant voltage circuit in the measurement mode and the recharge mode of the present invention.
  • Figures 7A-7D show the constant voltage circuit alternately in different ways. Schematic diagram of current in measurement mode and recharge mode.
  • the measurement mode can be started and stopped by applying the measurement potential difference V1 and removing the measurement potential difference V1, respectively, and the corresponding current is represented by Ia.
  • the measurement potential difference V1 is applied between the working electrode W and the counter electrode R/C during the measurement period T1, so that the voltage of the working electrode W is higher than the voltage of the counter electrode R/C.
  • the switches S1 and S4 are in the closed state at this time, while the switches S2 and S3 are in the open state, the working electrode W is +Vl, the counter electrode R/C is grounded, and the auxiliary electrode Aux is in an open state to make the work
  • the electrode W undergoes an oxidation reaction, and electrochemically reacts with the chemical reagent and the analyte to output a physiological signal Ia, and at the same time, the AgCl of the electrode R/C has a consumption amount corresponding to the physiological signal Ia.
  • T2 is a fixed value.
  • the recharging mode can be started and stopped by applying the recharging gap V2 and removing the recharging gap V2 respectively, and the corresponding current is represented by Ib.
  • V2 is a fixed value between 0.1V and 0.8V, preferably a fixed value between 0.2V and 0.5V.
  • the recharge mode apply the recharge potential V2 between the counter electrode R/C and the auxiliary electrode Aux for the recharge period t2 (t2 is between 0 and T2), so that the voltage of the counter electrode R/C is higher than The voltage of the auxiliary electrode Aux.
  • the switches S1 and S4 are in an open state at this time, while the switches S2 and S3 are in a closed state, the working electrode W is in an open state, the counter electrode R/C is +V2, and the auxiliary electrode Aux is grounded to make the counter electrode
  • the Ag on the R/C undergoes an oxidation reaction, and the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C is recharged to a recharge.
  • the recharge potential V2 in the constant voltage circuit is a fixed voltage
  • the measured output current is Ib.
  • the present invention defines the capacity of AgCl by calculating the area under the current curve (Capacity, unit coulomb, represented by the symbol "C"), so the consumption of AgCl in the measurement mode is Ia*Tl, and the recharge of AgCl in the recharge mode The amount is Ib*t2. Therefore, the recharge amount of AgCl can be controlled by regulating the application time t2 of the recharge potential V2. In other words, on the premise that the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C is kept within the safety inventory, the recharge amount can be made equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) the consumption.
  • the horizontal axis in FIGS. 7A-7D represents time, the line of V1 represents the application and removal of the measured potential difference V1, and the line of V2 represents the application and removal of the recharge potential difference V2.
  • V2 and T2 are both fixed values, and the application time t2 of V2 (that is, the recharging period) is a variable value.
  • the recharge period t2 is dynamically adjusted from 0 to T2 based on the physiological signal Ia measured in the measurement mode and the measurement period T1. As shown in FIG. 7A, t2 can be t2', t2', or t2''.... In other words, the recharge period t2 can be changed according to the consumption of AgCl.
  • the consumption of AgCl is large, it can be recharged for a longer time to keep the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C within the safe inventory.
  • the amount of AgCl recharged during t2'' will be greater than the amount of AgCl recharged during t2'.
  • T2 1/2 of T2, 2/5 T2, 3/5 T2, etc.
  • FIGS. 7E and 7F show the current schematic diagrams of the constant voltage circuit of the present invention alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode in different ways.
  • the horizontal axis is time and the vertical axis is current
  • the curve represents the physiological parameter value curve converted from the measured physiological signal Ia.
  • V2 and T2 are fixed values
  • t2 during recharging is a variable value.
  • the white area under the curve represents the AgCl consumption in the measurement mode (Ia*Tl)
  • the oblique area represents the AgCl recharge in the recharge mode (Ib*t2).
  • the recharge period t2 is based on the measured physiological signal Ia and the measurement period T1 and is set between 0 and T2. Dynamic adjustment between time. According to needs, the recharging mode can be selected in the front part (as shown in FIG. 7E) or the back part (as shown in FIG. 7F) of the period (T2) in which the measurement mode is not performed.
  • Figures 8A-8B and Figures 10A-10C show the constant current circuit in the measurement mode and the recharge mode of the present invention
  • Figures 10A-10C show the constant current circuit of the present invention.
  • the current circuit alternately performs three voltage schematic diagrams of measurement mode and recharge mode in different ways.
  • the measurement mode can be started and stopped by applying the measurement potential difference V1 and removing the measurement potential difference V1, respectively, and the corresponding current is represented by Ia.
  • the measurement potential difference V1 is applied between the working electrode W and the counter electrode R/C for the measurement period T1.
  • the switches S1 and S4 are in the closed state at this time, and the other switches are in the open state, the working electrode W is +V1, the counter electrode R/C is grounded, and the auxiliary electrode Aux is in the open state, so that the working electrode W undergoes an oxidation reaction, and electrochemically reacts with the chemical reagent and the analyte to output a physiological signal Ia, and at the same time, the AgCl of the counter electrode R/C has a consumption amount corresponding to the physiological signal Ia.
  • T1 between the plurality of measurement periods T1 is a period T2 during which no measurement is performed. In some preferred embodiments, T2 is a fixed value.
  • the recharging mode can be started and stopped by applying the recharging gap V2 (V2 is a variable value) and removing the recharging gap V2, and the corresponding current is represented by Ib.
  • V2 is a variable value
  • Ib the recharging current
  • the recharging level difference V2 is applied between the auxiliary electrode Aux and the counter electrode R/C for the recharging period t2 (t2 is between 0 and T2).
  • switches S1 and S4 are in an open state, and at least one switch corresponding to S2 and I_F1 to I_Fn is in a closed state (the figure exemplarily shows that the switches corresponding to I_F1 and I_F3 are in a closed state), and work
  • the electrode W is in an open state
  • the auxiliary electrode Aux is grounded
  • the counter electrode R/C is +V2, so that the Ag on the counter electrode R/C is oxidized, and then AgCl is recharged.
  • At least one switch corresponding to I_F1 to I_Fn can be selected to output a fixed current Ib, and the AgCl can be controlled by regulating the application time t2 of the potential difference V2 The amount of recharge.
  • the recharge amount can be made equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) the consumption.
  • FIGS. 9A-9B and FIGS. 10A-10C show the stepless switching constant current circuit in the measurement mode and the recharge mode in the present invention.
  • the measurement mode and recharge mode of this embodiment are similar to those in Figs. 8A-8B, so they will not be repeated here.
  • the difference between the embodiments of Figs. 8A-8B is only when the embodiment is in the recharge mode, according to the physiological signal Ia,
  • the fixed current Ib is output by the control of the digital-to-analog converter (DAC), and the recharge amount of AgCl is controlled by adjusting the application time t2 of the potential difference V2.
  • the recharge amount can be made equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) the consumption.
  • the horizontal axis is time and the vertical axis is current.
  • the line of V1 represents the application and removal of the measured potential difference V1
  • the line of V2 represents the application and removal of the recharge potential V2.
  • T2 is a fixed value
  • the application time t2 of V2 and V2 (that is, the recharging period) is a variable value.
  • the recharge period t2 is dynamically adjusted from 0 to T2 based on the physiological signal Ia measured in the measurement mode and the measurement period T1.
  • t2 can be t2', t2'', or t2'''...
  • the recharge period t2 can be changed according to the consumption of AgCl. If the consumption of AgCl is large, it can be recharged for a longer period of time to keep the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C within the safe inventory.
  • V2 is a variable value
  • V2 is dynamically adjusted according to the consumption of AgCl in the physiological signal measurement step (that is, in the measurement mode).
  • One example of the dynamic adjustment method is as follows. For example, the above-mentioned constant current circuit with segment switching is used. The circuit has n fixed current sources and n switches, and each fixed current source corresponds to a switch.
  • At least one of the n switches is selected to be turned on (even if the switch is in a closed state) to output a fixed current value.
  • the recharge period t2 is a fixed value
  • the recharge amount of AgCl can be controlled by selecting different fixed current outputs.
  • V2 is a variable value
  • the measurement mode and the recharge mode are seamlessly alternated, and the period during which no measurement is performed is the recharge period.
  • a constant current circuit with segment switching can control multiple current paths through multiple switches, and can recharge with a segmented constant current according to the amount of current required.
  • the method is more power-efficient and can reduce costs.
  • the potential difference can come from a DC power source or an AC power source, preferably from a DC power source.
  • Figures 7A-7F, Figures 8A-8B, Figures 9A-9B, and Figures 10A-10C all describe the alternate cycle of the measurement step and the refilling step, that is, there is an AgCl return between each measurement step.
  • this method can better ensure that AgCl remains within the safety stock.
  • Y times of AgCl recharge can also be selectively matched during N measurements, where Y ⁇ N, so that the cumulative recharge of AgCl can still be kept within the safety stock range.
  • the measurement step and the refilling step do not necessarily need to be performed in an alternating cycle, and the refilling step may be performed again after several measurement steps, or the refilling step may be performed only after a predetermined measurement time. For example, the refilling step can be performed again after 10 measurements, or the refilling step can be performed only after the cumulative measurement time reaches 1 hour.
  • FIG. 10D shows a schematic diagram of the constant current circuit of the present invention alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode in a manner similar to FIG. 10C.
  • the curve represents the physiological parameter value curve converted from the measured physiological signal Ia, and is similar to Fig. 10C, T2 and t2 are both fixed values, and V2 is a variable value.
  • the white area under the curve represents the consumption of AgCl in the measurement mode (Ia*Tl), and the slanted area represents the recharge of AgCl in the recharge mode (Ib*t2). It can be seen from the figure that in order to make Ib*t2 close to Ia*Tl or within a certain range of Ia*Tl, the recharge position difference V2 is dynamically adjusted according to the consumption of AgCl.
  • each physiological parameter value is not limited to the output when the measurement is completed or during the recharge period.
  • the AgCl refilling step is not limited to being executed after each physiological parameter is output or after the physiological signal is obtained.
  • the working electrode W In a two-electrode system including a working electrode W and a counter electrode R/C, the working electrode W must constantly switch between performing an oxidation reaction and performing a reduction reaction. In the chemical reaction environment of the electrode, the switching between oxidation and reduction reactions must go through a stabilization period, such as several seconds or minutes.
  • the loop between the working electrode W and the counter electrode R/C can be used to perform the measurement step, and then the auxiliary electrode Aux
  • the circuit between the counter electrode R/C and the counter electrode R/C is recharged, thereby avoiding the disadvantage that the working electrode W needs a stabilization period, that is, the recharging step can be performed immediately after the measurement step.
  • FIG. 11 shows a method for determining an analyte according to an embodiment of the present invention, by which the service life of the micro biosensor can be prolonged.
  • the miniature biosensor may be, for example, the miniature biosensor shown in FIGS. 13A-14, which is implanted subcutaneously to measure the physiological signal of the physiological parameter associated with the analyte in the biological fluid (for example, tissue fluid).
  • the analyte may be glucose in the tissue fluid
  • the physiological parameter is the glucose value in the human body
  • the physiological signal is the current value measured by the micro biosensor.
  • the method for measuring the analyte includes repeatedly executing the measuring step (S901) and the refilling step (S902).
  • the measurement step (S901) includes using the aforementioned constant voltage or constant current circuit to perform the aforementioned measurement mode during the measurement period T1 to output a physiological signal (ie, current value), and at the same time, the AgCl of the counter electrode has a consumption corresponding to the current value.
  • the measuring step (S901) further includes stopping the measuring step by stopping the aforementioned measuring mode, and the current value is calculated to output a physiological parameter (ie, a glucose value).
  • each measurement potential difference V1 is applied during the measurement period T1
  • each recharge level difference V2 is applied during the recharge period t2
  • the measurement period T1 is a fixed value, which can be within 3 seconds, 5 seconds Within, within 10 seconds, within 15 seconds, within 30 seconds, within 1 minute, within 2 minutes, within 5 minutes, or within 10 minutes.
  • the time value is preferably within 30 seconds.
  • the measurement period T1 is a fixed value, and can be 2.5 seconds, 5 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2.5 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, or 30 minutes, preferably 30 seconds.
  • each measurement period T1 plus each recharge period t2 is a fixed value.
  • each recharge level difference V2 has a fixed voltage value, and each recharge period t2 is dynamically adjusted according to each consumption of AgCl (as shown in FIG. 7A).
  • the output physiological parameters are obtained by calculating the physiological signals at a single measurement time point in each measurement period T1.
  • the output physiological parameters are obtained through a mathematical operation of a plurality of physiological signals at a plurality of measurement time points in each measurement period T1.
  • the aforementioned mathematical operation value is, for example, the accumulated value, the average value, the median, the average value of the median, and so on.
  • the amount of each refill to be equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) each consumption, and controlling the amount of AgCl of the counter electrode within the safety stock interval, the lower
  • the next physiological signal obtained in a determination step maintains a stable proportional relationship with the next physiological parameter.
  • the step of removing each measured potential difference V1 is to disconnect the circuit that connects the working electrode and the counter electrode, or set each measured potential difference V1 to zero.
  • the power can be turned off to make the measurement circuit open; or, a voltage of 0 volts can be applied between the working electrode and the counter electrode, and the operating time of either of the two operations is 0.01 to 0.5 seconds.
  • Removing the step of measuring the potential difference V1 can avoid the generation of ⁇ -shaped physiological signals.
  • the step of removing each regenerative level difference V2 is to disconnect the circuit configured to connect the auxiliary electrode and the counter electrode, or to set each regenerative level difference V2 to zero.
  • the measurement period T1 can be a variable value or a combination of a variable value and a fixed value (for example, a variable value + a fixed value.
  • the variable value can be 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, or 24 hours.
  • the fixed value may be, for example, 30 seconds).
  • the present invention uses voltage applied to the counter electrode R/C to measure the reaction current of the counter electrode in a period, and the reaction current in the period is calculated by mathematical operation. Knowing the initial capacity of AgCl, for example, by calculating the area under the reaction current curve to define the initial capacity of AgCl, also known as the initial amount or initial coulombic amount (C initial ), the following are all explained by the amount.
  • each measurement step (S901) the consumption of AgCl (expressed as C consume ) is defined by calculating the area under the current curve of the working electrode W.
  • the safety stock interval is represented by the ratio of Ag to AgCl.
  • the present invention uses the coulombic amount (C) measured on the counter electrode to reflect the ratio of Ag to AgCl.
  • the ratio of Ag to AgCl is 99.9%: 0.1%, 99%: 1%, 95%: 5%, 90%: 10%, 70%: 30%, 50%: 50% , 40%:60% or 30:70%, so that AgCl has a certain amount of AgCl on the counter electrode without being exhausted, so that each physiological signal measurement step can be performed stably.
  • the remaining amount of AgCl is the sum of the refill amount and the initial amount minus the consumption.
  • the remaining amount of AgCl may gradually decrease, gradually increase, or change steadily or arbitrarily within an interval, but still within the interval.
  • FIG. 11 shows a method for determining an analyte according to another embodiment of the present invention, by which the service life of the micro biosensor can be prolonged and the amount of silver and silver halide materials for the counter electrode can be reduced.
  • the miniature biosensor can be, for example, the miniature biosensor shown in FIGS. 13A-13C and 14A-14G, which is implanted subcutaneously to measure the physiological parameters associated with the analyte in the biological fluid (for example, tissue fluid). Signal.
  • the electrode material of the counter electrode of the micro biosensor includes silver and silver halide.
  • the analyte can be glucose in tissue fluid
  • the physiological parameter is the glucose value in the human body
  • the physiological signal is the micro biosensor. The measured current value.
  • the method of this embodiment starts with the following steps: applying a measuring voltage to drive the working electrode to measure a physiological signal for obtaining a physiological parameter, in which a specific amount of silver halide is consumed (hereinafter referred to as a consumption amount) (S1001).
  • the increase or decrease of the number of moles of silver halide corresponds to the increase or decrease of the number of moles of silver, so for the convenience of explanation, the consumption of silver halide corresponds to the increase of simulated silver.
  • the value of the remaining amount is controlled such that the ratio of the amount of silver halide to the amount of silver plus the amount of silver halide (AgCl/Ag+AgCl) is greater than 0 and less than 1, also That is, there is only one amount of silver halide in the counter electrode, preferably between 0.01-0.99, between 0.1-0.9, between 0.2-0.8, between 0.3-0.7, or between 0.4- Between 0.6.
  • the application of the recharge voltage is stopped (S1005). Then it loops to step S1001 to execute the next loop.
  • a method for calculating the size of the Ag/AgCl material of the electrode signal sensing section is taken as an example with a biosensor service life of 16 days.
  • the average measured current of the analyte for each measurement is 30 nA
  • the measurement period (T1) is 30 seconds
  • the recharge period (t2) is 30 seconds.
  • the daily consumption of AgCl (C consume/day ) 1.3mC/day.
  • the service life requirement of the sensor is 16 days
  • the required length of the counter electrode is at least:
  • the length of the counter electrode needs to exceed 16 mm in order to make the sensor life up to 16 days.
  • the counter electrode signal sensing section needs to be equipped with a correspondingly larger Ag/AgCl material size to achieve the sensor life of 16 days.
  • the silver halide recharging step is performed between the two measurement steps.
  • the consumption and recharging of the silver halide can be repeated in a short period of time (recharge when used), so it can be reduced
  • the amount of Ag/AgCl material in the sensor further miniaturizes the sensor, so there is no need to prepare 16 days of AgCl capacity for the electrode signal sensing section material for consumption.
  • the senor by preparing the capacity of AgCl for about 1 to 2 days, the sensor can be used for 16 days, thereby achieving the effect of extending the service life of the sensor.
  • the capacity of AgCl for 1 to 2 days also refers to the initial amount of AgCl in the counter electrode before leaving the factory or before performing the first measurement, for example, between about 1.3 and 2.6 mC.
  • the initial amount can also be other smaller Or a larger range.
  • different AgCl capacities may be prepared for 1 to 5 days, 1 to 3 days, 6 to 24 hours, and 6 to 12 hours.
  • the material size of the signal sensing section of the counter electrode only needs to have the capacity to enable the stable execution of each glucose measurement step and the positive correlation between the measurement current and the glucose concentration in the body.
  • the prior art will increase the electrode length/area to make the sensor reach the required number of days.
  • the sensor implantation end length is about 12mm.
  • the implantation length is long, and in order to avoid implanting deep into the subcutaneous tissue, it needs to be implanted under the skin at an oblique angle, and the implantation wound is relatively large.
  • the capacity of AgCl for 1 to 2 days is about 1.3 to 2.6 mC
  • the length of the counter electrode for 1 to 2 days is 2.5 to 5 mm, which is compared with that without the silver halide of the present invention.
  • the present invention can effectively reduce the size of the required counter electrode.
  • the length of the implanted end can be shortened, for example, the length is reduced to no more than 10 mm.
  • the lower half of the connection area 317 to the second end 314 belong to the short implant end 318 (as shown in FIGS.
  • the dermis layer can measure the depth of tissue fluid glucose, so the longest side of the short implanted end 318 is not greater than 6 mm, so that the micro biosensor 300 can be partially implanted under the epidermis of the organism in a manner perpendicular to the epidermis of the organism.
  • the longest side of the short implant end 318 is preferably no more than 5 mm, 4.5 mm, 3.5 mm, or 2.5 mm.
  • the short implanted end of the present invention includes the signal sensing section 332 of the counter electrode 330, and the longest side of the signal sensing section 332 is not greater than 6mm, preferably 2-6mm, 2-5mm, 2-4.5mm or 2-3.5 mm, 0.5-2mm, 0.2-1mm.
  • the silver halide recharging method of the present invention can effectively extend the service life of the sensor, and can greatly reduce the use of Ag/AgCl material on the counter electrode, so that The size of the counter electrode signal sensing section can be reduced.
  • the sensor can be miniaturized and biological toxicity can be reduced.
  • the reduction of the electrode size particularly refers to shortening the length of the implanted end of the sensor, thus reducing the pain of implantation of the user.
  • FIGS. 18A and 18B are schematic diagrams of the front and back of the first embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • the micro biosensor 400 of the present invention includes a substrate 410, a first working electrode 420, a second working electrode 430, a first pair of electrodes 440 and a second pair of electrodes 450, and surrounding the first working electrode 420, a
  • the two working electrodes 430, the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 are chemical reagents 460 (as shown in FIG. 18C).
  • the material of the substrate 410 can be any material that is known to be suitable for use in electrode substrates and preferably has flexibility and insulation properties, such as but not limited to polymer materials such as polyester and polyimide.
  • the aforementioned polymer materials can be used singly or in combination of multiple types.
  • the substrate 410 has a surface 411 (that is, the first surface), an opposite surface 412 (that is, the second surface) opposite to the surface 411, a first end 413 and a second end 414, and the substrate 410 is divided into 3 regions, which are respectively close to The signal output area 415 of the first end 413, the sensing area 416 close to the second end 414, and the connection area 417 between the signal output area 415 and the sensing area 416.
  • the first working electrode 420 and the second working electrode 430 are disposed on the surface 411 of the substrate 410 and extend from the first end 413 to the second end 414 of the substrate 410.
  • the first working electrode 420 includes a first signal output section 421 located in the signal output area 415 of the substrate 410 and a first signal sensing section 422 located in the sensing area 416 of the substrate 410.
  • the second working electrode 430 includes a second signal output section 431 located in the signal output area 415 of the substrate 410 and a second signal sensing section 432 located in the sensing area 416 of the substrate 410.
  • the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 are disposed on the opposite side surface 412 of the substrate 410 and extend from the first end 413 to the second end 414 of the substrate 410.
  • the first pair of electrodes 440 includes a third signal output section 441 located in the signal output area 415 of the substrate 410, and a third signal sensing section 442 located in the sensing area 416 of the substrate 410
  • the second pair of electrodes 450 includes a third signal output section 441 located on the substrate 410.
  • the fourth signal output section 451 of the signal output area 415 and the fourth signal sensing section 452 of the sensing area 416 of the substrate 410 are located.
  • the materials on the surfaces of the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 include silver and silver halide, and the silver halide is preferably silver chloride (Silver Chloride) or silver iodide (Silver Iodine).
  • the counter electrode 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 both have the functions of reference electrodes, that is, the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 of the present invention can (1) form an electronic circuit with the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 , Enabling the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 to be smoothly energized to ensure that the oxidation reaction occurs on the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430; and (2) providing a stable relative potential as a reference potential. Therefore, the first working electrode 420, the second working electrode 430, the first pair of electrodes 440, and the second pair of electrodes 450 of the present invention form a four-electrode system.
  • the silver/silver halide can be mixed with carbon.
  • the silver/silver halide is mixed into the carbon glue, and the silver halide content is as long as the first pair of electrodes 440 And the second pair of electrodes 450 can perform the set measurement operation stably.
  • the surface of the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 may also be covered with conductive materials to prevent silver halide from dissolution, thereby protecting the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450, wherein the conductive material is
  • the conductive material that does not affect the measurement performance of the working electrode is mainly selected, for example, the conductive material is Carbon.
  • the biosensor is not limited to a wire-type or stacked-type electrode structure.
  • the initial amount of silver halide may be zero before the biosensor is ready to be shipped out of the factory for sale. In this case, there is no silver halide on the first pair of electrodes 440 and/or the second pair of electrodes 450 of the biosensor.
  • the silver coated on the first pair of electrodes 440 and/or the second pair of electrodes 450 through oxidation may be in the first pair of electrodes.
  • the pair of electrodes 440 and/or the second pair of electrodes 450 are refilled with the initial amount of silver halide.
  • the chemical reagent 460 at least covers the first signal sensing section 422 of the first working electrode 420. In another embodiment, the chemical reagent 460 covers at least the first signal sensing section 422 and the second signal sensing section 432 of the first working electrode 420 and the second working electrode 430. In another embodiment, the chemical reagent 460 covers the signal sensing sections 422, 432, 442, and 452 of all electrodes. In another embodiment, the first pair of electrodes 440 and/or the second pair of electrodes 450 may not be covered by the chemical reagent 460.
  • the sensing area 416 of the micro biosensor 400 can be implanted subcutaneously so that the first signal sensing section 422 and the second signal sensing section 432 perform the determination of the physiological signals associated with the analyte in the biological fluid, and the physiological signals will be transmitted separately
  • the first output section 421 and the second output section 431 of the signal are transmitted to the processor 210 from the first output section 421 and the second output section 431 to obtain physiological parameters.
  • the physiological parameters may also be transmitted to the user device 20 via wireless/wired communication, such as a smart phone, a physiological signal receiver, or a blood glucose meter.
  • FIG. 18C is a schematic cross-sectional view along the line AA' in FIG.
  • the first working electrode 420 and the second working electrode 430 are disposed on the surface 411 of the substrate 410
  • the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 are disposed on the opposite surface 412 of the substrate 410
  • the first working electrode 420 The surfaces of the second working electrode 430, the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 are covered with a chemical reagent 460.
  • the chemical reagent 460 covers at least a part of the surface of a working electrode.
  • the micro biosensor 400 of the present invention will perform the measurement step during the measurement period and perform the refill step during the refill period.
  • the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 can be selected to measure physiological signals, and in the recharging step, the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 helps the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second electrode Two pairs of electrodes 450 are recharged with silver halide. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the measurement step is performed, the voltage of the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 is higher than the voltage of the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450, so that the current flows from the first working electrode.
  • the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 flows in the direction of the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450, thereby causing the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 to undergo an oxidation reaction (that is, the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430).
  • the electrochemical reaction between the electrode 430, the chemical reagent 460 and the analyte) to measure the physiological signal the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 undergo a reduction reaction, so that the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 silver halide consumed dissociate into silver (Ag) and a halide ion (X -).
  • the silver halide in the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 is consumed, it is necessary to recharge the silver halide in the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 to perform the next measurement step.
  • the voltage of the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 is higher than the voltage of the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430, so that the current flows from the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 Flow in the direction of the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430, and then cause the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 to oxidize to combine silver and halide ions to recharge the silver halide.
  • Detailed measurement steps and recharge The steps are illustrated in Figure 12.
  • FIG. 19A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • the second embodiment is a change of the electrode configuration of the first embodiment.
  • the first working electrode 420 and the first pair of electrodes 440 of the micro biosensor 400 of the present invention are disposed on the surface 411 of the substrate 410, and the second working electrode 430 and the second pair of electrodes 450
  • the opposite side surface 412 of the substrate 410 is provided, and the surface of the first working electrode 420, the second working electrode 430, the first pair of electrodes 440, or the second pair of electrodes 450 is covered with a chemical reagent 460.
  • the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 can be selected to measure physiological signals, and in the recharging step, the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 can also be selected to help The pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 are backfilled with silver halide.
  • the current flows from the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 to the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450, so that the first working electrode 420 Or the second working electrode 430 undergoes an oxidation reaction to measure physiological signals, and the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 undergo a reduction reaction, so that the silver halide in the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 is consumed and dissociated into silver (Ag) and a halide ion (X -).
  • the current flows from the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 to the direction of the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430, thereby causing the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 to generate
  • the oxidation reaction combines silver and halide ions to recharge the silver halide.
  • FIG. 19B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • the first working electrode 420 of the micro biosensor 400 of the present invention is arranged on the surface 411 of the substrate 410, and the second working electrode 430, the first pair of electrodes 440, and the second pair of electrodes 450 are arranged on the surface of the substrate 410.
  • the side surface 412, and the surface of the first working electrode 420, the second working electrode 430, the first pair of electrodes 440, or the second pair of electrodes 450 are covered with a chemical reagent 460.
  • the second working electrode 430 can be arranged between the two opposite electrodes, and can also be arranged at the leftmost or rightmost position (not shown in the figure).
  • the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 can be selected to measure physiological signals
  • the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode can also be selected 430 helps to recharge the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 with silver halide.
  • FIG. 19C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the fourth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
  • the first working electrode 420 and the second working electrode 430 of the micro biosensor 400 of the present invention are disposed on the surface 411 of the substrate 410, and the second working electrode 430 is U-shaped and is adjacently disposed and surrounds the first working electrode.
  • the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 are disposed on the opposite side surface 412 of the substrate 410, and the first working electrode 420, the second working electrode 430, the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second The surfaces of the two pairs of electrodes 450 are covered with a chemical reagent 460.
  • the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 can be selected to measure physiological signals, and in the recharging step, the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 can also be selected. It helps to recharge the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 with silver halide.
  • FIGS. 18C-19C basically cover the surface of the first working electrode 420 with the chemical reagent 460 at least.
  • the materials of the first working electrode 420 and the second working electrode 430 include but are not limited to: carbon, platinum, aluminum, gallium, gold, indium, iridium, iron, lead, magnesium, nickel, manganese, Molybdenum, osmium, palladium, rhodium, silver, tin, titanium, zinc, silicon, zirconium, mixtures of the foregoing elements, or derivatives of the foregoing elements (such as alloys, oxides or metal compounds, etc.), preferably, the first work
  • the materials of the electrode 420 and the second working electrode 430 are precious metals, derivatives of precious metals, or a combination of the foregoing.
  • the first working electrode 420 and the second working electrode 430 are platinum-containing materials.
  • the electrode material of the second working electrode 430 is selected from a material having a lower sensitivity to hydrogen peroxide than that of the first working electrode 420, such as carbon.
  • any of the above embodiments in order to prevent the silver electrode material from being disconnected due to excessive chlorination, it is also possible to add one between the opposite side surface 412 of the substrate 410 and the silver of the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450.
  • Layer of conductive material such as carbon
  • the resistance at the switch will be too high. Therefore, a layer of conductive material can be added between the carbon conductive material and the opposite surface 412 of the substrate 410.
  • the layer such as silver is used to reduce the impedance of the signal output terminal, so that the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 of the present invention start from the opposite side surface 412 of the substrate 410 as a conductive layer, a carbon layer, and a silver/silver halide layer in order .
  • the micro biosensor 400 of the present invention can use, for example, the first working electrode 420 and the first pair of electrodes 440 to perform the measurement step while using the second working electrode. 430 and the second pair of electrodes 450 perform a recharging step. Or, for example, the first working electrode 420 is used to continuously perform the measurement step, while the second working electrode 430 is used to help the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 perform the recharging step.
  • FIGS. 20A-20C respectively show the constant voltage circuit in the present invention that can perform the measurement mode and the recharge mode according to different methods.
  • the measurement mode can be started and stopped by applying the measurement potential difference V1 and removing the measurement potential difference V1, respectively, and the corresponding current is represented by Ia.
  • the first working electrode W1 is controlled by switch S1
  • the first pair of electrodes R/C1 is controlled by switches S5 and S6
  • the second working electrode W2 is controlled by switches S2 and S7
  • the second The counter electrode R/C2 is controlled by switches S3 and S4.
  • the measurement potential difference V1 is applied between the first working electrode W1 and the first pair of electrodes R/C1 during the measurement period T1, so that the voltage of the first working electrode W1 is higher than that of the first pair of electrodes. Voltage of electrode R/C1.
  • the switches S1 and S6 are in the closed state, and the switch S5 is in the open state.
  • the first working electrode W1 is +Vl, and the first pair of electrodes R/C1 is grounded, so that the first working electrode W1 undergoes oxidation reaction and reacts with chemical reagents.
  • the recharging mode it can be started and stopped by applying the recharging gap V2 and removing the recharging gap V2 respectively, and the corresponding current is represented by Ib.
  • V2 is a fixed value between 0.1V and 0.8V, preferably a fixed value between 0.2V and 0.5V.
  • the recharge mode apply the recharge potential V2 between the second working electrode W2 and the second pair of electrodes R/C2 for the recharge period t2, so that the voltage of the second pair of electrodes R/C2 is higher than that of the second working electrode The voltage of W2.
  • the switches S4 and S7 are in the open state, and the switches S2 and S3 are in the closed state.
  • the second pair of electrodes R/C2 is +V2, and the second working electrode W2 is grounded, so that the Ag on the second pair of electrodes R/C2 The oxidation reaction is carried out, and the AgCl on the second pair of electrodes R/C2 is recharged to a recharge amount.
  • the recharge potential V2 in the constant voltage circuit is a fixed voltage, and the measured output current is Ib.
  • the present invention defines the capacity of AgCl by calculating the area under the current curve (Capacity, unit coulomb, represented by the symbol "C"), so the consumption of AgCl in the measurement mode is Ia*Tl, and the recharge of AgCl in the recharge mode The amount is Ib*t2. Therefore, the recharge amount of AgCl can be controlled by regulating the application time t2 of the recharge potential V2. In other words, under the premise that the AgCl on the first or second pair of electrodes R/C1 or R/C2 is kept within the safety inventory, the recharge amount can be equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) consumption quantity.
  • Figure 20A illustrates that the timing of the simultaneous measurement mode and the timing of the recharge mode overlap.
  • the above-mentioned switch control can also be changed to other forms of circuits to have a variety of flexible operation modes.
  • the measurement The mode sequence and the recharge mode sequence can be carried out at the same time, and can also be partially overlapped or not overlapped.
  • Figures 20B-20C are similar to Figure 20A, the only difference is that Figure 20B shows an embodiment using W2 and R/C2 for measurement and W1 and R/C1 for refilling; and Figure 20C shows an embodiment using W1 and R /C2 is measured and W2 and R/C1 are used for refilling.
  • the constant voltage circuit alternately switches to FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B and repeats the cycle.
  • the constant voltage circuit alternately switches to FIG. 20A and FIG. 20C and repeats the cycle.
  • the first pair of electrodes R/C1 and the second pair of electrodes R/C2 can be consumed and recharged in turn, so that the AgCl on the two pairs of electrodes can be kept within the safe inventory.
  • the constant voltage circuit may have a third voltage source to control the recharge voltage difference to be different from the measured voltage difference.
  • the constant voltage circuit shown in Figs. 20A-20C can also alternately perform the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
  • 7A-7D respectively show the current schematic diagrams of the constant voltage circuit alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode in different ways.
  • T1 between a plurality of measurement periods T1 is a period T2 during which no measurement is performed.
  • T2 is a fixed value.
  • the horizontal axis in FIG. 7A7D represents time, the line of V1 represents the application and removal of the measured potential difference V1, and the line of V2 represents the application and removal of the recharge potential difference V2. Please refer to FIG. 7A.
  • V2 and T2 are both fixed values, and the application time t2 of V2 (that is, the recharging period) is a variable value.
  • the recharge period t2 is dynamically adjusted from 0 to T2 based on the physiological signal Ia measured in the measurement mode and the measurement period T1. As shown in FIG. 7A, t2 can be t2', t2', or t2''.... In other words, the recharge period t2 can be changed according to the consumption of AgCl. If the consumption of AgCl is large, it can be recharged for a longer time to keep the AgCl on the first pair of electrodes R/C1 within the safe inventory. For example, the amount of AgCl recharged during t2'' will be greater than the amount of AgCl recharged during t2'.
  • T2 1/2 of T2, 2/5 T2, 3/5 T2, etc.
  • FIGS. 7E and 7F show the current schematic diagrams of the constant voltage circuit of the present invention alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode in different ways.
  • the horizontal axis is time and the vertical axis is current
  • the curve represents the physiological parameter value curve converted from the measured physiological signal Ia.
  • V2 and T2 are fixed values, and t2 during the recharge period is a variable value.
  • the white area under the curve represents the AgCl consumption in the measurement mode (Ia*Tl)
  • the oblique area represents the AgCl recharge in the recharge mode (Ib*t2).
  • the refill period t2 is based on the measured physiological signal Ia and the measurement period T1 and is set between 0 and T2. Dynamic adjustment between time. According to needs, the recharging mode can be selected in the front part (as shown in FIG. 7E) or the back part (as shown in FIG. 7F) of the period (T2) in which the measurement mode is not performed.
  • FIG. 21 shows a constant current circuit capable of segmented switching between the measurement mode and the recharge mode in the present invention.
  • the method of the constant current circuit with segment switching to repeat the measurement mode and the recharge mode is similar to that of FIG. 20A, so it will not be repeated here.
  • the main difference is that the recharging mode can be started and stopped by applying the recharging gap V2 (V2 is a variable value) and removing the recharging gap V2, and the corresponding current is represented by Ib.
  • the recharging potential V2 is applied between the second working electrode W2 and the second pair of electrodes R/C2 for the recharging period t2 .
  • the switches S2 and S3 are in the closed state
  • the switch S2 and at least one switch corresponding to I_F1 to I_Fn in the partial constant current circuit 61 are in the closed state
  • the second working electrode W2 is grounded
  • the second pair of electrodes R/C2 is + V2, so that the Ag on the second pair of electrodes R/C2 undergoes an oxidation reaction, and AgCl is backfilled.
  • the constant current circuit with segment switching in this embodiment can selectively switch to I_F1, I_F2, I_F3...I_Fn by controlling multiple switches corresponding to I_F1 to I_Fn to adjust the required recharge level difference V2 and output the current Ib.
  • the recharging amount of AgCl can be controlled by adjusting the recharging level difference V2 and its application time t2 according to the magnitude of the physiological signal Ia and the measurement period T1.
  • the recharge amount can be equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) consumption quantity.
  • part of the constant current circuit 61 may be configured to connect to the second pair of electrodes R/C2.
  • FIG. 22 shows a constant current circuit capable of stepless switching between the measurement mode and the recharge mode in the present invention.
  • the measurement mode of the constant current circuit with stepless switching is similar to that of Figs. 20A-20C, and the recharging mode is similar to that of Fig. 21, so it will not be repeated here.
  • the difference between the embodiment of FIG. 22 and FIG. 21 is only that in the constant current circuit of FIG. 22, the part of the constant current circuit 71 with stepless switching is controlled by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC) to output a fixed current Ib.
  • DAC digital-to-analog converter
  • FIGS. 10A-10C show the voltage schematic diagrams of the constant current circuit of the present invention alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode in different ways.
  • the horizontal axis in FIGS. 10A-10C represents time
  • the line of V1 represents the application and removal of the measured potential difference V1
  • the line of V2 represents the application and removal of the recharge potential difference V2.
  • T2 is a fixed value
  • the application time t2 of V2 and V2 (that is, the recharging period) is a variable value.
  • the recharge period t2 is dynamically adjusted from 0 to T2 based on the physiological signal Ia measured in the measurement mode and the measurement period T1. As shown in FIG.
  • t2 can be t2', t2'', or t2'''...
  • the recharge period t2 can be changed according to the consumption of AgCl. If the consumption of AgCl is large, it can be recharged for a longer time to keep the AgCl on the first pair of electrodes R/C1 within the safe inventory.
  • V2 is a variable value
  • V2 is dynamically adjusted according to the consumption of AgCl in the physiological signal measurement step (that is, in the measurement mode).
  • One example of the dynamic adjustment method is as follows. For example, the above-mentioned constant current circuit with segment switching is used. The circuit has n fixed current sources and n switches, and each fixed current source corresponds to a switch.
  • At least one of the n switches is selected to be turned on (even if the switch is in a closed state) to output a fixed current value.
  • the recharge period t2 is a fixed value
  • the recharge amount of AgCl can be controlled by selecting different fixed current outputs.
  • V2 is a variable value
  • the measurement mode and the recharge mode are seamlessly alternated, and the period during which no measurement is performed is the recharge period.
  • a constant current circuit with segment switching can control multiple current paths through multiple switches, and can recharge with a segmented constant current according to the amount of current required.
  • the method is more power-efficient and can reduce costs.
  • the potential difference can come from a DC power source or an AC power source, preferably a DC power source.
  • Figures 7A-7F, Figures 21-22, and Figures 10A-10C all describe the alternate cycle of the measurement step and the refilling step, that is, there is an AgCl refilling step between each measurement step.
  • This method It can better ensure that AgCl remains within the safety stock.
  • Y times of AgCl recharge can also be selectively matched during N measurements, where Y ⁇ N, so that the cumulative recharge of AgCl can still be kept within the safety stock range.
  • the measurement step and the refilling step do not necessarily need to be performed in an alternating cycle, and the refilling step may be performed again after several measurement steps, or the refilling step may be performed only after a predetermined measurement time. For example, the refilling step can be performed again after 10 measurements, or the refilling step can be performed only after the cumulative measurement time reaches 1 hour.
  • FIG. 10D shows a schematic diagram of the constant current circuit of the present invention alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode in a manner similar to FIG. 10C.
  • the curve represents the physiological parameter value curve converted into the measured physiological signal Ia, and similar to FIG. 10C, T2 and t2 are both fixed values, and V2 is a variable value.
  • the white area under the curve represents the consumption of AgCl in the measurement mode (Ia*Tl), and the slanted area represents the recharge volume of AgCl in the recharge mode (Ib*t2). It can be seen from the figure that in order to make Ib*t2 close to Ia*Tl or within a certain range of Ia*Tl, the recharge position difference V2 is dynamically adjusted according to the consumption of AgCl.
  • each physiological parameter value is not limited to the output when the measurement is completed or during the recharge period.
  • the AgCl refilling step is not limited to being executed after each physiological parameter is output or after the physiological signal is obtained.
  • the working electrodes used in the measurement mode and the recharge mode can be the first working electrode W1 and the second working electrode W1.
  • the counter electrode used in the measurement mode can also be either the first pair of electrodes R/C1 and the second pair of electrodes R/C2, but the counter electrode used in the recharge mode Preferably, it is the counter electrode used in the previous measurement mode. Two exemplary embodiments are described below.
  • Example 1 is carried out in chronological order: (a) use W1/W2 (representing one of W1 and W2) and R/C1 measurement, (b) use the other W1/W2 and R/C1 recharge, (c) Use one of W1/W2 and R/C2 to measure, (d) use the other W1/W2 and R/C2 to recharge, repeat steps (a)-(d).
  • steps (a), (b), (a), (b), (c), (d), (c), (d) are repeatedly executed in chronological order.
  • FIGS. 23A and 23B show schematic diagrams of different embodiments in which the constant current or constant voltage circuit of the present invention performs the measurement mode and the recharge mode at the same time.
  • the horizontal axis in FIGS. 23A and 23B is time, the line of V1 represents the application and removal of the measured potential difference V1, and the line of V2 represents the application and removal of the recharge potential difference V2. Since there are two counter electrodes and two working electrodes in the present invention, the measuring step and the recharging step can be performed at the same time.
  • FIG. 23A and 23B show schematic diagrams of different embodiments in which the constant current or constant voltage circuit of the present invention performs the measurement mode and the recharge mode at the same time.
  • the first combination formed by the first working electrode W1 and the first pair of electrodes R/C1 and the second combination formed by the second working electrode W2 and the second pair of electrodes R/C2 alternately perform measurement and return. Filling steps. That is, when the first combination is used for the measurement step, the second combination is used for the refill step, and vice versa.
  • the first working electrode W1 is fixed for the measuring step
  • the second working electrode W2 is fixed for the recharging step
  • the two counter electrodes are used alternately between the measuring step and the recharging step.
  • multiple T1s do not overlap with each other.
  • multiple t2s do not overlap with each other.
  • T1 and t2 overlap (meaning that they start and end at the same time) or partially overlap.
  • Figures 23A and 23B show that the first measurement (using R/C1) is not accompanied by the refilling step, and the second measurement (using R/C2) is performed at the same time (refilling R/C1). However, it can also be accompanied by the refilling step (refilling R/C2) at the first measurement (using R/C1).
  • FIG. 11 shows a method for determining an analyte according to an embodiment of the present invention, by which the service life of the micro biosensor can be prolonged.
  • the miniature biosensor can be, for example, the miniature biosensor shown in FIGS. 18A-18C and 19A-19C, which is used to be implanted subcutaneously to measure the physiological parameters associated with the analyte in the biological fluid (for example, tissue fluid). Signal.
  • the analyte may be glucose in tissue fluid
  • the physiological parameter is the glucose value (or concentration) in the human body
  • the physiological signal is the current value measured by the micro biosensor.
  • the method for measuring the analyte includes repeatedly executing the measuring step (S901) and the refilling step (S902).
  • the measurement step (S901) includes using the aforementioned constant voltage or constant current circuit to perform the aforementioned measurement mode during the measurement period T1 to output a physiological signal (i.e., current value), and at the same time, the AgCl of the counter electrode has a consumption amount corresponding to the current value.
  • the measurement step (S901) also includes stopping the measurement mode as described above.
  • each measurement potential difference V1 is applied during the measurement period T1
  • each recharge level difference V2 is applied during the recharge period t2
  • the measurement period T1 is a fixed value, which can be within 3 seconds, 5 seconds Within, within 10 seconds, within 15 seconds, within 30 seconds, within 1 minute, within 2 minutes, within 5 minutes, or within 10 minutes.
  • the time value is preferably within 30 seconds.
  • the measurement period T1 is a fixed value, and can be 2.5 seconds, 5 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2.5 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes or 30 minutes, preferably 30 seconds .
  • each measurement period T1 plus each recharge period t2 is a fixed value.
  • each recharge level difference V2 has a fixed voltage value, and each recharge period t2 is dynamically adjusted according to each consumption of AgCl (as shown in FIG. 7A).
  • the output physiological parameters are obtained by calculating the physiological signals at a single measurement time point in each measurement period T1.
  • the output physiological parameters are obtained through a mathematical operation of a plurality of physiological signals at a plurality of measurement time points in each measurement period T1.
  • the aforementioned mathematical operation value is, for example, the accumulated value, the average value, the median, the average value of the median, and so on.
  • the amount of each refill to be equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) each consumption, and controlling the amount of AgCl of the counter electrode within the safety stock interval, the lower
  • the next physiological signal obtained in a determination step maintains a stable proportional relationship with the next physiological parameter.
  • the step of removing each measured potential difference V1 is to disconnect the circuit that connects the working electrode and the counter electrode, or set each measured potential difference V1 to zero.
  • the power can be turned off to make the measuring circuit have an open state; or, a 0 volt voltage can be applied between the working electrode and the counter electrode, wherein the operation time of either of the two operations is 0.01 to 0.5 seconds.
  • Removing the step of measuring the potential difference V1 can avoid the generation of ⁇ -shaped physiological signals.
  • the step of removing each regenerative level difference V2 is to disconnect the circuit that connects the working electrode and the counter electrode, or set each regenerative level difference V2 to zero.
  • the measurement period T1 can be a variable value or a combination of a variable value and a fixed value (for example, a variable value + a fixed value.
  • the variable value can be 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, or 24 hours.
  • the fixed value may be, for example, 30 seconds).
  • the present invention uses voltage applied to the counter electrode R/C to measure the reaction current of the counter electrode in a period, and the reaction current in the period is calculated by mathematical operation. Knowing the initial capacity of AgCl, for example, by calculating the area under the reaction current curve to define the initial capacity of AgCl, also known as the initial amount or initial coulombic amount (C initial ), the following are all explained by the amount.
  • each measurement step (S901) the consumption of AgCl (expressed as C consume ) is defined by calculating the area under the current curve of the working electrode W.
  • the safety stock interval is represented by the ratio of Ag to AgCl.
  • the present invention uses the coulombic amount (C) measured on the counter electrode to reflect the ratio of Ag to AgCl.
  • the ratio of Ag to AgCl is 99.9%: 0.1%, 99%: 1%, 95%: 5%, 90%: 10%, 70%: 30%, 50%: 50% , 40%: 60% or 30: 70%, so that AgCl has a certain amount on the counter electrode without being exhausted, so that each physiological signal measurement step can be performed stably.
  • the remaining amount of AgCl is the sum of the refill amount and the initial amount minus the consumption.
  • the remaining amount of AgCl may gradually decrease, gradually increase, or change steadily or arbitrarily within an interval, but still within the interval.
  • FIG. 12 shows a method for determining an analyte according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the miniature biosensor can be, for example, the miniature biosensor shown in FIGS. 18A-18C and 19A-19C, which is used to be implanted subcutaneously to measure the physiological parameters associated with the analyte in the biological fluid (for example, tissue fluid). Signal.
  • the electrode material of the counter electrode of the micro biosensor includes silver and silver halide.
  • the analyte can be glucose in tissue fluid
  • the physiological parameter is the glucose value in the human body
  • the physiological signal is the micro biosensor.
  • the measured current value Only 2 cycles of this embodiment are described below.
  • the method of this embodiment starts with the following steps: during the first measurement period, the measurement voltage is applied to drive the first or second working electrode W1/W2 to measure the physiological signal used to obtain the physiological parameter, wherein the first or second pair of electrodes
  • the silver halide of R/C1 or R/C2 (assuming the first pair of electrodes R/C1) is consumed by a consumption amount (S1101).
  • the application of the measurement voltage is stopped (S1102), and the obtained physiological signal is used to obtain the physiological parameter (S1103).
  • the recharge voltage is applied during the first recharge period to drive the counter electrode used in S1101 with the consumption (ie the first pair of electrodes R/C1), so that the amount of silver halide is recharged.
  • the recharge amount (S1104) wherein the value of the sum of the recharge amount and the initial amount minus the consumption amount (that is, the remaining amount mentioned above) is controlled within the range of the initial amount plus or minus a specific value.
  • control steps are achieved by controlling the refilling amount to be equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) the consumption, so as to maintain the amount of silver halide within the safety stock range.
  • the increase or decrease of the number of moles of silver halide corresponds to the increase or decrease of the number of moles of silver, so for the convenience of explanation, the consumption of silver halide corresponds to the increase of simulated silver.
  • the value of the remaining amount is controlled such that the ratio of the amount of silver halide to the amount of silver plus the amount of silver halide (AgCl/Ag+AgCl) is greater than 0 and less than 1, also That is, there is only one amount of silver halide in the counter electrode, preferably between 0.01-0.99, between 0.1-0.9, between 0.2-0.8, between 0.3-0.7, or between 0.4- Between 0.6.
  • the application of the recharge voltage is stopped (S1105). Then return to step S1101.
  • the measurement voltage is applied to drive the first or second working electrode W1/W2 to measure another physiological signal for obtaining another physiological parameter, and the other counter electrode (ie The silver halide of the second pair of electrodes R/C2) is consumed by a consumption amount. Then, the application of the measurement voltage is stopped (S1102), and the obtained physiological signal is used to obtain the physiological parameter (S1103). After the physiological parameters are obtained, the recharge voltage is applied during the second recharge period to drive the counter electrode used in S1101 with the consumption (ie the second pair of electrodes R/C2), so that the amount of silver halide is recharged. Recharge amount (S1104). Then it loops to step S1001 to execute the next loop.
  • a method for calculating the size of the Ag/AgCl material of the electrode signal sensing section is taken as an example with a biosensor service life of 16 days.
  • the average measured current of the analyte for each measurement is 30 nA
  • the measurement period (T1) is 30 seconds
  • the recharge period (t2) is 30 seconds.
  • the daily consumption of AgCl (C consume/day ) 1.3mC/day.
  • the service life requirement of the sensor is 16 days
  • the required length of the counter electrode is at least:
  • the length of the counter electrode needs to exceed 16 mm in order to make the sensor life up to 16 days.
  • the counter electrode signal sensing section needs to be equipped with a correspondingly larger Ag/AgCl material size to achieve the sensor life of 16 days.
  • the silver halide recharging step is performed between the two measurement steps.
  • the consumption and recharging of the silver halide can be repeated in a short period of time (recharge when used), so it can be reduced
  • the amount of Ag/AgCl material in the sensor further miniaturizes the sensor, so there is no need to prepare 16 days of AgCl capacity for the electrode signal sensing section material for consumption.
  • the senor by preparing the capacity of AgCl for about 1 to 2 days, the sensor can be used for 16 days, thereby achieving the effect of extending the service life of the sensor.
  • the capacity of AgCl for 1 to 2 days also refers to the initial amount of AgCl in the counter electrode before leaving the factory or before performing the first measurement, for example, between about 1.3 and 2.6 mC.
  • the initial amount can also be other smaller Or a larger range.
  • different AgCl capacities may be prepared for 1 to 5 days, 1 to 3 days, 6 to 24 hours, and 6 to 12 hours.
  • the material size of the signal sensing section of the counter electrode only needs to have the capacity to enable the stable execution of each glucose measurement step and the positive correlation between the measurement current and the glucose concentration in the body.
  • the prior art will increase the electrode length/area so that the sensor can meet the required number of days.
  • the length of the implanted end of the sensor is about 12mm. Due to the long implantation length, in order to avoid implanting deep into the subcutaneous tissue, it needs to be implanted under the skin at an oblique angle, and the implantation wound is relatively large.
  • the capacity of AgCl for 1 to 2 days is about 1.3 to 2.6 mC
  • the length of the counter electrode for 1 to 2 days is 2.5 to 5 mm, which is compared with that without the silver halide of the present invention.
  • the present invention can effectively reduce the size of the required counter electrode.
  • the length of the implanted end can be shortened, for example, the length is reduced to no more than 10 mm.
  • the lower half of the connection area 417 of the micro biosensor 400 disclosed in FIGS. 18A-18C of the present invention to the second end 414 belong to the short implanted end 418 (as shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B), and the short implanted end 418 is implanted
  • the penetration depth must be at least the depth of the tissue fluid glucose that can be measured in the dermis.
  • the longest side of the short implant end 418 is not more than 6 mm, so that the micro biosensor 400 can be perpendicular to the biological
  • the method of the body surface is partially implanted under the surface of the living body.
  • the longest side of the short implant end 418 is preferably no greater than 5 mm, 4.5 mm, 3.5 mm, or 2.5 mm.
  • the short implanted end 418 of the present invention includes a third signal sensing section 442 and a fourth signal sensing section 452, and the longest side of the third signal sensing section 442 and the fourth signal sensing section 452 is not greater than 6 mm, which is relatively Preferably they are 2-6mm, 2-5mm, 2-4.5mm, 2-3.5mm, 0.5-2mm, 0.2-1mm.
  • the silver halide recharging method of the present invention can effectively extend the service life of the sensor, and can greatly reduce the use of Ag/AgCl material on the counter electrode, so that The size of the counter electrode signal sensing section can be reduced.
  • the sensor can be miniaturized and biological toxicity can be reduced.
  • the reduction of the electrode size particularly refers to shortening the length of the implanted end of the sensor, thus reducing the pain of implantation of the user.
  • the device of the present invention including four electrodes since measurement and recharging can be performed at the same time, it can have a shorter counter electrode size and a more flexible and efficient operation mode than a device including two electrodes or three electrodes.
  • the amount of silver halide on the counter electrode can be minimized to an initial amount sufficient to support at least one measurement of the biosensor.
  • the size of the counter electrode is quantified based on the initial amount of silver halide, which is sufficient to process at least one determination of the physiological signal of the physiological parameter related to the analyte in the patient. After the first measurement, the silver halide that was consumed during the refill period was refilled. Therefore, the present invention provides a method for determining the size of the counter electrode of a biosensor and for extending the lifespan of the biosensor.
  • Fig. 24 is a flowchart according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the method includes the following steps: Step a: Define a required consumption range of the silver halide during the measurement period performed by the biosensor at least once; Step b: According to the required consumption range An upper limit plus a buffer amount determines the initial amount, so that a required recharge amount range of the silver halide during the regeneration period is controlled to be sufficient to maintain an amount of the silver halide within a safety stock interval To ensure that a second physiological signal obtained during a second measurement period after the regeneration period maintains a stable proportional relationship with a second physiological parameter; step c: converting the initial quantity to the size of the pair of electrodes; Step d: Make the pair of electrodes contain at least the initial amount of the silver halide; Step e: Measure the physiological signal during the measurement period and the silver halide is consumed by a consumption amount; and Step f: During the regeneration period the silver halide It is recharged once.
  • an initial amount of silver halide is prepared before the biosensor is ready to be sold out of the factory.
  • the silver halide layer can be printed with an initial amount on the counter electrode or a silver layer coated on the counter electrode via halogenation so that it has an initial amount of silver halide.
  • the initial amount of silver halide may be zero before the biosensor is ready to be shipped out of the factory for sale. In this case, there is no silver halide on the counter electrode of the biosensor. After the biosensor is subcutaneously implanted in the patient's body and during the initial recharging period before the first measurement, the silver coated on the counter electrode through oxidation can be recharged with the initial amount of silver halide on the counter electrode.
  • the biosensor when a biosensor is implanted in a patient, the possible trauma to the skin and/or subcutaneous tissue sometimes causes the signal monitored by the sensor to be unstable.
  • the biosensor before using the biosensor, the biosensor must be completely "moistened” or hydrated to achieve a balance with the analyte in the patient (for example, glucose in the biological fluid). Therefore, after the biosensor is implanted in the organism, the user must wait for a warm-up period before the initial measurement of the biosensor in order to obtain an accurate reading of the analyte concentration. In this case, since the biosensor needs a warm-up period before measuring the analyte after being implanted in the organism, the initial recharge period can be performed in the warm-up period without delaying any required measurement.
  • a predetermined upper limit of the detected glucose concentration is selected as the reference, for example, it is performed once when the glucose concentration is 600 mg/dL Physiological signal measurement to obtain the required consumption current is 100nA per second. If the measurement period lasts for 30 seconds, the required consumption of silver chloride during a measurement period is 3000nC (or 0.003mC), which is 100nA multiplied by 30 seconds acquired.
  • the upper limit of the consumption of silver chloride required for one measurement can be selected to be greater than or equal to 0.003 mC. In other embodiments, other concentration values can be selected for the upper limit value.
  • the analyte concentration of different patients or the concentration of the same patient at different times may fluctuate to a large extent and the internal environment is variable, it is recommended to use a larger range of silver halide consumption (that is, the need Larger initial amount), so the required silver halide consumption range must also be added with a buffer amount to cope with the fluctuation of the analyte concentration in the patient's body so as to keep the silver halide in a safe inventory at the counter electrode during the measurement process. Changes within the interval, so that the measured physiological signals and physiological parameters maintain a stable proportional relationship.
  • the amount of buffering can be greater than 0, and can be adjusted based on the predetermined period of use of the biosensor.
  • the time of the scheduled use period can be any multiple of the time of the measurement period, such as 1, 2, 4, 10, 100 times, etc., or an appropriate scheduled use period is selected according to the sensor, such as 1 hour, 2 hours, 6 hours , 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 5 days, etc. to prepare a sufficient but small initial amount.
  • the arithmetic mean, geometric mean, or median of the required consumption range can also be used to replace the upper limit of the required consumption range to determine the initial amount, which depends on the biosensor's possibility.
  • the required silver halide consumption range and buffer amount can be adjusted based on the predetermined use period of the biosensor.
  • the time of the scheduled use period can be any multiple of the time of the measurement period, such as 1, 2, 4, 10, 100 times, etc., or an appropriate scheduled use period is selected according to the sensor, such as 1 hour, 2 hours, 6 hours , 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 5 days, etc. to prepare a sufficient but small initial amount.
  • a buffer can also be added to cope with fluctuations in the analyte concentration in the patient's body.
  • the amount of buffering can be greater than 0, and can be adjusted based on the predetermined period of use of the biosensor.
  • the required consumption can be adjusted according to multiple measurement times during the predetermined use period of the biosensor.
  • the initial amount can be determined based on the upper limit of the required consumption range and the sum of the buffer amount to ensure that the required recharge amount of silver halide during the recharge period is sufficient to keep the amount of silver halide within a safe inventory range to safely Ensure that the next physiological signal and the next physiological parameter are successfully obtained during the next measurement period and maintain a stable proportional relationship between the two.
  • the buffering amount may be zero.
  • the initial amount of silver chloride on the counter electrode can be determined as 1.5mC, which is the sum of 1mC and 0.5mC . Therefore, the required recharge amount range can be greater than zero, greater than 1.5 mC, or less than 1.5 mC.
  • At least the first measurement can be made. After performing the first measurement, perform the first recharge to recharge the consumed silver halide.
  • the size of the counter electrode is related to the total volume of silver and silver halide on the counter electrode.
  • the initial amount of silver halide can be converted into the total volume of silver halide on the counter electrode.
  • the total volume of silver and silver halide can be simply defined by the arithmetic product of the width, length, and thickness of silver and silver halide on the counter electrode. Any of the width, length, and thickness can be adjusted to change the volume of silver and silver halide.
  • the width and thickness of the silver and silver halide on the counter electrode are predetermined to meet the constraints of design and manufacturing capabilities.
  • the volume of silver and silver halide on the counter electrode can be reduced by reducing the length of the silver and silver halide on the counter electrode, which means that the length of the counter electrode can be shortened. Therefore, by using the method for determining the initial amount of silver halide provided by the present invention, a biosensor with a prolonged service life and a shorter counter electrode can be realized. Therefore, the patient's pain and discomfort for the implanted biosensor will be greatly reduced, and there is no need to frequently purchase new biosensors to replace old biosensors.
  • the unit amount (or unit capacity) of silver halide depending on the characteristics of the biosensors of different manufacturers is 300 mC/mm 3
  • the required silver halide volume is 0.005 mm 3
  • the width of the counter electrode is 0.3 mm and the thickness of the silver halide is 0.01 mm
  • the length of the silver halide on the counter electrode is 1.67 mm.
  • the length of the silver halide that is, the length of the counter electrode is about 6mm
  • the counter electrode The length is about 10mm. Because the length of the counter electrode can be shortened, the length of the biosensor implanted in the patient can be correspondingly shortened, and the biosensor can also be implanted vertically in the patient to minimize damage to the patient. Therefore, not only can the life of the biosensor be prolonged due to the recharge period provided by the present invention, but also the pain and discomfort caused to the patient can be reduced due to the shortened length of the counter electrode.
  • reducing the volume of silver and silver halide can be achieved by changing at least one of the length, width, and thickness of silver and silver halide. All the above modifications are still within the scope of the present invention.
  • the silver halide can be performed without waiting for the silver halide depletion signal to appear (for example, when the physiological signal appears noise) Recharge to control the inventory level of silver halide within this threshold range.
  • the use of the predetermined value S can further help control the inventory level after silver halide refilling within a specific range of preference.
  • the recharging rate of silver chloride does not have to be completely positively correlated with the decrease rate of silver chloride during the measurement, and it is not necessary to refill the silver chloride immediately after each measurement.
  • the present invention is also applicable to biosensors with any number of counter electrodes and any number of working electrodes, such as a biosensor with one working electrode, one auxiliary electrode and one counter electrode, and a biosensor with two working electrodes and one counter electrode. , Or a biosensor with two working electrodes and two counter electrodes. If the biosensor has two or more counter electrodes, all counter electrodes may have the same size and/or the same initial amount of silver halide.
  • the silver halide recharging method of the present invention can effectively extend the service life of the sensor, and can greatly reduce the use of Ag/AgCl material on the counter electrode, so that The size of the counter electrode signal sensing section can be reduced.
  • the sensor can be miniaturized and biological toxicity can be reduced.
  • the reduction of the electrode size particularly refers to shortening the length of the implanted end of the sensor, thus reducing the pain of implantation of the user.
  • connection area 117, 317, 417: connection area
  • Th1, Th3 the first threshold
  • Th2 second threshold

Abstract

A method for restoring a biosensor (100) to a proper working state. The biosensor (100) comprises a first electrode (120) and a counter electrode (130), the counter electrode (130) comprises a silver halide material and a silver material, the silver halide material has an inventory level, and in a measurement operation, the inventory level of the silver halide material is consumed. The method comprises the following steps: after the measurement operation, calculating a change in the inventory level; and starting a first refilling operation to refill the fluctuation value of the inventory level, wherein the inventory level is controlled to basically fluctuate between a first threshold (Th1) and a second threshold (Th2).

Description

回复生物传感器的方法及使用此方法的装置Method for recovering biosensor and device using this method 技术领域Technical field
本发明关于一种生物传感器及用于决定其对电极尺寸的方法,特别关于一种用于量测与待测物关联的生理参数所代表的生理信号、以及用于延长生物传感器的使用寿命的方法。The present invention relates to a biosensor and a method for determining the size of its counter electrode, in particular to a biosensor for measuring the physiological signal represented by the physiological parameter associated with the object to be measured, and for prolonging the service life of the biosensor method.
背景技术Background technique
糖尿病病患人口呈快速增长,随之益发强调需监控体内葡萄糖(Glucose)的变化,故许多研究开始朝向研发可植入体内进行连续式葡萄糖监控(continuous glucose monitoring,CGM)的系统以解决患者一天需反复多次采血与检测所带来生活上的不便。The population of diabetic patients is growing rapidly, and there is an increasing emphasis on the need to monitor changes in glucose (Glucose) in the body. Therefore, many studies have begun to develop a system that can be implanted in the body for continuous glucose monitoring (CGM) to solve the problem of patients for one day. The inconvenience in life caused by repeated blood sampling and testing.
于一基于酶的生物传感器的CGM系统领域上,其中取决于分析物浓度的生化反应信号转换成可测量的物理信号,例如光学或电化学信号。以葡萄糖测定而言,电化学反应例如以葡萄糖氧化酵素(glucose oxidase,GOx)催化葡萄糖反应生成葡萄糖酸内酯(Gluconolactone)与还原态酵素,后续还原态酵素将与体内生物流体中的氧气进行电子转移进而生成产物过氧化氢(H 2O 2),最后藉由催化产物H 2O 2的氧化反应来量化葡萄糖浓度,其反应式如下。 In the field of an enzyme-based biosensor CGM system, the biochemical reaction signal that depends on the concentration of the analyte is converted into a measurable physical signal, such as an optical or electrochemical signal. For glucose measurement, an electrochemical reaction such as glucose oxidase (GOx) catalyzes the reaction of glucose to produce Gluconolactone and reduced enzymes. The subsequent reduced enzymes will interact with the oxygen in the biological fluids in the body. The transfer then generates the product hydrogen peroxide (H 2 O 2 ), and finally the glucose concentration is quantified by the oxidation reaction of the catalyzed product H 2 O 2. The reaction formula is as follows.
Glucose+GOx(FAD)→GOx(FADH 2)+Gluconolactone Glucose+GOx(FAD)→GOx(FADH 2 )+Gluconolactone
GOx(FADH 2)+O 2→GOx(FAD)+H 2O 2 GOx(FADH 2 )+O 2 →GOx(FAD)+H 2 O 2
在上述反应中,FAD(黄素腺嘌呤二核苷酸,Flavin Adenine Dinucleotide)为GOx的活性中心。In the above reaction, FAD (Flavin Adenine Dinucleotide) is the active center of GOx.
使用者通常佩戴CGM天数长,例如14天以上,因此将其小型化成为必然趋势。CGM的基本结构包括:(a)生物传感器(Biosensor),用于测量与人体葡萄糖浓度相对应的生理信号;以及(b)传输器(Transmitter),用于传输这些生理信号。该生物传感器可以是双电极系统或三电极系统。在三电极系统的生物传感器中,包括一个工作电极(WE)、一个对电极(CE)和一个参考电极(RE)。双电极系统的生物传感器包括一个工作电极(WE)和一个对电极(CE),其中对电极兼具有参考电极的功能,因此有时也称对/参考电极(R/C)。三电极系统的生物传感器中的参考电极和双电极系统的生物传感器中作为参考电极的对电极在葡萄糖浓度的稳定测量上合适材料是 银/氯化银(Ag/AgCl)。然而,在将传感器植入生物体内之后,当工作电极发生氧化还原反应以测量葡萄糖浓度时,相对应的参考电极(RE)或参考/对电极(R/C)发生还原反应,使氯化银还原为银而使氯化银被消耗。另外,如果植入生物体内的传感器是两或三电极系统的传感器,由于氯化银在体液中的解离,参考电极上的氯化银会发生损耗,从而会造成对参考电压的漂移问题。然而在两电极系统的参考/对电极(R/C)因参与反应,其氯化银耗损程度更是高过三电极系统。因此传感器的使用寿命受限于对电极和/或参考电极上氯化银的含量。Users usually wear CGM for a long period of time, for example, 14 days or more, so miniaturization becomes an inevitable trend. The basic structure of CGM includes: (a) Biosensor, used to measure physiological signals corresponding to human glucose concentration; and (b) Transmitter, used to transmit these physiological signals. The biosensor can be a two-electrode system or a three-electrode system. In the three-electrode system biosensor, it includes a working electrode (WE), a counter electrode (CE) and a reference electrode (RE). The biosensor of the two-electrode system includes a working electrode (WE) and a counter electrode (CE). The counter electrode also functions as a reference electrode, so it is sometimes called a counter/reference electrode (R/C). The suitable material for the reference electrode in the three-electrode system biosensor and the counter electrode as the reference electrode in the two-electrode system biosensor for stable measurement of glucose concentration is silver/silver chloride (Ag/AgCl). However, after the sensor is implanted in the organism, when the working electrode undergoes oxidation-reduction reaction to measure the glucose concentration, the corresponding reference electrode (RE) or reference/counter electrode (R/C) undergoes a reduction reaction to make the silver chloride The reduction to silver causes the silver chloride to be consumed. In addition, if the sensor implanted in the organism is a sensor with a two- or three-electrode system, the silver chloride on the reference electrode will be lost due to the dissociation of silver chloride in the body fluid, which will cause the problem of drifting to the reference voltage. However, due to the reaction of the reference/counter electrode (R/C) of the two-electrode system, the consumption of silver chloride is even higher than that of the three-electrode system. Therefore, the service life of the sensor is limited by the silver chloride content on the counter electrode and/or reference electrode.
目前亦有许多针对生物传感器的使用寿命的问题所提出的发明。以二电极系统为例,在平均感测电流20纳安(nA)下对电极的消耗量约为每日1.73毫库伦(mC),假设对电极的长宽高分别为3.3毫米、0.25毫米与0.01毫米,且原本设计的电极容量(Capacity)仅为6mC时,其稳定测定的状态至多维持一天左右。不过,假如还要延长使用寿命,若欲将生物传感器植入皮下进行连续16天的葡萄糖监控,对电极的容量至少需达27.68mC的容量,在不改变宽度与厚度的状况下现有技术的对电极长度可将需要长达15.2mm。故现有技术尝试拉长对电极的长度至大于10mm,又为了避免植入深达皮下组织,此等生物传感器需以斜角方式植入。因此对患者造成较大的植入伤口、以及较高感染风险等问题,且因植入长度长,植入时的痛感亦较显着。There are also many inventions that have been proposed to address the issue of the service life of biosensors. Taking a two-electrode system as an example, the consumption of the counter electrode is about 1.73 millicoulombs (mC) per day at an average sensing current of 20 nanoamperes (nA). Assuming the length, width and height of the counter electrode are 3.3 mm, 0.25 mm, and When the electrode capacity (Capacity) of the original design is only 6mC at 0.01 mm, the stable measurement state can be maintained for about one day at most. However, if you want to extend the service life, if you want to implant the biosensor under the skin for 16 consecutive days of glucose monitoring, the capacity of the electrode must be at least 27.68mC. The current technology does not change the width and thickness. The length of the counter electrode may need to be as long as 15.2 mm. Therefore, the prior art attempts to extend the length of the counter electrode to more than 10 mm, and in order to avoid implanting deep into the subcutaneous tissue, these biosensors need to be implanted at an oblique angle. Therefore, it causes problems such as a larger implantation wound and a higher risk of infection to the patient, and due to the long implantation length, the pain during implantation is also more pronounced.
US 8,620,398描述了一种生物传感器,主要为三电极系统,虽然参考电极基本上不参与化学反应,但氯化银仍于体内环境中逐渐自然消耗,只是消耗速率较两电极系统缓慢,文中揭露其于AgCl将耗尽才进行再生,确定耗尽的步骤包括确定传输器输出电流有噪声,也就是说当测定信号不稳定、也就是说所测定的信号已是噪声时,回充AgCl的程序才会被启动,使AgCl恢复到具有足够多次测定所需的量。然后直到下一次噪声再发生时,还需要再一次回充AgCl。可以了解,US 8,620,398虽然考虑了AgCl会于测定中消耗而于生物传感器失效时进行AgCl回充。但是失效时的测定值已不可信,需要等待生物传感器完成AgCl回充的程序才能取得正确的测定值、暂时采用采血测定的方式、或是直接跳过这一次的测定,这问题对于患者或是需要得知当时血糖浓度的人员总是很困扰的。此外,由于此种生物传感器要应付至少连续数次或甚至数日的多次测定,必须准备较多的AgCl容量,但是也无可避免地会造成生物传感器的植入长度较长的问题,其也并未提出可以利用实时的AgCl回充的方式来提供不中断的测定、具有较短植入长度、且具有更长使用寿命的生物传感器。US 8,620,398 describes a biosensor, which is mainly a three-electrode system. Although the reference electrode basically does not participate in the chemical reaction, the silver chloride is still gradually consumed in the internal environment, but the consumption rate is slower than that of the two-electrode system, which is disclosed in the article. When AgCl is depleted, regeneration is performed. The step of determining depletion includes determining that the output current of the transmitter is noisy. Will be activated to restore AgCl to the amount required for enough measurements. Then until the next time the noise occurs again, AgCl needs to be recharged again. It can be understood that although US 8,620,398 considers that AgCl will be consumed in the measurement and AgCl recharge is performed when the biosensor fails. However, the measured value at the time of failure is no longer credible. It is necessary to wait for the biosensor to complete the AgCl refilling procedure to obtain the correct measured value, temporarily adopt the blood sampling method, or skip this measurement directly. This problem is for the patient or People who need to know the blood glucose concentration at the time are always troubled. In addition, since this type of biosensor has to cope with at least several consecutive or even multiple measurements over several days, a large amount of AgCl must be prepared, but it will inevitably cause the problem of a longer implantation length of the biosensor. It has not been proposed that real-time AgCl refilling can be used to provide uninterrupted measurement, a biosensor with a shorter implant length and a longer service life.
US9,351,677主要为两电极系统,参考/对电极(R/C)参与化学反应,故氯化银则伴 随电化学反应消耗,文中提出一种具有增加的AgCl容量的分析物传感器,其使用H 2O 2来再生参考电极上的AgCl,但是由于H 2O 2容易被还原成H 2O、或被氧化成O 2,因此在人体内不易稳定地存在。因此,在再生/回充期间,体内H 2O 2的浓度可能不足以稳定地回充足够的AgCl的量,且相对地其生物传感器需要配置较大的AgCl电极尺寸,其植入端也长达12mm。 US9,351,677 is mainly a two-electrode system. The reference/counter electrode (R/C) participates in the chemical reaction, so silver chloride is consumed by the electrochemical reaction. The article proposes an analyte sensor with increased AgCl capacity, which uses H 2 O 2 regenerates the AgCl on the reference electrode, but because H 2 O 2 is easily reduced to H 2 O or oxidized to O 2 , it is not easy to exist stably in the human body. Therefore, during regeneration/recharging, the concentration of H 2 O 2 in the body may not be sufficient to stably recharge enough AgCl, and the biosensor needs to be equipped with a larger AgCl electrode size, and its implanted end is also long. Up to 12mm.
生物传感器的使用寿命取决于对电极中存在的卤化银的量。但是,对电极的尺寸也取决于卤化银的量。生物传感器的寿命越长,卤化银的量就越大。卤化银的量越大,对电极的尺寸越大。对电极的尺寸越大,向患者的植入长度越长。对患者的植入长度越长,患者遭受的不适就越大。本公开提供了减小对电极的尺寸的解决方案,提供了一种对于对电极上所需的卤化银的初始量进行定量的方法,并且提供一种在需要时藉由智能地启动回充卤化银的方法及装置,无需等到让卤化银耗尽信号出现(例如生理信号出现噪声)才进行卤化银回充,而是可以选择一适当范围作为阈值区间,以控制卤化银的库存水平维持在此阈值区间内。因此,本发明提供一种生物传感器,能够达成即用即充以提供不间断测定、可稳定的回充AgCl、延长其使用寿命、以及微型化植入端的小尺寸的功效,更能减少产品的制造成本,而这些功效能够解决前述公知技术所难以克服的问题。The service life of the biosensor depends on the amount of silver halide present in the counter electrode. However, the size of the counter electrode also depends on the amount of silver halide. The longer the life of the biosensor, the greater the amount of silver halide. The larger the amount of silver halide, the larger the size of the counter electrode. The larger the size of the counter electrode, the longer the implantation length into the patient. The longer the implant length for the patient, the greater the discomfort suffered by the patient. The present disclosure provides a solution to reduce the size of the counter electrode, provides a method for quantifying the initial amount of silver halide required on the counter electrode, and provides a method for intelligently starting the refill halogenation when needed. The silver method and device do not need to wait for the silver halide depletion signal to appear (for example, physiological signal noise) before performing silver halide recharging. Instead, an appropriate range can be selected as the threshold interval to control the inventory level of silver halide to be maintained here. Within the threshold interval. Therefore, the present invention provides a biosensor capable of providing uninterrupted measurement, stable refilling of AgCl, prolonging its service life, and miniaturizing the effect of the small size of the implanted end, which can further reduce the cost of the product. Manufacturing costs, and these effects can solve the aforementioned problems that are difficult to overcome by the known technology.
本案申请人鉴于公知技术中的不足,经过悉心试验与研究,并一本锲而不舍的精神,终构思出本案,能够克服先前技术的不足,以下为本案的简要说明。In view of the shortcomings of the known technology, the applicant in this case, after careful experimentation and research, and with a spirit of perseverance, finally conceived the case, which can overcome the shortcomings of the previous technology. The following is a brief description of the case.
发明内容Summary of the invention
通过本发明的回充技术,本发明的微型生物传感器中对电极信号感测段的尺寸可缩小,进而可降低生物毒性并使微型生物传感器具有延长的使用寿命。此外,电极尺寸缩小可缩短传感器的植入端长度,因此可降低使用者植入痛感。特别地,藉由本发明的回充技术来调控氯化银的回充时机与回充量,因此即使当使用者的葡萄糖浓度变化起伏很大时,本发明的微型传感器仍可以实时且自动地回充所消耗的氯化银,使氯化银的库存量维持在预定的区间内,因此,所获得的生理信号与生理参数保持稳定的比例关系。通过本发明的回充方法,使得氯化银的回充速率不须与测定期间的氯化银的减少速率完全成正相关、也包括无须紧接于每次测定之后立即回充氯化银的回充方法。Through the recharging technology of the present invention, the size of the counter electrode signal sensing section in the micro biosensor of the present invention can be reduced, thereby reducing biological toxicity and enabling the micro biosensor to have a prolonged service life. In addition, the reduced size of the electrode can shorten the length of the implanted end of the sensor, thus reducing the pain of implantation for the user. In particular, the refilling technology of the present invention is used to control the timing and amount of refilling of silver chloride. Therefore, even when the user's glucose concentration fluctuates greatly, the micro sensor of the present invention can still recharge in real time and automatically. Charge the consumed silver chloride to maintain the inventory of silver chloride within a predetermined interval. Therefore, the obtained physiological signals and physiological parameters maintain a stable proportional relationship. Through the recharging method of the present invention, the recharging rate of silver chloride does not have to be completely positively correlated with the decrease rate of silver chloride during the measurement, and it also includes the recharging of silver chloride immediately after each measurement. Charging method.
本案之目的之一在于提供一种用于生物传感器中卤化银材料的回充控制方法,所 述生物传感器用于植入皮下以量测与生物流体中的待分析物所关联的生理参数的生理信号,所述生物传感器至少包含第一电极与对电极,所述对电极包括卤化银材料及银材料,所述卤化银材料于所述卤化银材料及所述银材料中具库存量水平,所述回充控制方法包括下列步骤:于量测操作后,取得所述生理信号的量测值,其中于量测操作后所述库存量水平减少;每经过各所述量测操作的预定次数被满足的条件下,计算所述预定次数的期间中所述库存量水平的变动值,启动第一回充操作,以回充所述库存量水平的所述变动值,所述预定次数为正整数,其中所述库存量水平基本上于第一阈值与第二阈值之间变动。One of the objectives of this case is to provide a method for controlling the recharge of silver halide material in a biosensor that is implanted under the skin to measure the physiological parameters associated with the analyte in the biological fluid. Signal, the biosensor at least includes a first electrode and a counter electrode, the counter electrode includes a silver halide material and a silver material, the silver halide material has an inventory level in the silver halide material and the silver material, so The refill control method includes the following steps: after a measurement operation, a measurement value of the physiological signal is obtained, wherein the inventory level decreases after the measurement operation; If the condition is met, calculate the variation value of the inventory level during the predetermined number of times, and start the first refill operation to refill the variation value of the inventory level, and the predetermined number of times is a positive integer , Wherein the inventory level substantially changes between the first threshold and the second threshold.
本案之目的之一在于提供一种可控制生物传感器之卤化银材料的库存量水平的生理信号测定装置,所述卤化银材料具初始库存量,所述库存量水平代表当时所述卤化银材料的库存量并被应用于使所述生理信号测定装置执行回充操作使所述卤化银材料恢复所述库存量水平,所述生理信号测定装置包括:所述生物传感器,包括:第一电极,以及第一对电极,包括所述卤化银材料及银材料;以及传输单元,耦接至所述生物传感器,且包括:处理器,被配置于启动执行测定操作时,使所述库存量减少消耗量,于启动所述回充操作时,使所述库存量增加回充量,并计算所述库存量水平,其中处理器控制所述库存量水平基本上于第一阈值与第二阈值之间变动。One of the objectives of this case is to provide a physiological signal measuring device that can control the inventory level of the silver halide material of the biosensor. The silver halide material has an initial inventory, and the inventory level represents the current The inventory is used to make the physiological signal measurement device perform a refill operation to restore the silver halide material to the inventory level, the physiological signal measurement device includes: the biosensor, includes: a first electrode, and The first pair of electrodes includes the silver halide material and the silver material; and a transmission unit, which is coupled to the biosensor, and includes a processor, configured to reduce the consumption of the inventory when the measurement operation is started. , When the refill operation is started, the inventory is increased by the refill, and the inventory level is calculated, wherein the processor controls the inventory level to basically change between a first threshold and a second threshold .
本案之目的之一在于提供一种回复生物传感器至合适工作状态的方法,所述生物传感器包括第一电极与对电极、所述对电极包括卤化银材料及银材料,所述卤化银材料具库存量水平,且在测定操作中,使所述卤化银材料的所述库存量水平被消耗,所述方法包括下列步骤:于所述测定操作后,计算所述库存量水平之变化;以及启动第一回充操作,以回充所述库存量水平的所述变动值,其中所述库存量水平被控制于基本地位于第一阈值与第二阈值之间变动。One of the objectives of this case is to provide a method for restoring a biosensor to a proper working state. The biosensor includes a first electrode and a counter electrode. The counter electrode includes a silver halide material and a silver material. The silver halide material has a stock. In the measuring operation, the inventory level of the silver halide material is consumed. The method includes the following steps: after the measuring operation, calculating the change in the inventory level; and activating the first A refill operation is performed to refill the variation value of the inventory level, wherein the inventory level is controlled to vary substantially between a first threshold and a second threshold.
附图说明Description of the drawings
本发明的上述目的及优点在参阅以下详细说明及附随附图之后对那些所属技术领域中具有通常知识者将变得更立即地显而易见。The above-mentioned objects and advantages of the present invention will become more immediately apparent to those with ordinary knowledge in the technical field after referring to the following detailed description and accompanying drawings.
[图1]为本发明一种实施例的生理信号测定装置的示意图。[Figure 1] is a schematic diagram of a physiological signal measuring device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
[图2A]为本发明的微型生物传感器的正面示意图。[Fig. 2A] is a schematic front view of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
[图2B]为本发明的微型生物传感器的背面示意图。[Fig. 2B] is a schematic diagram of the back of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
[图2C]为本发明图2A中沿A-A’线的剖面示意图。[Fig. 2C] is a schematic cross-sectional view along the line A-A' in Fig. 2A of the present invention.
[图2D]为本发明的微型生物传感器的第二实施例的剖面示意图。[Fig. 2D] is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
[图3A]为本发明一种实施例的生物传感器中卤化银材料的回充方法的流程图。[Fig. 3A] is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide material in a biosensor according to an embodiment of the present invention.
[图3B]为本发明的另一种实施例的生物传感器中卤化银材料的回充方法的流程图。[Fig. 3B] is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide material in a biosensor according to another embodiment of the present invention.
[图3C]为本发明的又一种实施例的生物传感器中卤化银材料的回充方法的流程图。[Fig. 3C] is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide material in a biosensor according to another embodiment of the present invention.
[图3D]为本发明的再一种实施例的生物传感器中卤化银材料的回充方法的流程图。[Fig. 3D] is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide material in a biosensor according to another embodiment of the present invention.
[图3E]为本发明的再一种实施例的生物传感器中卤化银材料的回充方法的流程图。[Fig. 3E] is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide material in a biosensor according to another embodiment of the present invention.
[图4A]至[图4H]为本发明各种实施例的库存量水平的曲线示意图。[FIG. 4A] to [FIG. 4H] are schematic diagrams of the inventory level of various embodiments of the present invention.
[图5A]为本发明中处于测定模式的定电压电路。[Fig. 5A] is the constant voltage circuit in the measurement mode in the present invention.
[图5B]为本发明中处于回充模式的定电压电路。[Fig. 5B] is the constant voltage circuit in the recharging mode in the present invention.
[图6A]为本发明一种实施例的库存量水平的变动曲线的示意图。[Fig. 6A] is a schematic diagram of the variation curve of the inventory level according to an embodiment of the present invention.
[图6B]为本发明另一种实施例的库存量水平的变动曲线的示意图。[Fig. 6B] is a schematic diagram of the variation curve of the inventory level according to another embodiment of the present invention.
[图6C]为本发明又一种实施例的库存量水平的变动曲线的示意图。[Fig. 6C] is a schematic diagram of the variation curve of the inventory level according to another embodiment of the present invention.
[图6D]为本发明再一种实施例的库存量水平的变动曲线的示意图。[Fig. 6D] is a schematic diagram of the variation curve of the inventory level according to another embodiment of the present invention.
[图6E]为本发明再一种实施例的库存量水平的变动曲线的示意图。[Fig. 6E] is a schematic diagram of the variation curve of the inventory level according to another embodiment of the present invention.
[图7A]为本发明的定电压电路以第一方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的电流示意图。[FIG. 7A] is a current schematic diagram of the constant voltage circuit of the present invention in the first mode alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
[图7B]为本发明的定电压电路以第二方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的电流示意图。[Fig. 7B] is a schematic diagram of the current of the constant voltage circuit of the present invention in the second mode alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
[图7C]为本发明的定电压电路以第三方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的电流示意图。[Fig. 7C] is a current schematic diagram of the constant voltage circuit of the present invention in the third mode alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
[图7D]为本发明的定电压电路以第四方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的电流示意图。[FIG. 7D] is a current schematic diagram of the constant voltage circuit of the present invention in the fourth mode alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
[图7E]为本发明的定电压电路以第五方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的电流示意图。[Fig. 7E] is a current schematic diagram of the constant voltage circuit of the present invention in the fifth mode alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
[图7F]为本发明的定电压电路以第六方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的电流示意图。[FIG. 7F] is a current schematic diagram of the constant voltage circuit of the present invention in the sixth mode alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
[图8A]本发明中处于测定模式的有段切换的定电流电路。[Fig. 8A] The constant current circuit with step-switching in the measurement mode of the present invention.
[图8B]本发明中处于回充模式的有段切换的定电流电路。[Fig. 8B] The constant current circuit with step-switching in the recharge mode of the present invention.
[图9A]本发明中处于测定模式的无段切换的定电流电路。[Fig. 9A] The constant current circuit with stepless switching in the measurement mode of the present invention.
[图9B]本发明中处于回充模式的无段切换的定电流电路。[Fig. 9B] The constant current circuit with stepless switching in the recharge mode in the present invention.
[图10A]为本发明的定电流电路以第一方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的电压示意图。[FIG. 10A] is a voltage schematic diagram of the constant current circuit of the present invention in the first mode alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
[图10B]为本发明的定电流电路以第二方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的电压示意图。[FIG. 10B] is a voltage schematic diagram of the constant current circuit of the present invention in the second mode alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
[图10C]为本发明的定电流电路以第三方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的电压示意图。[FIG. 10C] is a voltage schematic diagram of the constant current circuit of the present invention in the third mode alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode.
[图10D]为本发明的定电流电路以第三方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的示意图。[Fig. 10D] is a schematic diagram of the constant current circuit of the present invention alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode in the third mode.
[图11]为根据本发明一实施例的测定待分析物的方法。[Figure 11] is a method for determining an analyte according to an embodiment of the present invention.
[图12]为根据本发明另一实施例的测定待分析物的方法。[Fig. 12] is a method for determining an analyte according to another embodiment of the present invention.
[图13A]为本发明的微型生物传感器的第一实施例的正面示意图。[Fig. 13A] is a schematic front view of the first embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
[图13B]为本发明的微型生物传感器的第一实施例的背面示意图。[Fig. 13B] is a schematic back view of the first embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
[图13C]为本发明图2A中沿A-A’线的剖面示意图。[Figure 13C] is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A' in Figure 2A of the present invention.
[图14A]为本发明的微型生物传感器的第二实施例的剖面示意图。[Fig. 14A] is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
[图14B]为本发明的微型生物传感器的第三实施例的剖面示意图。[Fig. 14B] is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
[图14C]为本发明的微型生物传感器的第四实施例的剖面示意图。[Fig. 14C] is a schematic cross-sectional view of the fourth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
[图14D]为本发明的微型生物传感器的第五实施例的剖面示意图。[Fig. 14D] is a schematic cross-sectional view of the fifth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
[图14E]为本发明的微型生物传感器的第六实施例的剖面示意图。[Fig. 14E] is a schematic cross-sectional view of the sixth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
[图14F]为本发明的微型生物传感器的第七实施例的剖面示意图。[Fig. 14F] is a schematic cross-sectional view of the seventh embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
[图14G]为本发明的微型生物传感器的第八实施例的剖面示意图。[Fig. 14G] is a schematic cross-sectional view of the eighth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
[图15A]为本发明中处于测定模式的定电压电路。[Fig. 15A] is the constant voltage circuit in the measurement mode in the present invention.
[图15B]为本发明中处于回充模式的定电压电路。[Fig. 15B] is the constant voltage circuit in the recharging mode in the present invention.
[图16A]本发明中处于测定模式的有段切换的定电流电路。[Fig. 16A] The constant current circuit with step-switching in the measurement mode of the present invention.
[图16B]本发明中处于回充模式的有段切换的定电流电路。[Fig. 16B] The constant current circuit with step-switching in the recharge mode in the present invention.
[图17A]本发明中处于测定模式的无段切换的定电流电路。[FIG. 17A] The constant current circuit with stepless switching in the measurement mode of the present invention.
[图17B]本发明中处于回充模式的无段切换的定电流电路。[Fig. 17B] The constant current circuit with stepless switching in the recharge mode in the present invention.
[图18A]为本发明的微型生物传感器的第一实施例的正面示意图。[Fig. 18A] is a schematic front view of the first embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
[图18B]为本发明的微型生物传感器的第一实施例的背面示意图。[Fig. 18B] is a schematic back view of the first embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
[图18C]为本发明图2A中沿A-A’线的剖面示意图。[Fig. 18C] is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A' in Fig. 2A of the present invention.
[图19A]为本发明的微型生物传感器的第二实施例的剖面示意图。[Fig. 19A] is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
[图19B]为本发明的微型生物传感器的第三实施例的剖面示意图。[Fig. 19B] is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
[图19C]为本发明的微型生物传感器的第四实施例的剖面示意图。[Fig. 19C] is a schematic cross-sectional view of the fourth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention.
[图20A]为本发明中根据第一方式可执行测定模式和回充模式的定电压电路。[Fig. 20A] It is a constant voltage circuit that can execute the measurement mode and the recharge mode according to the first method of the present invention.
[图20B]为本发明中根据第二方式可执行测定模式和回充模式的定电压电路。[Fig. 20B] is a constant voltage circuit that can perform measurement mode and recharge mode according to the second method of the present invention.
[图20C]为本发明中根据第三方式可执行测定模式和回充模式的定电压电路。[Fig. 20C] is a constant voltage circuit that can perform measurement mode and recharge mode according to the third method of the present invention.
[图21]为本发明中可进行测定模式和回充模式的有段切换的定电流电路。[Fig. 21] It is a constant current circuit that can perform stepwise switching between the measurement mode and the recharge mode in the present invention.
[图22]为本发明中可执行测定模式和回充模式的无段切换的定电流电路。[Fig. 22] is a constant current circuit that can perform stepless switching between the measurement mode and the recharge mode in the present invention.
[图23A]为本发明的定电流或定电压电路根据一实施例进行测定模式和回充模式的示意图。[FIG. 23A] is a schematic diagram of the constant current or constant voltage circuit of the present invention in a measurement mode and a recharge mode according to an embodiment.
[图23B]为本发明的定电流或定电压电路根据另一实施例进行测定模式和回充模式的示意图。[Fig. 23B] is a schematic diagram of the constant current or constant voltage circuit of the present invention in the measurement mode and the recharge mode according to another embodiment.
[图24]为根据本发明一实施例的流程图。[Fig. 24] is a flowchart according to an embodiment of the present invention.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
本案所提出的发明将可由以下的实施例说明而得到充分了解,使得所属技术领域中具有通常知识者可以据以完成,然而本案的实施并非可由下列实施例而被限制其实施形态,所属技术领域中具有通常知识者仍可依据除既揭露的实施例的精神推演出其他实施例,该等实施例皆当属于本发明的范围。The invention proposed in this case will be fully understood by the following examples, so that those with ordinary knowledge in the technical field can complete it. However, the implementation of this case is not limited by the following examples. The technical field Those with ordinary knowledge can still deduce other embodiments based on the spirit of the disclosed embodiments, and these embodiments should fall within the scope of the present invention.
除非在特定范例中另外限制,下列定义适用于整份说明书中所使用的用语。Unless otherwise restricted in a specific example, the following definitions apply to the terms used throughout the specification.
用语“量”或“库存量”是指对电极中卤化银(AgX)或氯化银(AgCl)的容量(Capacity),且优选以微库仑(μC)、毫库仑(mC)或库仑(C)的单位来表示,但不限于以重量百分比浓度wt%、摩尔数、摩尔浓度等方式表示。The term "amount" or "inventory amount" refers to the capacity of silver halide (AgX) or silver chloride (AgCl) in the counter electrode, and is preferably measured in microcoulomb (μC), millicoulomb (mC) or coulomb (C ) Is expressed in units of, but not limited to, expressed in terms of weight percentage concentration wt%, number of moles, molar concentration, etc.
各附图中示意地所示的曲线或直线,不一定代表其真实的形状,例如直线或曲线都可能带有沿线的法线方向的波动、或是有各种可能的转折;或是附图中所示的距离、长度或高度并不代表其绝对的度量,除非明确说明。The curves or straight lines schematically shown in the drawings do not necessarily represent their true shapes. For example, a straight line or a curve may have fluctuations along the normal direction of the line, or may have various possible turns; or The distance, length or height shown in does not represent an absolute measure, unless explicitly stated.
请参阅图1,其为本发明的生理信号测定装置的示意图。本发明的生理信号测定 装置10可以用于植入皮下以测定生物流体中的待分析物所关联的生理参数的生理信号。本发明的生理信号测定装置10包括微型生物传感器100及传输单元200,其中传输单元200与微型生物传感器100电连接,且具有处理器210、电源220、电压施加单元230、温度感测单元240及通信单元250。电源220经处理器210控制电压施加单元230提供电压给微型生物传感器100进行生理信号的测定,温度感测单元240则进行生物体温度测定,因此温度测定信号及微型生物传感器100所测定到的生理信号会传送至处理器210,再由处理器210将生理信号运算成生理参数。通信单元250可以与用户装置20进行有线或无线传输。Please refer to FIG. 1, which is a schematic diagram of the physiological signal measuring device of the present invention. The physiological signal measuring device 10 of the present invention can be used to be implanted under the skin to measure the physiological signal of the physiological parameter associated with the analyte in the biological fluid. The physiological signal measurement device 10 of the present invention includes a micro biosensor 100 and a transmission unit 200, wherein the transmission unit 200 is electrically connected to the micro biosensor 100, and has a processor 210, a power supply 220, a voltage application unit 230, a temperature sensing unit 240 and Communication unit 250. The power supply 220 controls the voltage applying unit 230 through the processor 210 to provide voltage to the micro biosensor 100 for measuring the physiological signal, and the temperature sensing unit 240 measures the temperature of the biological body, so the temperature measurement signal and the physiological signal measured by the micro biosensor 100 The signal is transmitted to the processor 210, and the processor 210 calculates the physiological signal into a physiological parameter. The communication unit 250 may perform wired or wireless transmission with the user device 20.
请继续参阅图1,该传输单元200还可选择性包括耦接至处理器210的一定时器260,用于对于例如为5秒内、15秒内、30秒内、一分钟内、十分钟内、一小时内、二小时内、四小时内、一天内、一周内或一个月内的一时间值等的固定时间间隔的计时。定时器260也可以被设定成于一个或多个可设定的时间点发出一信号给处理器210。Please continue to refer to FIG. 1, the transmission unit 200 may optionally include a timer 260 coupled to the processor 210, for example, within 5 seconds, within 15 seconds, within 30 seconds, within one minute, and ten minutes. Timekeeping at a fixed time interval such as within one hour, within two hours, within four hours, within one day, within one week, or within one month. The timer 260 can also be set to send a signal to the processor 210 at one or more settable time points.
请参阅图2A及2B,其为本发明微型生物传感器的正面与背面示意图。本发明的微型生物传感器100包括基板110、设置于基板110上的工作电极120及对电极130、以及包围工作电极120及对电极130的化学试剂140(如图2C所示)。基板110的材质可选用任何已知适合使用于电极基板的材质且较佳具备可挠性及绝缘性质,例如但不限于:聚酯(Polyester)、聚酰亚胺(Polyimide)等高分子材质,前述高分子材质可以单独使用一种或者混合多种使用。基板110具有表面111(即第一表面)、与表面111相对的对侧表面112(即第二表面)、第一端113及第二端114,且基板110分为3个区域,分别为靠近第一端113的信号输出区域115、靠近第二端114的感测区域116、及位于信号输出区域115及感测区域116之间的连接区域117。工作电极120设置于基板110的表面111上,且从基板110的第一端113延伸至第二端114。工作电极120包括位于基板110的信号输出区115的信号输出段121,及位于基板110的感测区116的信号感测段122。工作电极120的材料包含但不限于:碳、铂、铝、镓、金、铟、铱、铁、铅、镁、镍、锰、钼、锇、钯、铑、银、锡、钛、锌、硅、锆、前述元素的混合物、或前述元素的衍生物(如合金、氧化物或金属化合物等),较佳地,工作电极120的材料为贵金属、贵金属之衍生物或前述的组合,更佳地,工作电极120为含铂材料。Please refer to FIGS. 2A and 2B, which are schematic diagrams of the front and back of the micro biosensor of the present invention. The micro biosensor 100 of the present invention includes a substrate 110, a working electrode 120 and a counter electrode 130 disposed on the substrate 110, and a chemical reagent 140 surrounding the working electrode 120 and the counter electrode 130 (as shown in FIG. 2C). The material of the substrate 110 can be any material that is known to be suitable for use in electrode substrates and preferably has flexibility and insulation properties, such as but not limited to polymer materials such as polyester and polyimide. The aforementioned polymer materials can be used singly or in combination of multiple types. The substrate 110 has a surface 111 (that is, the first surface), an opposite surface 112 (that is, the second surface) opposite to the surface 111, a first end 113 and a second end 114, and the substrate 110 is divided into 3 regions, which are respectively close to The signal output area 115 of the first end 113, the sensing area 116 close to the second end 114, and the connection area 117 between the signal output area 115 and the sensing area 116. The working electrode 120 is disposed on the surface 111 of the substrate 110 and extends from the first end 113 to the second end 114 of the substrate 110. The working electrode 120 includes a signal output section 121 located in the signal output area 115 of the substrate 110 and a signal sensing section 122 located in the sensing area 116 of the substrate 110. The material of the working electrode 120 includes, but is not limited to: carbon, platinum, aluminum, gallium, gold, indium, iridium, iron, lead, magnesium, nickel, manganese, molybdenum, osmium, palladium, rhodium, silver, tin, titanium, zinc, Silicon, zirconium, a mixture of the foregoing elements, or derivatives of the foregoing elements (such as alloys, oxides or metal compounds, etc.). Preferably, the material of the working electrode 120 is a noble metal, a derivative of noble metal, or a combination of the foregoing, more preferably Ground, the working electrode 120 is a platinum-containing material.
对电极130设置于基板110的对侧表面112,且从基板110的第一端113延伸至第二端114。对电极130包括位于基板110的信号输出区115的信号输出段131,及位于基板110的感测区116的信号感测段132。对电极130表面的材料包含银(Silver)及卤化银(Silver  Halide),其中卤化银较佳为氯化银(Silver Chloride)或碘化银(Silver Iodine),使该对电极130兼具参考电极的功能,即本发明的对电极130可以(1)与工作电极120形成电子回路,使工作电极120上电流畅通,以确保电化学反应在工作电极120上发生;以及(2)提供稳定的相对电位作为参考电位。因此,本发明的工作电极120与对电极130形成一个二电极系统。为了进一步降低成本以及提高本发明之生物传感器的生物兼容性,该银/卤化银更可与碳混合使用,例如将该银/卤化银混入碳胶,其卤化银含量只要让对电极130能稳定执行设定的测定动作即可。对电极130的部份的表面上还可以覆盖导电材料以防止卤化银解离(dissolution),进而保护对电极130,其中导电材料系选择不影响工作电极测定表现的导电材质为主,例如导电材料为碳(Carbon)。The counter electrode 130 is disposed on the opposite surface 112 of the substrate 110 and extends from the first end 113 to the second end 114 of the substrate 110. The counter electrode 130 includes a signal output section 131 located in the signal output area 115 of the substrate 110 and a signal sensing section 132 located in the sensing area 116 of the substrate 110. The material on the surface of the counter electrode 130 includes silver and silver halide, and the silver halide is preferably silver chloride or silver iodine, so that the counter electrode 130 also functions as a reference electrode That is, the counter electrode 130 of the present invention can (1) form an electronic circuit with the working electrode 120, so that the working electrode 120 is smoothly connected to ensure that the electrochemical reaction occurs on the working electrode 120; and (2) provide a stable relative potential as Reference potential. Therefore, the working electrode 120 and the counter electrode 130 of the present invention form a two-electrode system. In order to further reduce the cost and improve the biocompatibility of the biosensor of the present invention, the silver/silver halide can be mixed with carbon. For example, the silver/silver halide is mixed with carbon glue, and the silver halide content only needs to make the counter electrode 130 stable. Just execute the set measurement action. The surface of the counter electrode 130 can also be covered with a conductive material to prevent silver halide from dissolution, thereby protecting the counter electrode 130. The conductive material is mainly a conductive material that does not affect the measurement performance of the working electrode, such as conductive material. It is Carbon.
另一实施例中生物传感器不限于导线式或叠层式的电极结构。In another embodiment, the biosensor is not limited to a wire-type or stacked-type electrode structure.
在本发明的另一个实施例中,在准备将生物传感器运送出工厂出售之前,卤化银的初始量可以为零。在这种情况下,生物传感器的对电极130上没有卤化银。在将生物传感器皮下植入患者体内之后以及在进行首次测量之前的最开始回充期间中,经由氧化被涂布在对电极130上的银,可以在对电极130上回充初始量的卤化银。In another embodiment of the present invention, the initial amount of silver halide may be zero before the biosensor is ready to be shipped out of the factory for sale. In this case, there is no silver halide on the counter electrode 130 of the biosensor. After the biosensor is subcutaneously implanted in the patient and during the initial recharge period before the first measurement, the silver coated on the counter electrode 130 through oxidation can be recharged with the initial amount of silver halide on the counter electrode 130 .
化学试剂140至少覆盖于工作电极120的信号感测段122上及位于感测区116的对电极130的表面上。另一实施例中,化学试剂140至少覆盖工作电极120之信号感测段122(图未示)。也就是说,对电极130上可以不被化学试剂140覆盖。微型生物传感器100的感测区116可以植入皮下使工作电极120的信号感测段122进行生物流体中待分析物所关联的生理信号的测定,生理信号会被传送至工作电极120的信号输出段121,再由信号输出段121传送至处理器210以得到生理参数。另该生理参数除了从传输单元200取得外,亦可经由无线/有线通信传送至用户装置20取得,常用的用户装置20例如智能型手机、生理信号接收器或血糖仪。The chemical reagent 140 covers at least the signal sensing section 122 of the working electrode 120 and the surface of the counter electrode 130 located in the sensing area 116. In another embodiment, the chemical reagent 140 covers at least the signal sensing section 122 of the working electrode 120 (not shown). In other words, the counter electrode 130 may not be covered by the chemical reagent 140. The sensing area 116 of the micro biosensor 100 can be implanted subcutaneously so that the signal sensing section 122 of the working electrode 120 measures the physiological signal associated with the analyte in the biological fluid, and the physiological signal will be transmitted to the signal output of the working electrode 120 In section 121, the signal output section 121 is sent to the processor 210 to obtain physiological parameters. In addition to obtaining the physiological parameters from the transmission unit 200, the physiological parameters may also be transmitted to the user device 20 via wireless/wired communication, such as a smart phone, a physiological signal receiver, or a blood glucose meter.
请参阅图2C,其为图2A中沿A-A’线的剖面示意图,其中A-A’线为从微型生物传感器100的感测区116的剖面线。在图2C中,工作电极120设置于基板110的表面111,对电极130设置基板110的对侧表面112,且工作电极120及对电极130的表面上覆盖化学试剂140。基本上化学试剂140至少覆盖于工作电极120的部分表面上。本发明的微型生物传感器100会在测定期间执行测定步骤,及在回充(即再生)期间执行回充步骤。当执行测定步骤时,工作电极120的电压高于对电极130的电压,使电流从工作电极120往对电极130的方向流动,进而使工作电极120发生氧化反应(即工作电极120、化学试剂140及待分析物之间的电化学反应)而测定生理信号,对电极130发生还原反应, 使对电极130中的卤化银消耗而解离成银(Ag)及卤离子(X -)。由于对电极130中的卤化银被消耗,故需要回充对电极130中的卤化银以进行下一次的测定步骤。当执行回充步骤时,对电极130的电压高于工作电极120的电压,使电流从对电极130往工作电极120的方向流动,进而使对电极130发生氧化反应使银与生物体内的卤离子或AgCl氧化(或解离)后的Cl -结合而回充卤化银,详细测定步骤与回充步骤见图11说明。 Please refer to FIG. 2C, which is a schematic cross-sectional view along the line AA' in FIG. In FIG. 2C, the working electrode 120 is disposed on the surface 111 of the substrate 110, the counter electrode 130 is disposed on the opposite side surface 112 of the substrate 110, and the surfaces of the working electrode 120 and the counter electrode 130 are covered with a chemical reagent 140. Basically, the chemical reagent 140 covers at least a part of the surface of the working electrode 120. The micro biosensor 100 of the present invention performs the measurement step during the measurement period, and performs the recharge step during the recharge (ie regeneration) period. When the measurement step is performed, the voltage of the working electrode 120 is higher than the voltage of the counter electrode 130, so that the current flows from the working electrode 120 to the direction of the counter electrode 130, so that the working electrode 120 undergoes an oxidation reaction (that is, the working electrode 120, the chemical reagent 140) The electrochemical reaction between the analyte and the analyte) is used to measure the physiological signal, and a reduction reaction occurs on the counter electrode 130, so that the silver halide in the counter electrode 130 is consumed and dissociated into silver (Ag) and halide ions (X ). Since the silver halide in the counter electrode 130 is consumed, the silver halide in the counter electrode 130 needs to be recharged to perform the next measurement step. When the recharging step is performed, the voltage of the counter electrode 130 is higher than the voltage of the working electrode 120, so that the current flows from the counter electrode 130 to the direction of the working electrode 120, and the counter electrode 130 is oxidized to cause the silver to react with the halide ions in the living body. Or AgCl oxidized (or dissociated) Cl - combined to recharge the silver halide. The detailed measurement steps and recharge steps are shown in Figure 11.
在另一实施例中,本发明的工作电极120及对电极130可以设置于基板110的同一表面,即工作电极120及对电极130皆设置于基板110的表面111或对侧表面112上,如图2D所示。同样的,当执行测定步骤时,电流从工作电极120往对电极130的方向流动,进而使工作电极120发生氧化反应而测定生理信号,对电极130中的卤化银被消耗而解离成银(Ag)及卤离子(X -)。当执行回充步骤时,电流从对电极130往工作电极120的方向流动,进而使对电极130发生氧化反应使银与卤离子结合而回充卤化银。 In another embodiment, the working electrode 120 and the counter electrode 130 of the present invention may be disposed on the same surface of the substrate 110, that is, both the working electrode 120 and the counter electrode 130 are disposed on the surface 111 or the opposite surface 112 of the substrate 110, such as Shown in Figure 2D. Similarly, when the measurement step is performed, current flows from the working electrode 120 to the counter electrode 130, and the working electrode 120 is oxidized to measure physiological signals. The silver halide in the counter electrode 130 is consumed and dissociated into silver ( Ag) and halogen ions (X -). When the recharging step is performed, current flows from the counter electrode 130 to the working electrode 120, so that the counter electrode 130 undergoes an oxidation reaction to combine silver and halide ions to recharge the silver halide.
以上图2C-2D其详细电极叠层省略,仅示意电极位置。2C-2D above, the detailed electrode stack is omitted, and only the electrode positions are shown.
在上述任一实施例中,为了防止银电极材料的过度氯化而发生断线,还可以在基板110的对侧表面112与对电极130的银之间添加一层导电材料(如碳)。然而,若对电极130的底层是碳会造成开关处的阻值过高,故还可在碳导电材料跟基板110的对侧表面112之间再增设一层导电层,例如为银以降低信号输出端的阻抗,使本发明的对电极130从基板110的对侧表面112开始依序为导电层、碳层及银/卤化银层。In any of the above embodiments, in order to prevent the silver electrode material from being broken due to excessive chlorination, a layer of conductive material (such as carbon) may be added between the opposite side surface 112 of the substrate 110 and the silver of the opposite electrode 130. However, if the bottom layer of the counter electrode 130 is carbon, the resistance at the switch will be too high. Therefore, a conductive layer, such as silver, can be added between the carbon conductive material and the opposite surface 112 of the substrate 110 to reduce the signal. The impedance of the output end makes the counter electrode 130 of the present invention form a conductive layer, a carbon layer, and a silver/silver halide layer in sequence starting from the opposite surface 112 of the substrate 110.
于其他实施例中,对电极材料的卤化银不排除为溴化银(silver chloride)或硫化银(silver sulfide),或其他基于银氧化还原反应的电极材料,例如醋酸银(silver acetate)、磷酸银(silver phosphate)。于其他实施例中,本发明回复电极材料库存量水平的方法亦不限于上述材料,举凡其他具有类似态样的电极皆可适用回复生物传感器的方法及使用此方法的装置In other embodiments, the silver halide of the counter electrode material is not excluded as silver chloride or silver sulfide, or other electrode materials based on silver redox reaction, such as silver acetate, phosphoric acid. Silver (silver phosphate). In other embodiments, the method for restoring the inventory level of electrode materials of the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned materials. For example, all other electrodes with similar features can be applied to the method of restoring the biosensor and the device using this method.
请参照图1、2C或2D、以及5A-5B,本发明提出一种可控制微型生物传感器100之卤化银材料的库存量水平的生理信号测定装置10,卤化银材料具初始库存量I 0,库存量水平代表当时卤化银材料的库存量并被应用于使生理信号测定装置执行回充操作使卤化银材料恢复库存量水平,生理信号测定装置10包括:生物传感器100,包括:第一电极以及对电极130,在双电极系统中,第一电极为工作电极120,以及对电极130,包括卤化银材料及银材料;以及传输单元200,耦接至微型生物传感器100,且包括:处理器210,被配置于启动执行测定操作时,使库存量减少消耗量,于启动回充操作时,使库存量增加回充量,并计算库存量水平。处理器控制库存量水平基本上于第一 阈值与第二阈值之间变动。于其他实施例中,亦可于如图13C或图14A-F所述之电极系统实施。 Please refer to Figures 1, 2C or 2D, and 5A-5B. The present invention proposes a physiological signal measuring device 10 that can control the inventory level of silver halide materials of the micro biosensor 100. The silver halide material has an initial inventory I 0 , The inventory level represents the inventory of silver halide materials at the time and is used to make the physiological signal measurement device perform a refill operation to restore the inventory level of the silver halide material. The physiological signal measurement device 10 includes: a biosensor 100, including: a first electrode and The counter electrode 130, in a two-electrode system, the first electrode is the working electrode 120, and the counter electrode 130 includes a silver halide material and a silver material; and a transmission unit 200, coupled to the micro biosensor 100, and includes: a processor 210 , Is configured to reduce the consumption of inventory when the measurement operation is started, and increase the inventory when the refill operation is started, and calculate the inventory level. The processor controls the inventory level to basically vary between the first threshold and the second threshold. In other embodiments, it can also be implemented in the electrode system as shown in FIG. 13C or FIG. 14A-F.
图3A-3E为本发明的不同实施例的生物传感器中卤化银材料的回充方法的流程图。图3A为本发明一种实施例的生物传感器中卤化银材料的回充方法的流程图。请参考图3A,卤化银材料具有库存量水平,库存量水平随着测定及回充的操作中变化:在测定操作中,库存量水平会减少;而在回充操作中,库存量水平会增加。本发明的回充方法,包括步骤S11:处理器210接收到测定指示;步骤S12:电源220经处理器210控制电压施加单元230提供电压给生物传感器100进行生理信号的测定,并取得测定值;步骤S13:处理器依照测定值,决定回充的操作条件例如,依照累计消耗量的多寡决定施加的时间及回充电压的大小开始回充,并于时间达到时停止回充。步骤S14:依照回充的操作条件执行回充;步骤S15:在回充操作的过程中,计算当时的库存水平;步骤S16:处理器依据预先设定的不同的阈值(Th1、Th2、Th3、Th4、预定值S等),判断库存量水平是否介于第一阈值及第二阈值之间:若否,则继续当次回充操作,抑或进入步骤S11等待接收下一个测定指示进行下一个测定与回充循环;若是,则停止回充并进入步骤S11再次接收到测定指示,抑或直接进入步骤S12进行下一个测定与回充循环。3A-3E are flowcharts of methods for recharging silver halide materials in biosensors according to different embodiments of the present invention. 3A is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide material in a biosensor according to an embodiment of the present invention. Please refer to Figure 3A, the silver halide material has an inventory level, and the inventory level changes with the measurement and refilling operations: in the measurement operation, the inventory level will decrease; and in the refilling operation, the inventory level will increase . The recharging method of the present invention includes step S11: the processor 210 receives the measurement instruction; step S12: the power supply 220 controls the voltage applying unit 230 through the processor 210 to provide voltage to the biosensor 100 to measure the physiological signal and obtain the measured value; Step S13: The processor determines the operating conditions for recharging according to the measured value. For example, it determines the application time and the magnitude of the recharging voltage according to the accumulated consumption to start the recharging, and stops the recharging when the time is reached. Step S14: Perform refilling according to the operating conditions of refilling; Step S15: Calculate the current inventory level during the refilling operation; Step S16: The processor performs the refill according to different preset thresholds (Th1, Th2, Th3, Th4, predetermined value S, etc.), determine whether the inventory level is between the first threshold and the second threshold: if not, continue the current refill operation, or go to step S11 to wait for the next measurement instruction to proceed to the next measurement and Refill cycle; if so, stop refilling and go to step S11 to receive the measurement instruction again, or go directly to step S12 for the next measurement and refill cycle.
处理器执行回充操作时的库存量水平的回充时间与回充量系可根据计算每次执行测定操作的一消耗量,例如为总消耗量、部分消耗量或平均消耗量、执行一段期间内的各测定操作的消耗累积量、电极自然耗损量其中之一或其组合进行动态性调节。回充库存量的计算还可搭配使用者的葡萄糖浓度指标因子,葡萄糖浓度愈高,卤化银材料的消耗量愈多,使得在测定操作期间的卤化银材料的减少速率不须与卤化银材料的生成速率成正相关,可依靠充电方法调控卤化银材料再生时机与再生量。The refill time and refill amount of the inventory level when the processor performs the refill operation can be calculated based on a consumption of each measurement operation performed, such as total consumption, partial consumption or average consumption, and a period of execution. One or a combination of the cumulative amount of consumption of each measurement operation in the measurement operation, the natural consumption of the electrode, or a combination thereof is dynamically adjusted. The calculation of the refill inventory can also be matched with the user’s glucose concentration index factor. The higher the glucose concentration, the more the consumption of silver halide materials, so that the reduction rate of silver halide materials during the measurement operation does not have to be the same as that of silver halide materials. The generation rate is positively correlated, and the timing and amount of regeneration of the silver halide material can be controlled by the charging method.
库存量水平于本发明中先以对电极中卤化银材料于卤化银材料与银材料中的占比(percentage)、或各次测定操作中卤化银材料消耗量的累积值及各次回充操作中卤化银材料回充量的累积值的差值作为计算方法,于其他实施例中,库存量水平亦可是对电极中卤化银材料于卤化银材料与银材料中的一种单位量,例如以库仑数呈现,但不限为重量百分比浓度wt%、莫耳数、莫耳浓度。关于所述库存量水平亦可运用其他数学方法或电学单位进行计算不再赘述。In the present invention, the inventory level is based on the percentage of the silver halide material in the counter electrode in the silver halide material and the silver material, or the cumulative value of the consumption of the silver halide material in each measurement operation and each recharge operation. The difference between the cumulative value of the silver halide material refilling amount is used as the calculation method. In other embodiments, the inventory level can also be a unit amount of the silver halide material in the counter electrode between the silver halide material and the silver material, for example, in coulombs. The number is presented, but is not limited to the weight percentage concentration wt%, the number of moles, and the concentration of moles. Regarding the inventory level, other mathematical methods or electrical units can also be used to calculate the inventory level.
图3B为本发明的另一种实施例的生物传感器中卤化银材料的回充方法的流程图,是以差值作为库存量水平当作判断参数来应用于使生理信号测定装置执行回充操作。 当然,此处的差值若替换成库存量水平,在图3B中也能适用。3B is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide materials in a biosensor according to another embodiment of the present invention, using the difference as the inventory level as the judgment parameter to be applied to the physiological signal measuring device to perform the recharging operation . Of course, if the difference here is replaced with the inventory level, it can also be applied in Figure 3B.
请参阅图3B,卤化银材料具有库存量,在生物传感器出厂时,此时库存量为初始库存量,而库存量随着测定及回充的操作中减少或增加。根据本发明的一种实施例的回充方法,包括步骤S21:处理器210接收到测定指示;步骤S22:电源220经处理器210控制电压施加单元230提供电压给生物传感器100进行生理信号的测定,取得测定值,并换算卤化银材料的当次消耗量;步骤S23:处理器计算卤化银的库存量水平(卤化银的占比、或各次消耗量的累积值及各次回充量的累积值的一差值);步骤S24:确定当前的占比(或差值)是否满足回充条件:若否,则等待下一个测定指示;若是,则步骤S25:启动回充操作;测定测定测定测定步骤S26:确定占比(或差值)是否满足停止回充条件,若否,则继续当次回充操作,亦或进入步骤S21等待新的测定指示;若是,则停止回充并等待下一个测定指示,进入步骤S21再次接收到测定指示,抑或直接进入步骤S22以进行下一个测定与回充循环。图3B所示的回充操作在达到大约等于变动值的回充量时停止,为了方便区分,此种回充操作可称为第一回充操作。Please refer to Figure 3B. The silver halide material has an inventory. When the biosensor leaves the factory, the inventory at this time is the initial inventory, and the inventory decreases or increases with the operation of measurement and refilling. The recharging method according to an embodiment of the present invention includes step S21: the processor 210 receives the measurement instruction; step S22: the power supply 220 controls the voltage applying unit 230 through the processor 210 to provide voltage to the biosensor 100 for physiological signal measurement , Obtain the measured value, and convert the current consumption of the silver halide material; Step S23: The processor calculates the silver halide inventory level (the proportion of silver halide, or the cumulative value of each consumption and the accumulation of each recharge Step S24: Determine whether the current proportion (or difference) satisfies the recharge condition: if not, wait for the next measurement instruction; if yes, then Step S25: start the recharge operation; measure and measure Measurement step S26: Determine whether the proportion (or difference) meets the conditions for stopping recharging, if not, continue the current recharging operation, or go to step S21 to wait for a new measurement instruction; if yes, stop recharging and wait for the next one For the measurement instruction, proceed to step S21 to receive the measurement instruction again, or proceed directly to step S22 to perform the next measurement and refill cycle. The recharging operation shown in FIG. 3B stops when the recharging amount approximately equal to the variable value is reached. In order to facilitate the distinction, this recharging operation may be referred to as the first recharging operation.
在如以上所述的本发明的回复生物传感器的方法中,还可以加入其他的判断参数。例如,在某些特定的条件下也可以额外地启动回充操作,请参考图3C。图3C是为本发明的又一种实施例的生物传感器中卤化银材料的回充方法的流程图。步骤S31:接收到测定指示之后,步骤S32除了取得测定值之外,同时计算测定次数N的累积值,例如,第一次测定后,如计算机语言的计算,此时N=N+1,即N由0增加为1。步骤S33:计算库存量的占比(或各次消耗量的累积值及各次回充量的累积值的一差值)。步骤S34:确定库存量水平、差值、及测定次数的累积值其中之一是否满足回充条件,若否,则等待下一个测定指示;若是,则步骤S35:启动回充操作;步骤S36:计算回充操作中逐渐增加的库存量水平;步骤S37:确定库存量水平是否满足停止回充条件:若否,则继续当次回充操作;若是,则停止回充并等待下一个测定指示。步骤S38:使测定次数的累积值归零。待再次接收到测定指示,再进入步骤S31。In the method for restoring the biosensor of the present invention as described above, other judgment parameters can also be added. For example, under certain conditions, the recharge operation can be additionally started, please refer to Figure 3C. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide materials in a biosensor according to another embodiment of the present invention. Step S31: After receiving the measurement instruction, step S32 not only obtains the measurement value, but also calculates the cumulative value of the number of measurements N. For example, after the first measurement, such as computer language calculation, at this time N=N+1, that is N increases from 0 to 1. Step S33: Calculate the proportion of the inventory (or a difference between the cumulative value of each consumption and the cumulative value of each refill). Step S34: Determine whether one of the inventory level, the difference value, and the cumulative value of the measurement times meets the refilling condition, if not, wait for the next measurement instruction; if yes, then step S35: start the refill operation; step S36: Calculate the gradually increasing inventory level in the refilling operation; step S37: determine whether the inventory level meets the refilling stop condition: if not, continue the current refilling operation; if so, stop the refilling and wait for the next measurement instruction. Step S38: The cumulative value of the number of measurements is reset to zero. After the measurement instruction is received again, step S31 is entered again.
除了如上所述的本发明的回复生物传感器的方法之外,还可以独立地或合并地使用其他的判断参数。例如,根据本发明另一种实施例,这种回复方法若单独实施,可以将库存量水平的波动控制在较小(亦即较稳定)的范围内,直到库存量水平达到某个下限值时才增加回充电位差、回充电流或回充时间来提高较大的单次回充量。图3D为本发明的另一种实施例的生物传感器中卤化银材料的回充方法的流程图。请参考图3D,步骤S44至S47类似于图3C的步骤S34至S37。步骤S42:测定而取得测定值,并计 算测定次数(N=N+1),在测定操作的次数N达到预定次数P的条件下(即N=P时且P为预定的正整数),计算N=0至N=P期间的累积测定值、或库存量水平的变动值(例如,N=0至N=P时库存量的差值(或其绝对值)),也就是N=0至N=P之间的累积消耗量,接着步骤S43:启动第一回充操作,以回充大约等于变动值的回充量。回充停止之后,步骤S48:使测定次数N归零。待再次接收到测定指示,再进入步骤S41。In addition to the method for restoring the biosensor of the present invention as described above, other judgment parameters can also be used independently or in combination. For example, according to another embodiment of the present invention, if this recovery method is implemented separately, the fluctuation of the inventory level can be controlled within a small (ie more stable) range until the inventory level reaches a certain lower limit. Only increase the recharging position difference, recharging current or recharging time to increase the larger single recharging capacity. 3D is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide material in a biosensor according to another embodiment of the present invention. Please refer to FIG. 3D, steps S44 to S47 are similar to steps S34 to S37 of FIG. 3C. Step S42: Measure to obtain the measured value, and calculate the number of measurements (N=N+1). Under the condition that the number of measurement operations N reaches the predetermined number of times P (that is, when N=P and P is a predetermined positive integer), calculate The cumulative measurement value during the period from N=0 to N=P, or the variation value of the inventory level (for example, the difference (or absolute value) of the inventory when N=0 to N=P), that is, N=0 to N = the cumulative consumption between P, and then step S43: start the first recharge operation to recharge the recharge approximately equal to the variable value. After the recharging is stopped, step S48: the number of measurements N is reset to zero. After the measurement instruction is received again, step S41 is entered again.
这种方法可以控制在每次测定后(当然也可以是在不必须在每次测定后,例如在某次单次消耗量过大的测定操作之后、或复数次的测定操作中累积消耗量过大时)启动一次回充操作。This method can be controlled after each measurement (of course, it can also be after each measurement, such as after a single measurement operation that consumes too much, or the cumulative consumption of multiple measurement operations. Large time) start a recharge operation.
这种回充方法若与例如前述的图3A、3B或3C的方法组合实施,更可以在万一因为受测的生理参数的变动过大而可能造成超过生物传感器的参数设定值的预期,因此可以防止由于库存量水平持续朝向升高或降低时,迟早会使生物传感器失效的问题。If this method of recharging is implemented in combination with the method of Figures 3A, 3B, or 3C, for example, it can be expected that the parameter setting value of the biosensor may be exceeded due to excessive changes in the measured physiological parameters. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the problem that the biosensor will fail sooner or later as the inventory level continues to increase or decrease.
图3E为本发明的另一种实施例的生物传感器中卤化银材料的回充方法的流程图。请参考图3E,步骤S51:接收测定指示;步骤S52:测定并取得测定值;步骤S53:计算当次消耗量及累积消耗量(若为第一次测定,累积消耗量即为的当次的消耗量);步骤S54:确定累计消耗量是否满足回充条件:若否,则等待下一个测定指示;若是,则步骤S55:决定回充的操作条件。例如,依照累计消耗量的多寡决定施加的回充电压的大小及/或时间,或给予不同的阈值(Th1、Th2、Th3、Th4、预定值S等)。步骤S56:启动回充操作;步骤S57:计算回充操作中逐渐增加的库存量水平;步骤S58:确定库存量水平是否满足停止回充条件:若否,则继续当次回充操作;若是,则停止回充并等待下一个测定指示。待再次接收到测定指示,再进入步骤S51。3E is a flowchart of a method for recharging silver halide materials in a biosensor according to another embodiment of the present invention. Please refer to Figure 3E, step S51: receiving measurement instructions; step S52: measuring and obtaining the measured value; step S53: calculating the current consumption and cumulative consumption (if it is the first measurement, the cumulative consumption is the current Consumption); Step S54: Determine whether the accumulated consumption satisfies the recharge condition: if not, wait for the next measurement instruction; if it is, then Step S55: Determine the operating condition for recharge. For example, the size and/or time of the applied recharge voltage is determined according to the amount of accumulated consumption, or different threshold values (Th1, Th2, Th3, Th4, predetermined value S, etc.) are given. Step S56: Start the refilling operation; Step S57: Calculate the gradually increasing inventory level during the refilling operation; Step S58: Determine whether the inventory level meets the conditions for stopping the refilling: If not, continue the current refilling operation; if so, then Stop refilling and wait for the next measurement instruction. After the measurement instruction is received again, step S51 is entered again.
图4A-4H为本发明各种实施例的库存量水平的变动曲线示意图,其中图4A-4D及4H为仅使用图3B、3C或3D的方法时,可能发生的库存量水平的变动的示意图。请参考图4A,库存量由初始库存量I 0开始,在几次测定操作之后,库存量水平逐渐降到小于或等于第一阈值Th1时,启动回充操作,直到库存量水平达到第二阈值Th2时停止回充操作。另外,在第一阈值Th1及第二阈值Th2之间还可以再设定一个预定值S作为另一个阈值,当库存量水平达到S时,停止回充操作。图4A表示Th2=S时的情形。 4A-4H are schematic diagrams of the variation curve of the inventory level of various embodiments of the present invention, in which FIGS. 4A-4D and 4H are schematic diagrams of the variation of the inventory level that may occur when only the method of FIG. 3B, 3C or 3D is used . Please refer to Fig. 4A. The inventory quantity starts from the initial inventory quantity I 0. After several measurement operations, when the inventory level gradually drops to less than or equal to the first threshold Th1, the refill operation is initiated until the inventory level reaches the second threshold. Stop recharging operation at Th2. In addition, a predetermined value S can be set between the first threshold Th1 and the second threshold Th2 as another threshold. When the inventory level reaches S, the refill operation is stopped. Fig. 4A shows the situation when Th2=S.
请参考图4B,此时将预定值S设定为等于初始库存量I 0以取代第二阈值Th2。因此,启动回充操作后,库存量水平达到初始库存量I 0时停止回充操作。 Please refer to FIG. 4B. At this time, the predetermined value S is set equal to the initial inventory I 0 to replace the second threshold Th2. Therefore, after the refill operation is started, the refill operation is stopped when the inventory level reaches the initial inventory level I 0.
请参考图4C,此时预定值S设定为大于初始库存量I 0且小于第二阈值Th2。因此启动回充操作后,库存量水平上升到大于初始库存量I 0的预定值S后停止回充操作。 Please refer to FIG. 4C. At this time, the predetermined value S is set to be greater than the initial inventory I 0 and less than the second threshold Th2. Therefore, after the refill operation is initiated, the inventory level rises to a predetermined value S greater than the initial inventory I 0 and then the refill operation is stopped.
请参考图4D,此时预定值S设定为小于初始库存量且大于第一阈值Th1。因此启动回充操作后,库存量水平上升到小于初始库存量I 0的预定值S后停止回充操作。 Please refer to FIG. 4D. At this time, the predetermined value S is set to be less than the initial inventory amount and greater than the first threshold Th1. Therefore, after the refill operation is started, the inventory level rises to a predetermined value S less than the initial inventory I 0 and then the refill operation is stopped.
图4E-4H为使用图3A或3E的方法加上图3B至3D其中之一的方法组合实施时,可能发生的库存量水平的变动曲线的示意图。请参考图4E,库存量由初始库存量I 0开始,在一次或复数次测定操作且已启动一次或复数次如图3A或3E的方法的第一回充操作之后,库存量水平逐渐降到小于或等于第一阈值Th1时,启动如图3B至3D的回充操作(称为第二回充操作),直到库存量水平达到第二阈值Th2时(或S=Th2)停止回充操作。 4E-4H are schematic diagrams of possible changes in inventory levels when the method of FIG. 3A or 3E is combined with one of the methods of FIGS. 3B to 3D. Please refer to Figure 4E. The inventory level starts from the initial inventory level I 0. After one or more measurement operations have been initiated and the first refill operation of the method shown in Figure 3A or 3E has been initiated, the inventory level gradually drops to When it is less than or equal to the first threshold Th1, the refill operation (referred to as the second refill operation) as shown in FIGS. 3B to 3D is started, and the refill operation is stopped when the inventory level reaches the second threshold Th2 (or S=Th2).
请参考图4F,在一次或复数次测定操作且已启动一次或复数次如图3A或3E的方法的第一回充操作之后,库存量水平逐渐升高到大于或等于第二阈值Th2时,都不会启动如图3B至3D的第二回充操作,直到库存量水平小于或等于第一阈值Th1时才会启动第二回充操作。Please refer to FIG. 4F, after one or more determination operations have been initiated and the first refill operation of the method shown in FIG. 3A or 3E has been started once or more times, when the inventory level gradually rises to be greater than or equal to the second threshold Th2, The second recharging operation as shown in FIGS. 3B to 3D will not be started, and the second recharging operation will not be started until the inventory level is less than or equal to the first threshold Th1.
请参考图4G及4H,两图的差别在于第一阈值Th1到第二阈值Th2之间的范围大小。如果此范围较大,如图4G所示,在测定操作中及的另外回充操作之后,库存量水平逐渐降低到小于或等于第一阈值Th1时,启动一次第二回充操作。如果此范围很小,如图4H所示,可能在每次测定操作后就启动一次第二回充操作,而忽略了第一回充操作。也可视为每次测定操作后就启动一次第一回充操作,而忽略了第二回充操作,视两者回充操作何者优先。Please refer to Figures 4G and 4H. The difference between the two figures lies in the size of the range between the first threshold Th1 and the second threshold Th2. If this range is large, as shown in FIG. 4G, after another refill operation during the measurement operation, when the inventory level gradually decreases to less than or equal to the first threshold Th1, a second refill operation is initiated. If this range is small, as shown in Fig. 4H, a second recharging operation may be initiated after each measurement operation, and the first recharging operation may be ignored. It can also be considered that the first refill operation is initiated after each measurement operation, and the second refill operation is ignored, depending on which of the two recharge operations takes precedence.
图6A为配合所述图3B、3X的回充方法实施的一种库存量水平曲线示意图。请参考图6A,上图中的纵轴为AgCl的占比,中间图的纵轴为施加的测定电压(V1)及回充电压(V2),下图的纵轴为在施加定电压的条件下的测定电流(无斜线区)及回充电流(有斜线区)。横轴同为时间,纵向虚线表示相同的时间点。假如AgCl的占比最初为50%,于第一次测定时施加了V1的测定电压,而AgCl的占比逐渐减少直到测定操作停止。由于此时的AgCl的占比尚未小于或等于第一阈值Th1,还不会启动回充操作。直到几次测定操作之后,AgCl的占比小于(或等于)第一阈值Th1,回充操作被启动,直到AgCl的占比达到(略大于或等于)第二阈值Th2时停止回充操作。Fig. 6A is a schematic diagram of an inventory level curve implemented in conjunction with the refilling method of Figs. 3B and 3X. Please refer to Figure 6A. The vertical axis in the above figure is the proportion of AgCl, the vertical axis in the middle figure is the applied measured voltage (V1) and the recharge voltage (V2), and the vertical axis in the figure below is the condition of applying a constant voltage. The measured current (without slashed area) and recharge current (with slashed area). The horizontal axis is the same time, and the vertical dashed line indicates the same point in time. If the proportion of AgCl is initially 50%, the measurement voltage of V1 is applied in the first measurement, and the proportion of AgCl gradually decreases until the measurement operation stops. Since the proportion of AgCl at this time is not less than or equal to the first threshold Th1, the recharging operation will not be started yet. Until after several measurement operations, the proportion of AgCl is less than (or equal to) the first threshold Th1, the recharging operation is started, and the recharging operation is stopped when the proportion of AgCl reaches (slightly greater than or equal to) the second threshold Th2.
图6B为配合所述图3B、3X的回充方法实施的另一种库存量水平曲线示意图。请参考图6B,上图中的纵轴为AgCl的累积消耗量与累积回充量的差值(差值最初为0),中间图的纵轴为施加的测定电压(V1)及回充电压(V2),下图的纵轴为在施加定电压的条件下的测定电流(无斜线区)及回充电流(有斜线区)。横轴同为时间,纵向 虚线表示相同的时间点。于第一次测定时施加了V1的测定电压,而差值逐渐减少直到测定操作停止。由于此时的差值尚未小于或等于第一阈值Th1,还不会启动回充操作。直到几次测定操作之后,差值小于(或等于)第一阈值Th1,回充操作被启动,直到差值达到(略大于或等于)第二阈值Th2时停止回充操作。Fig. 6B is a schematic diagram of another inventory level curve implemented in conjunction with the refilling method of Figs. 3B and 3X. Please refer to Figure 6B. The vertical axis in the above graph is the difference between the accumulated consumption of AgCl and the accumulated recharge (the difference is initially 0), and the vertical axis in the middle graph is the applied measured voltage (V1) and the recharge voltage (V2), the vertical axis of the figure below is the measured current (area without diagonal lines) and the recharge current (area with diagonal lines) under the condition of applying a constant voltage. The horizontal axis is the same time, and the vertical dashed line indicates the same time point. In the first measurement, the measurement voltage of V1 was applied, and the difference gradually decreased until the measurement operation was stopped. Since the difference at this time is not less than or equal to the first threshold Th1, the recharging operation will not be started yet. Until after several determination operations, the difference is less than (or equal to) the first threshold Th1, the recharging operation is started, and the recharging operation is stopped when the difference reaches (slightly greater than or equal to) the second threshold Th2.
本发明的另一种实施例希望将库存量水平控制在Th1及Th2之间,而且每一次测定后会计算当次的变动量并立即回充当次变动量,不过当次的回充量不见得刚好等于当次的变动量,所以在每一次的测定及每一次的回充的之前之后的库存量之间会有变动量。但是万一单次的消耗量过大而小于或等于另外的下限阈值Th3时,能够使库存量水平大幅提升到Th2。Another embodiment of the present invention hopes to control the inventory level between Th1 and Th2, and calculate the current fluctuation amount after each measurement and immediately reclaim the secondary fluctuation amount, but the current recharge amount is not necessarily It is exactly equal to the current change amount, so there will be a change amount between each measurement and the inventory before and after each refill. However, if the single consumption is too large and is less than or equal to another lower limit threshold Th3, the inventory level can be greatly increased to Th2.
图6C至图6E为配合所述图3A、3B的回充方法实施例的库存量水平的曲线图。例如,图6C的曲线的控制可以由图3A的方法为主轴,设定Th1及Th2,使库存量水平控制在其间,并且佐以如图3B的方法,使得万一库存量水平因为突然大量地消耗而瞬间低于Th3时,可以在其后的回充操作中,有效地使库存量水平远离Th3;又或库存量水平因为突然大量地消耗而瞬间高于Th4时,可以在其后暂时终止回充操作或降低回充操作的回充量,有效地使库存量水平远离Th4。6C to 6E are graphs showing the inventory level in accordance with the embodiment of the refilling method of FIGS. 3A and 3B. For example, the curve of Fig. 6C can be controlled by the method of Fig. 3A as the main axis, Th1 and Th2 are set so that the inventory level is controlled between them, and the method shown in Fig. 3B is used, so that in case the inventory level is suddenly large When the consumption is lower than Th3, the inventory level can be effectively kept away from Th3 in the subsequent refill operation; or when the inventory level is instantly higher than Th4 due to sudden and large consumption, it can be temporarily terminated afterwards The refilling operation or reducing the refilling amount of the refilling operation effectively keeps the inventory level away from Th4.
请参考图6C,纵轴为AgCl库存量水平,横轴为时间,S=Th2,并且设定另外的下限阈值Th3及另外的上限阈值Th4。回充库存量水平最初为初始库存量,采用图3A的第一回充方法,经过第一次测定(M1)后,启动第一回充而实施第一次回充(R1),之后的库存量水平并未达S。经过第二次测定(M2)、第二次回充(R2)直到第6次测定(M6)后,库存量水平(例如图3B的占比)低于Th3。库存量水平在R1-M6之间似乎是上扬的走势。这种情况下,适合根据图3B的方法,启动第二回充操作,使库存量水平直接提高到S(S=Th2)。6C, the vertical axis is the AgCl inventory level, the horizontal axis is time, S=Th2, and another lower threshold Th3 and another upper threshold Th4 are set. The refilled inventory level is initially the initial inventory level. The first refilling method shown in Figure 3A is used. After the first measurement (M1), the first refill is initiated and the first refill (R1) is implemented. The subsequent inventory The amount level has not reached S. After the second measurement (M2), the second refill (R2) and the sixth measurement (M6), the inventory level (for example, the proportion in FIG. 3B) is lower than Th3. The inventory level between R1-M6 seems to be an upward trend. In this case, it is suitable to start the second refill operation according to the method of FIG. 3B to directly increase the inventory level to S (S=Th2).
此外,如果将图3B的默认值S设定为Th2至Th4之间一值时,库存量水平可以提高至Th2至Th4之间。于其他实施例中,可选择其他同样能让生物传感器维持测定准确度的条件作为默认值。In addition, if the default value S of FIG. 3B is set to a value between Th2 and Th4, the inventory level can be increased to between Th2 and Th4. In other embodiments, other conditions that can also allow the biosensor to maintain the measurement accuracy can be selected as the default value.
可替选地,可以将图3B的方法中,设定当库存量水平达到Th2时,强制下一次的测定(例如M7)之后,如果库存量水平未达到Th3时,不执行图3A的第一回充,因此,下一步是执行M8,如果库存量水平又小于或等于Th3时,再次强制启动第二回充操作,使库存量水平直接提高到S(S=Th2)。库存量水平就会如M7-M8-R7-M9的曲线变动。如果不如此设计,M7之后的库存量水平曲线(未如图6C中M7-M9显示),可以类似 R1-M6之间的库存量水平的变动,库存量水平的变动较平滑。Alternatively, in the method of FIG. 3B, when the inventory level reaches Th2, after the next measurement (for example, M7) is forced, if the inventory level does not reach Th3, the first step in FIG. 3A is not executed. Refill, therefore, the next step is to execute M8. If the inventory level is less than or equal to Th3, the second refill operation is forced to start again to directly increase the inventory level to S (S=Th2). The inventory level will fluctuate like the curve of M7-M8-R7-M9. If not designed in this way, the inventory level curve after M7 (not shown as M7-M9 in Figure 6C) can be similar to the change in inventory level between R1-M6, and the change in inventory level is smoother.
请参阅图6D,与图6C大致类似,差别是预定值S设定为介于I 0与Th2之间。一样可以使库存量水平在Th1及Th2之间变动,但比图3C所示的后段曲线(M6-M9)更为缓和。 Please refer to FIG. 6D, which is roughly similar to FIG. 6C, except that the predetermined value S is set between I 0 and Th2. In the same way, the inventory level can be changed between Th1 and Th2, but it is more gentle than the latter curve (M6-M9) shown in Figure 3C.
请参阅图6E,库存量水平在R3-M7之间似乎是上扬的走势,不过,由于阈值Th1及Th2的设定,也有效地起到了不使库存量水平超过上限的作用。Please refer to Figure 6E. The inventory level between R3-M7 seems to be an upward trend. However, due to the setting of the thresholds Th1 and Th2, it also effectively prevents the inventory level from exceeding the upper limit.
于另一实施例中,除了使用占比或差值的计算方法外,亦可通过设定卤化银的库伦数的阈值(即上下限值)来计算库存量水平。再参阅图3C至图3E,库存量水平是以库伦量计算,在每一次测定操作后执行一次回充操作的情形下,如M1-M9之间的曲线,可以清楚看见,藉由本发明的方法,即使在此期间中可能出现递增或递减的走势,库存量水平可以平稳地控制在Th1及Th2之间。因此,占比、差值或库伦量或其组合,都可以应用于库存量水平作为衡量参数。In another embodiment, in addition to using the calculation method of the proportion or the difference, the inventory level can also be calculated by setting the threshold value (ie, the upper and lower limit) of the coulomb number of the silver halide. Referring again to Figures 3C to 3E, the inventory level is calculated based on the coulomb amount. In the case of performing a refill operation after each measurement operation, such as the curve between M1-M9, it can be clearly seen that by the method of the present invention , Even if there may be an increasing or decreasing trend during this period, the inventory level can be smoothly controlled between Th1 and Th2. Therefore, the proportion, the difference or the coulomb amount or a combination thereof can be applied to the inventory level as a measurement parameter.
关于Th3及Th4的阈值应用,还可以包括:当处理器确认库存量水平超过Th3及Th4时,给出异常信号,且系统可以判定生物传感器暂停、或结束进行测定操作。Regarding the threshold application of Th3 and Th4, it may also include: when the processor confirms that the inventory level exceeds Th3 and Th4, it gives an abnormal signal, and the system can determine that the biosensor is suspended or ends the measurement operation.
请参考图1,传输单元可选择性包括定时器260时,使本发明的方法还包括以下步骤:每经过各测定操作的固定时间间隔被满足的条件下,启动另外回充操作,其中固定时间间隔为15秒内、30秒内、一分钟内、十分钟内、一小时内、二小时内、四小时内、一天内、一周内或一个月内的时间值。Please refer to FIG. 1, when the transmission unit may optionally include a timer 260, the method of the present invention further includes the following steps: every time the fixed time interval of each measurement operation is satisfied, another recharging operation is initiated, wherein the fixed time The interval is within 15 seconds, within 30 seconds, within one minute, within ten minutes, within one hour, within two hours, within four hours, within one day, within one week or within one month.
关于各阈值的选择,当库存量水平为卤化银材料于卤化银材料与银材料中的占比时,第一阈值Th1选自1%至98%中的占比,第二阈值Th2选自2%至99%之间的占比。例如,当第一阈值Th1为1%时,第二阈值Th2可以为2%、3%、4%、5%、…直到99%中的一个数值;或者,当第二阈值Th2为99%时,第二阈值Th2可以为98%、97%、96%、95%、…直到1%中的一个数值、或选自第一阈值Th1于20%,第二阈值Th2为80%、或选自第一阈值Th1于30%,第二阈值Th2为70%、或选自第一阈值Th1于40%,第二阈值Th2为60%、或选自第一阈值Th1于50%,第二阈值Th2为60%。Regarding the selection of each threshold, when the inventory level is the proportion of silver halide materials in the proportion of silver halide materials and silver materials, the first threshold Th1 is selected from 1% to 98%, and the second threshold Th2 is selected from 2. % To 99%. For example, when the first threshold Th1 is 1%, the second threshold Th2 can be a value from 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, ... to 99%; or, when the second threshold Th2 is 99% , The second threshold Th2 can be a value of 98%, 97%, 96%, 95%, ... up to 1%, or selected from the first threshold Th1 at 20%, and the second threshold Th2 at 80%, or selected from The first threshold Th1 is at 30%, the second threshold Th2 is 70%, or the first threshold Th1 is at 40%, the second threshold Th2 is 60%, or the first threshold Th1 is at 50%, the second threshold Th2 Is 60%.
当库存量水平为各回充操作后卤化银材料的累积回充量减去各测定操作后卤化银材料的累积消耗量的差值时,第一阈值Th1为初始库存量的-1%至-99%之间的一个数值,以及第二阈值Th2为初始库存量的1%至99%之间的一个数值。其中,累积消耗量可以为只有一次测定后的单次消耗量,也可以是复数次测定后的累积消耗量。When the inventory level is the difference between the cumulative recharge amount of the silver halide material after each refill operation minus the cumulative consumption amount of the silver halide material after each measurement operation, the first threshold Th1 is -1% to -99 of the initial inventory A value between% and the second threshold Th2 is a value between 1% and 99% of the initial inventory. Wherein, the cumulative consumption may be a single consumption after only one measurement, or may be the cumulative consumption after multiple measurements.
本发明的生物传感器的回充控制以及回复一生物传感器至一合适工作状态方法, 除了可以应于具有一个工作电极及一个对电极的电极结构的生物传感器,还可以适用于具有一个工作电极、一个对电极及一个辅助电极的电极结构的生物传感器;也可以适用于具有一个工作电极、两个对电极及一个辅助电极的电极结构的生物传感器;或者也可以适用于具有两个工作电极及两个对电极的电极结构的生物传感器。The recharge control of the biosensor of the present invention and the method for restoring a biosensor to a proper working state can not only be applied to a biosensor having an electrode structure with a working electrode and a counter electrode, but also can be applied to a biosensor with a working electrode and a counter electrode. The biosensor with the electrode structure of the counter electrode and one auxiliary electrode; it can also be applied to the biosensor with the electrode structure of one working electrode, two counter electrodes and one auxiliary electrode; or it can also be applied to the biosensor with two working electrodes and two A biosensor of the electrode structure of the counter electrode.
本发明的生物传感器的回充控制方法,也涵盖了暖机期抬升库存量的要求。例如,于执行该回充操作之前,还包括下列步骤:由生理信号测定装置强制执行该回充操作、以及于库存量水平提高至大于或等于第二阈值Th1时停止回充操作。The recharge control method of the biosensor of the present invention also covers the requirement of raising the inventory during the warm-up period. For example, before performing the refilling operation, it further includes the following steps: the physiological signal measuring device forcibly executes the refilling operation, and stopping the refilling operation when the inventory level increases to be greater than or equal to the second threshold Th1.
根据本发明的一种实施例,施加回充电压系藉由施加固定电位差值或固定电流值来实施,固定电位差值或固定电流值系本质地根据AgCl消耗量变动而动态调整,详细实施机制请见图5至图10说明。According to an embodiment of the present invention, the application of the recharge voltage is implemented by applying a fixed potential difference or a fixed current value. The fixed potential difference or a fixed current value is essentially dynamically adjusted according to the change in AgCl consumption. Detailed implementation Please refer to Figure 5 to Figure 10 for the mechanism.
根据本发明的一种实施例,本发明还提供一种回复生物传感器至合适工作状态的方法,生物传感器包括第一电极与对电极、对电极包括卤化银材料及银材料,卤化银材料具库存量水平,且在测定操作中,使卤化银材料的库存量水平被消耗,本发明的方法包括下列步骤:于测定操作后,计算库存量水平之变化;以及启动第一回充操作,以回充库存量水平的变动值其中库存量水平被控制于基本地位于第一阈值Th1与第二阈值Th2之间变动。当库存量水平变化至小于或等于第一阈值Th1时,启动第一回充操作,以回充被消耗的卤化银材料,从而使库存量水平提高至第一阈值Th1与高于第一阈值Th1的第二阈值Th2之间的预定值。According to an embodiment of the present invention, the present invention also provides a method for restoring a biosensor to a proper working state. The biosensor includes a first electrode and a counter electrode. The counter electrode includes a silver halide material and a silver material. The silver halide material has a stock In the measurement operation, the inventory level of the silver halide material is consumed. The method of the present invention includes the following steps: after the measurement operation, the change in the inventory level is calculated; and the first refill operation is initiated to recover The variation value of the replenishment inventory level, wherein the inventory level is controlled to fluctuate between the first threshold Th1 and the second threshold Th2. When the inventory level changes to less than or equal to the first threshold Th1, the first refill operation is started to refill the consumed silver halide material, so that the inventory level is increased to the first threshold Th1 and higher than the first threshold Th1 A predetermined value between the second threshold Th2.
根据本发明的一种实施例,本发明的方法还包括以下步骤其中至少一者:每经过各测定操作的预定次数被满足的条件下,计算预定次数的期间中库存量水平的变动值,启动第一回充操作(即另一个回充操作),以回充库存量水平的变动值;以及每经过各测定操作的固定时间间隔被满足的条件下,启动第二回充操作。According to an embodiment of the present invention, the method of the present invention further includes at least one of the following steps: each time the predetermined number of measurement operations is met, calculating the change value of the inventory level during the predetermined number of times, and starting The first refill operation (that is, another refill operation) is to refill the change value of the inventory level; and every time the fixed time interval of each measurement operation is met, the second refill operation is started.
根据本发明的回复卤化银的方法,相关库存量水平的数据亦可传送到远程控制系统,由远程控制系统进行监控库存量水平,必要时提供更新指令给生理信号测定装置,进行回充条件的更新。According to the method of recovering silver halide of the present invention, data related to the inventory level can also be transmitted to the remote control system. The remote control system monitors the inventory level, and provides update instructions to the physiological signal measurement device when necessary to perform refilling conditions. renew.
定电压电压施加应用Constant voltage voltage application
请参考图5A-5B和7A-7D,其中图5A和图5B分别示出本发明中处于测定模式和回充模式的定电压电路,图7A-7D分别示出该定电压电路以不同方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的电流示意图。测定模式可分别藉由施加测定电位差Vl和移除测定电位差 Vl而开始和停止,而对应的电流以Ia表示。在测定模式时,于测定期间Tl施加测定电位差Vl于工作电极W与对电极R/C之间,使工作电极W的电压高于对电极R/C的电压。如图5A所示,此时开关S1和S4为闭路状态,而开关S2和S3为开路状态,工作电极W为+Vl,对电极R/C为接地,以使工作电极W进行氧化反应,并与化学试剂和待分析物进行电化学反应而输出生理信号Ia,同时对电极R/C的AgCl具有对应于该生理信号Ia的消耗量。如图7A-7D所示,在多个测定期间Tl之间的是未进行测定的期间T2。在某些较佳实施例中,T2为固定值。Please refer to Figures 5A-5B and 7A-7D, where Figures 5A and 5B respectively show the constant voltage circuit in the measurement mode and the recharge mode of the present invention. Figures 7A-7D show the constant voltage circuit alternately in different ways. Schematic diagram of current in measurement mode and recharge mode. The measurement mode can be started and stopped by applying the measurement potential difference V1 and removing the measurement potential difference V1, respectively, and the corresponding current is represented by Ia. In the measurement mode, the measurement potential difference V1 is applied between the working electrode W and the counter electrode R/C during the measurement period T1, so that the voltage of the working electrode W is higher than the voltage of the counter electrode R/C. As shown in Figure 5A, the switches S1 and S4 are in the closed state at this time, while the switches S2 and S3 are in the open state, the working electrode W is +Vl, and the counter electrode R/C is grounded, so that the working electrode W undergoes oxidation reaction, and The chemical reagent and the analyte are electrochemically reacted to output a physiological signal Ia, and at the same time, the AgCl of the counter electrode R/C has a consumption corresponding to the physiological signal Ia. As shown in FIGS. 7A-7D, between the plurality of measurement periods T1 is a period T2 during which no measurement is performed. In some preferred embodiments, T2 is a fixed value.
回充模式可分别藉由施加回充电位差V2和移除回充电位差V2而开始和停止,而对应的电流以Ib表示。V2为0.1V至0.8V之间的固定值,较佳为0.2V至0.5V之间的固定值。在回充模式时,施加回充电位差V2于工作电极W与对电极R/C之间持续回充期间t2(t2介于0至T2之间),使对电极R/C的电压高于工作电极W的电压。如图5B所示,此时开关S1和S4为开路状态,而开关S2和S3为闭路状态,工作电极W为接地,对电极R/C为+V2,以使对电极R/C上的Ag进行氧化反应,而回充对电极R/C上的AgCl达一回充量。在定电压电路中的回充电位差V2为固定电压,测得的输出电流为Ib。本发明是通过计算电流曲线下的面积以定义AgCl的容量(Capacity,单位库伦,以符号"C"表示),故测定模式中AgCl的消耗量为Ia*Tl,回充模式中AgCl的回充量为Ib*t2。因此,可经由调控回充电位差V2的施加时间t2来控制AgCl的回充量。换言之,在对电极R/C上的AgCl保持在安全库存量之内的前提下,可使回充量等于或不等于(包含约略相近、大于或小于)消耗量。The recharging mode can be started and stopped by applying the recharging gap V2 and removing the recharging gap V2 respectively, and the corresponding current is represented by Ib. V2 is a fixed value between 0.1V and 0.8V, preferably a fixed value between 0.2V and 0.5V. In the recharge mode, apply the recharge potential V2 between the working electrode W and the counter electrode R/C for the recharge period t2 (t2 is between 0 and T2), so that the voltage of the counter electrode R/C is higher than The voltage of the working electrode W. As shown in Figure 5B, the switches S1 and S4 are in the open state at this time, while the switches S2 and S3 are in the closed state, the working electrode W is grounded, and the counter electrode R/C is +V2, so that the Ag on the counter electrode R/C The oxidation reaction proceeds, and the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C is recharged to a recharge. The recharge potential V2 in the constant voltage circuit is a fixed voltage, and the measured output current is Ib. The present invention defines the capacity of AgCl by calculating the area under the current curve (Capacity, unit coulomb, represented by the symbol "C"), so the consumption of AgCl in the measurement mode is Ia*Tl, and the recharge of AgCl in the recharge mode The amount is Ib*t2. Therefore, the recharge amount of AgCl can be controlled by regulating the application time t2 of the recharge potential V2. In other words, on the premise that the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C is kept within the safety inventory, the recharge amount can be made equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) the consumption.
图7A-7D中横轴为时间,V1的线条表示测定电位差V1的施加和移除,V2的线条表示回充电位差V2的施加和移除。请参考图7A,在一较佳实施例中,V2和T2都是固定值,V2的施加时间t2(即回充期间)是变动值。回充期间t2是根据在测定模式所测得的生理信号Ia及测定期间T1而在0至T2之间动态调整。如图7A中所示,t2可为t2’、t2’’、或t2’’’…。换言之,回充期间t2可根据AgCl的消耗量而改变,若AgCl的消耗量大,则可回充较长的时间以使对电极R/C上的AgCl保持在安全库存量之内。举例而言,在t2’’期间所回充的AgCl的量将大于t2’期间所回充的AgCl量。The horizontal axis in FIGS. 7A-7D represents time, the line of V1 represents the application and removal of the measured potential difference V1, and the line of V2 represents the application and removal of the recharge potential difference V2. Please refer to FIG. 7A. In a preferred embodiment, V2 and T2 are both fixed values, and the application time t2 of V2 (that is, the recharging period) is a variable value. The recharge period t2 is dynamically adjusted from 0 to T2 based on the physiological signal Ia measured in the measurement mode and the measurement period T1. As shown in FIG. 7A, t2 can be t2', t2', or t2''.... In other words, the recharge period t2 can be changed according to the consumption of AgCl. If the consumption of AgCl is large, it can be recharged for a longer period of time to keep the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C within the safe inventory. For example, the amount of AgCl recharged during t2'' will be greater than the amount of AgCl recharged during t2'.
请参考图7B,在另一较佳实施例中,V2、T2和t2都是固定值,其中t2=T2。也就是说,测定模式和回充模式是无缝交替的,在未进行测定的期间即为回充期间。请参考图7C和7D,在某些较佳实施例中,V2、T2和t2都是固定值,其中t2为大于0且小于T2的固定值,例如t2=1/2的T2、2/5的T2、3/5的T2等。图7C和7D的差别在于,图7C 中是在每次测定模式结束后,经历一段缓冲时间(缓冲时间=T2-t2),才开始回充模式;图7D中是每次测定模式结束后未经缓冲时间即立即开始回充模式,而在每次回充模式结束与下一次测定模式开始之间间隔一段时间。在某些较佳实施例中,t2小于T2,且t2可为T2期间的任何时间段。Please refer to FIG. 7B. In another preferred embodiment, V2, T2, and t2 are all fixed values, where t2=T2. In other words, the measurement mode and the recharge mode are seamlessly alternated, and the period during which no measurement is performed is the recharge period. Please refer to Figures 7C and 7D. In some preferred embodiments, V2, T2, and t2 are all fixed values, where t2 is a fixed value greater than 0 and less than T2, such as T2 = 1/2 of T2, 2/5 T2, 3/5 T2, etc. The difference between Fig. 7C and Fig. 7D is that in Fig. 7C, after each measurement mode is over, after a period of buffering time (buffer time=T2-t2), the recharge mode starts; The recharge mode starts immediately after the buffer time, and there is a period of time between the end of each recharge mode and the start of the next measurement mode. In some preferred embodiments, t2 is less than T2, and t2 can be any time period during T2.
请参考图7E和7F,其示出本发明的定电压电路以不同方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的电流示意图。图7E和7F中,横轴为时间,纵轴为电流,曲线表示所测定到的生理信号Ia换算而成的生理参数值曲线。在这两个实施例中,类似于图7A,V2和T2为固定值,回充期间t2是变动值。图7E和7F中,曲线下白色面积代表测定模式中AgCl的消耗量(Ia*Tl),斜线面积代表回充模式中AgCl的回充量(Ib*t2)。由图中可看出,为了使Ib*t2接近Ia*Tl或在Ia*Tl的某个范围内,回充期间t2是根据所测得的生理信号Ia及测定期间T1而在0至T2之间动态调整。根据需要,可选择在未执行测定模式的期间(T2)的前段(如图7E所示)或后段(如图7F所示)进行回充模式。Please refer to FIGS. 7E and 7F, which show the current schematic diagrams of the constant voltage circuit of the present invention alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode in different ways. In FIGS. 7E and 7F, the horizontal axis is time and the vertical axis is current, and the curve represents the physiological parameter value curve converted from the measured physiological signal Ia. In these two embodiments, similar to FIG. 7A, V2 and T2 are fixed values, and t2 during the recharge period is a variable value. In Figures 7E and 7F, the white area under the curve represents the AgCl consumption in the measurement mode (Ia*Tl), and the oblique area represents the AgCl recharge in the recharge mode (Ib*t2). It can be seen from the figure that in order to make Ib*t2 close to Ia*Tl or within a certain range of Ia*Tl, the recharge period t2 is based on the measured physiological signal Ia and the measurement period T1 and is set between 0 and T2. Dynamic adjustment between time. According to needs, the recharging mode can be selected in the front part (as shown in FIG. 7E) or the back part (as shown in FIG. 7F) of the period (T2) in which the measurement mode is not performed.
有段切换的定电流电压施加应用Constant current and voltage application with segment switching
请参考图8A-8B和图10A-10C,其中图8A和图8B分别示出本发明中处于测定模式和回充模式的有段切换的定电流电路,图10A-10C示出本发明的定电流电路以不同方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的三种电压示意图。测定模式可分别藉由施加测定电位差Vl和移除测定电位差Vl而开始和停止,而对应的电流以Ia表示。在测定模式时,施加测定电位差Vl于工作电极W与对电极R/C之间持续测定期间T1。如图8A所示,此时开关S1和S4为闭路状态,而其他开关都为开路状态,工作电极W为+V1,对电极R/C为接地,以使工作电极W进行氧化反应,并与化学试剂和待分析物进行电化学反应而输出生理信号Ia,同时对电极R/C的AgCl具有对应于该生理信号Ia的消耗量。如图10A-10C所示,在多个测定期间Tl之间的是未进行测定的期间T2。在某些较佳实施例中,T2为固定值。Please refer to Figures 8A-8B and Figures 10A-10C, where Figures 8A and 8B respectively show the constant current circuit in the measurement mode and the recharge mode of the present invention, and Figures 10A-10C show the constant current circuit of the present invention. The current circuit alternately performs three voltage schematic diagrams of measurement mode and recharge mode in different ways. The measurement mode can be started and stopped by applying the measurement potential difference V1 and removing the measurement potential difference V1, respectively, and the corresponding current is represented by Ia. In the measurement mode, the measurement potential difference V1 is applied between the working electrode W and the counter electrode R/C for the measurement period T1. As shown in Figure 8A, the switches S1 and S4 are in the closed state at this time, while the other switches are in the open state. The working electrode W is +V1, and the counter electrode R/C is grounded, so that the working electrode W undergoes oxidation reaction and interacts with The chemical reagent and the analyte undergo an electrochemical reaction to output a physiological signal Ia, and at the same time, the AgCl of the counter electrode R/C has a consumption corresponding to the physiological signal Ia. As shown in FIGS. 10A-10C, between the plurality of measurement periods T1 is a period T2 during which no measurement is performed. In some preferred embodiments, T2 is a fixed value.
回充模式可分别藉由施加回充电位差V2(V2为变动值)和移除回充电位差V2而开始和停止,而对应的电流以Ib表示。在回充模式时,施加回充电位差V2于工作电极W与对电极R/C之间持续回充期间t2(t2介于0至T2之间)。如图8B所示,此时开关S1和S4为开路状态,S2和I_F1至I_Fn所对应的至少一个开关为闭路状态(图中示例性地示出I_F1和I_F3对应的开关为闭路状态),工作电极W为接地,对电极R/C为+V2,以使对电极R/C上的Ag进行氧化反应,进而回充AgCl。在回充模式时,可根据该生理信号Ia的大小及测定期间T1,而选择切换I_F1至I_Fn所对应的至少一个开关以输出固定 电流Ib,并经由调控电位差V2的施加时间t2来控制AgCl的回充量。换言之,在对电极R/C上的AgCl保持在安全库存量之内的前提下,可使回充量等于或不等于(包含约略相近、大于或小于)消耗量。The recharging mode can be started and stopped by applying the recharging gap V2 (V2 is a variable value) and removing the recharging gap V2, and the corresponding current is represented by Ib. In the recharging mode, the recharging level difference V2 is applied between the working electrode W and the counter electrode R/C for the recharging period t2 (t2 is between 0 and T2). As shown in Figure 8B, at this time, switches S1 and S4 are in an open state, and at least one switch corresponding to S2 and I_F1 to I_Fn is in a closed state (the figure exemplarily shows that the switches corresponding to I_F1 and I_F3 are in a closed state), and work The electrode W is grounded, and the counter electrode R/C is +V2, so that the Ag on the counter electrode R/C is oxidized, and then AgCl is recharged. In the recharge mode, according to the magnitude of the physiological signal Ia and the measurement period T1, at least one switch corresponding to I_F1 to I_Fn can be selected to output a fixed current Ib, and the AgCl can be controlled by regulating the application time t2 of the potential difference V2 The amount of recharge. In other words, on the premise that the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C is kept within the safety inventory, the recharge amount can be made equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) the consumption.
无段切换的定电流电压施加应用Application of constant current and voltage without segment switching
请参考图9A-9B和图10A-10C,其中图9A和图9B分别示出本发明中处于测定模式和回充模式的无段切换的定电流电路。本实施例的测定模式与回充模式与图8A-8B类似,故于此不再赘述,与图8A-8B实施例之差异仅在本实施例在回充模式时,可根据该生理信号Ia,藉由数字模拟转换器(DAC)的控制而输出固定电流Ib,并经由调控电位差V2的施加时间t2来控制AgCl的回充量。换言之,在对电极R/C上的AgCl保持在安全库存量之内的前提下,可使回充量等于或不等于(包含约略相近、大于或小于)消耗量。Please refer to FIGS. 9A-9B and FIGS. 10A-10C, where FIGS. 9A and 9B respectively show the stepless switching constant current circuit in the measurement mode and the recharge mode in the present invention. The measurement mode and recharge mode of this embodiment are similar to those in Figs. 8A-8B, so they will not be repeated here. The difference from the embodiment of Figs. 8A-8B is only when the embodiment is in the recharge mode, according to the physiological signal Ia A fixed current Ib is output by the control of a digital-to-analog converter (DAC), and the recharge amount of AgCl is controlled by adjusting the application time t2 of the potential difference V2. In other words, on the premise that the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C is kept within the safety inventory, the recharge amount can be made equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) the consumption.
图10A-10C中横轴为时间,纵轴为电流,其中V1的线条表示测定电位差V1的施加和移除,V2的线条表示回充电位差V2的施加和移除。请参考图10A,在一较佳实施例中,T2是固定值,V2和V2的施加时间t2(即回充期间)是变动值。回充期间t2是根据在测定模式所测得的生理信号Ia及测定期间T1而在0至T2之间动态调整。如图10A中所示,t2可为t2’、t2’’、或t2’’’…。换言之,回充期间t2可根据AgCl的消耗量而改变,若AgCl的消耗量大,则可回充较长的时间以使对电极R/C上的AgCl保持在安全库存量之内。In FIGS. 10A-10C, the horizontal axis is time and the vertical axis is current. The line of V1 represents the application and removal of the measured potential difference V1, and the line of V2 represents the application and removal of the recharge potential V2. Please refer to FIG. 10A. In a preferred embodiment, T2 is a fixed value, and the application time t2 of V2 and V2 (that is, the recharging period) is a variable value. The recharge period t2 is dynamically adjusted from 0 to T2 based on the physiological signal Ia measured in the measurement mode and the measurement period T1. As shown in FIG. 10A, t2 can be t2', t2'', or t2'''... In other words, the recharge period t2 can be changed according to the consumption of AgCl. If the consumption of AgCl is large, it can be recharged for a longer period of time to keep the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C within the safe inventory.
请参考图10B,在另一较佳实施例中,V2是变动值,T2和t2都是固定值,其中t2为大于0且小于T2的固定值,例如t2=1/2的T2、2/5的T2、3/7的T2等。在此实施例中,V2是根据于生理信号测定步骤(即在测定模式中)的AgCl的消耗量而动态调整。动态调整方式的其中一个实施例如下。使用例如上述的有段切换的定电流电路,该电路具有n个固定电流源与n个开关,各固定电流源分别对应一个开关。于回充模式时,依据AgCl的消耗量,选择开启n个开关中的至少一个开关(即使该开关处于闭路状态)以输出固定电流值。在回充期间t2为固定值的情况下,可以藉由选择不同的固定电流输出来控制AgCl的回充量。Please refer to FIG. 10B. In another preferred embodiment, V2 is a variable value, and T2 and t2 are both fixed values, where t2 is a fixed value greater than 0 and less than T2, such as T2 = 1/2 of T2, 2/ 5 T2, 3/7 T2, etc. In this embodiment, V2 is dynamically adjusted according to the consumption of AgCl in the physiological signal measurement step (that is, in the measurement mode). One example of the dynamic adjustment method is as follows. For example, the above-mentioned constant current circuit with segment switching is used. The circuit has n fixed current sources and n switches, and each fixed current source corresponds to a switch. In the recharge mode, according to the consumption of AgCl, at least one of the n switches is selected to be turned on (even if the switch is in a closed state) to output a fixed current value. When the recharge period t2 is a fixed value, the recharge amount of AgCl can be controlled by selecting different fixed current outputs.
请参考图10C,在另一较佳实施例中,V2是变动值,T2和t2都是固定值,其中t2=T2。也就是说,测定模式和回充模式是无缝交替的,在未进行测定的期间即为回充期间。Please refer to FIG. 10C. In another preferred embodiment, V2 is a variable value, and T2 and t2 are both fixed values, where t2=T2. In other words, the measurement mode and the recharge mode are seamlessly alternated, and the period during which no measurement is performed is the recharge period.
相较于无段切换的定电流电路,有段切换的定电流电路可通过多个开关控制多个 电流路径,而得以根据所需的电流量以分段式的定电流进行回充,以此方式较为省电且可以降低成本。此外,不管是定电压电路或定电流电路,电位差可以来自直流电源或交流电源。Compared with a constant current circuit with no segment switching, a constant current circuit with segment switching can control multiple current paths through multiple switches, and can recharge with a segmented constant current according to the amount of current required. The method is more power-efficient and can reduce costs. In addition, whether it is a constant voltage circuit or a constant current circuit, the potential difference can come from a DC power supply or an AC power supply.
图7A至图10C的实施例都是描述测定步骤和回充步骤交替循环的操作方式,亦即每个测定步骤之间都有一个AgCl回充步骤,此方式可较佳地确保AgCl保持在安全库存量之内。然而,在某些较佳实施例中,亦可在进行N次的测定期间选择性搭配Y次的AgCl回充,其中Y≤N,使AgCl的累积回充量仍可保持在安全库存范围内。测定步骤和回充步骤也不必然需要以交替循环的方式进行,亦可于数次测定步骤后再进行一次回充步骤,或是在预定的测定时间之后,才进行一次回充步骤。举例而言,可于测定10次后再进行一次回充步骤,或可于累积测定时间达1小时后才进行一次回充步骤。The embodiments of FIGS. 7A to 10C describe the alternate cycle of the measurement step and the refilling step. That is, there is an AgCl refilling step between each measurement step. This method can better ensure that AgCl is kept safe. Within inventory. However, in some preferred embodiments, Y times of AgCl recharge can also be selectively matched during N measurements, where Y≤N, so that the cumulative recharge of AgCl can still be kept within the safety stock range. . The measurement step and the refilling step do not necessarily need to be performed in an alternating cycle, and the refilling step may be performed again after several measurement steps, or the refilling step may be performed only after a predetermined measurement time. For example, the refilling step can be performed again after 10 measurements, or the refilling step can be performed only after the cumulative measurement time reaches 1 hour.
请参考图10D,其示出本发明的定电流电路以类似图10C的方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的示意图。图10D中,曲线表示所测定到的生理信号Ia所转换成的生理参数值曲线,且类似于图10C,T2和t2都是固定值,V2是变动值。图10D中,曲线下白色面积代表测定模式中AgCl的消耗量(Ia*Tl),斜线面积代表回充模式中AgCl的回充量(Ib*t2)。由图中可看出,为了使Ib*t2接近Ia*Tl或在Ia*Tl的某个范围内,回充电位差V2是根据AgCl的消耗量而动态调整。Please refer to FIG. 10D, which shows a schematic diagram of the constant current circuit of the present invention alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode in a manner similar to FIG. 10C. In Fig. 10D, the curve represents the physiological parameter value curve converted from the measured physiological signal Ia, and is similar to Fig. 10C, T2 and t2 are both fixed values, and V2 is a variable value. In Figure 10D, the white area under the curve represents the consumption of AgCl in the measurement mode (Ia*Tl), and the slanted area represents the recharge volume of AgCl in the recharge mode (Ib*t2). It can be seen from the figure that, in order to make Ib*t2 close to Ia*Tl or within a certain range of Ia*Tl, the recharge position difference V2 is dynamically adjusted according to the consumption of AgCl.
另外图7E、7F及图10D中,虽未显示每次执行生理信号测定步骤后所输出各生理参数值输出时机点,但生理参数值不限于完成测定时输出或于在回充期间内输出,而AgCl回充步骤不限于在每一个生理参数输出后执行或获得生理信号后执行。In addition, in Figures 7E, 7F and Figure 10D, although the output timing of each physiological parameter value output after each physiological signal measurement step is performed is not shown, the physiological parameter value is not limited to the output when the measurement is completed or during the recharge period. The AgCl refilling step is not limited to being executed after each physiological parameter is output or after the physiological signal is obtained.
请参考图11,其示出根据本发明一实施例的测定待分析物的方法,通过该方法可延长微型生物传感器的使用寿命。该微型生物传感器可为例如图2A-图2D所示的微型生物传感器,用于植入皮下以测定与生物流体(例如组织液)中的该待分析物所关联的生理参数的生理信号。在图11的实施例中,该待分析物可为组织液中的葡萄糖,生理参数为人体中的葡萄糖值,生理信号为微型生物传感器量得的电流值。此实施例中,测定待分析物的方法包含反复循环地执行测定步骤(S901)及回充步骤(S902)。测定步骤(S901)包含使用前述定电压或定电流电路于测定期间T1执行如前述的测定模式以输出生理信号(即电流值),同时对电极的AgCl具有对应于该电流值的消耗量。测定步骤(S901)还包含通过停止如前述的测定模式来停止测定步骤,且该电流值经运算后输出生理参数(即葡萄糖值)。Please refer to FIG. 11, which shows a method for determining an analyte according to an embodiment of the present invention, by which the service life of the micro biosensor can be prolonged. The miniature biosensor may be, for example, the miniature biosensor shown in FIGS. 2A-2D, which is implanted subcutaneously to measure the physiological signal of the physiological parameter associated with the analyte in the biological fluid (for example, tissue fluid). In the embodiment of FIG. 11, the analyte may be glucose in the tissue fluid, the physiological parameter is the glucose value in the human body, and the physiological signal is the current value measured by the micro biosensor. In this embodiment, the method for measuring the analyte includes repeatedly executing the measuring step (S901) and the refilling step (S902). The measurement step (S901) includes using the aforementioned constant voltage or constant current circuit to perform the aforementioned measurement mode during the measurement period T1 to output a physiological signal (ie, current value), and at the same time, the AgCl of the counter electrode has a consumption corresponding to the current value. The measuring step (S901) further includes stopping the measuring step by stopping the aforementioned measuring mode, and the current value is calculated to output a physiological parameter (ie, a glucose value).
在测定步骤(S901),其化学反应式如下:In the determination step (S901), the chemical reaction formula is as follows:
于工作电极120进行以下氧化反应:Perform the following oxidation reactions on the working electrode 120:
Figure PCTCN2021080609-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2021080609-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2021080609-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2021080609-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2021080609-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2021080609-appb-000003
于对电极130进行以下还原反应:Perform the following reduction reaction on the counter electrode 130:
Figure PCTCN2021080609-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2021080609-appb-000004
回充步骤(S902)包含使用前述定电压或定电流电路于回充期间执行如前述的回充模式,以使对电极的AgCl具有对应于消耗量的回充量,进而使对电极上之AgCl的量控制在安全库存区间内。由此,可使该工作电极与对电极之间的电位差保持稳定,让所获得的电流值仍能与葡萄糖值保持稳定的比例关系(若侦测物质为其他待分析物亦可能是正比关系也可能是反比关系)。换言之,可使下一测定步骤时所获得的下一个电流值与下一个葡萄糖值保持稳定的比例关系。回充步骤(S902)还包含通过停止如前述的回充模式来停止回充步骤。回充步骤(S902)结束后循环回去执行测定步骤(S901),直到执行了N次测定步骤(S901)与N次回充步骤(S902)。The recharging step (S902) includes using the aforementioned constant voltage or constant current circuit to perform the aforementioned recharging mode during the recharging period, so that the AgCl on the counter electrode has a recharging amount corresponding to the consumption, so that the AgCl on the counter electrode The amount is controlled within the safety stock range. As a result, the potential difference between the working electrode and the counter electrode can be kept stable, so that the obtained current value can still maintain a stable proportional relationship with the glucose value (if the detected substance is other analytes, it may also be proportional. It may also be an inverse relationship). In other words, it is possible to maintain a stable proportional relationship between the next current value obtained in the next measurement step and the next glucose value. The recharging step (S902) also includes stopping the recharging step by stopping the aforementioned recharging mode. After the refilling step (S902) is finished, loop back to perform the measurement step (S901) until the measurement step (S901) and the refilling step (S902) are executed N times.
在回充步骤(S902),其化学反应式如下:In the refilling step (S902), the chemical reaction formula is as follows:
于工作电极120进行以下还原反应:Perform the following reduction reactions on the working electrode 120:
葡萄糖(Glucose)+还原型葡萄糖氧化酶(Glucose oxidase)Glucose + reduced glucose oxidase (Glucose oxidase)
Figure PCTCN2021080609-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2021080609-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2021080609-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2021080609-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2021080609-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2021080609-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2021080609-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2021080609-appb-000008
于对电极130的正电位促使对电极130进行以下氧化反应:The positive potential on the counter electrode 130 promotes the following oxidation reaction on the counter electrode 130:
Figure PCTCN2021080609-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2021080609-appb-000009
其中对电极上的Ag氧化成Ag +,与来自生物体内Cl -或AgCl氧化(或解离)后的Cl -结合而成AgCl,使得于测定期间T1内被消耗的部分或全部AgCl被回充到对电极上。 Wherein the oxidation of the Ag electrode as Ag +, and from in vivo Cl - bonded AgCl, AgCl such that some or all of the measurement to be consumed during the period T1 is backfilled - Cl or AgCl after oxidation (or dissociation) To the counter electrode.
人体通过掺碘的食盐可以取得氯离子及碘离子,故可取得的卤离子至少包括氯离子及碘离子,以用于回充卤化银。The human body can obtain chloride ions and iodide ions through iodine-doped table salt, so the available halide ions include at least chloride ions and iodide ions, which are used to recharge the silver halide.
以下实施例是针对N次测定步骤(S901)及N次回充步骤(S902)的循环,其中所提到的生理参数较佳是葡萄糖值,所提到的生理信号较佳是电流值。根据某些较佳实施例,各测定电位差V1于测定期间T1被施加,各回充电位差V2于回充期间t2被施加,且测定期间T1为固定值,其可为3秒内、5秒内、10秒内、15秒内、30秒内、1分钟内、2分钟内、5分钟内或10分钟内的一时间值。根据某些较佳实施例,较佳为30秒内的时间值。测定期间T1为固定值,且可为2.5秒、5秒、15秒、30秒、1分钟、2.5分钟、5分钟、10分钟或30分钟,较佳为30秒。根据某些较佳实施例,各测定期间T1加上各回充期间t2为固定值。根据某些较佳实施例,各回充电位差V2具有固定电压值,各回充期间t2是根据AgCl的每次消耗量而动态调整(如图7A所示)。根据某些较佳实施例,输出的各生理参数是经由各测定期间T1中的一个单一测定时间点的各生理信号运算而获得。根据某些较佳实施例,输出的各生理参数是经由各测定期间T1中的多个测定时间点的多个生理信号的一数学运算值运算而获得。前述数学运算值为例如累加值、平均值、中位数、中位数的平均值等。根据某些较佳实施例,藉由控制每次回充量为等于或不等于(包含约略相近、大于或小于)每次消耗量,而控制对电极之AgCl量在安全库存区间内,而使下一测定步骤时所获得的下一生理信号与下一生理参数保持稳定的比例关系。根据某些较佳实施例,移除各测定电位差V1的步骤是将配置于连通工作电极及对电极之电路断路、或设定各测定电位差V1为0。换言之,可进行断电,以使测定电路具有开路状态;或者,可施加0伏特电压于工作电极及对电极之间,其中该两项操作其中任一操作的操作时间皆为0.01~0.5秒。移除测定电位差V1的步骤可避免Λ形的生理信号产生。根据某些较佳实施例,移除各回充电位差V2的步骤是将配置于连通工作电极及对电极之电路断路、或设定各回充电位差V2为0。The following embodiments are directed to the cycle of N measurement steps (S901) and N refill steps (S902), wherein the physiological parameter mentioned is preferably the glucose value, and the physiological signal mentioned is preferably the current value. According to some preferred embodiments, each measurement potential difference V1 is applied during the measurement period T1, each recharge level difference V2 is applied during the recharge period t2, and the measurement period T1 is a fixed value, which can be within 3 seconds, 5 seconds Within, within 10 seconds, within 15 seconds, within 30 seconds, within 1 minute, within 2 minutes, within 5 minutes, or within 10 minutes. According to some preferred embodiments, the time value is preferably within 30 seconds. The measurement period T1 is a fixed value, and can be 2.5 seconds, 5 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2.5 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, or 30 minutes, preferably 30 seconds. According to some preferred embodiments, each measurement period T1 plus each recharge period t2 is a fixed value. According to some preferred embodiments, each recharge level difference V2 has a fixed voltage value, and each recharge period t2 is dynamically adjusted according to each consumption of AgCl (as shown in FIG. 7A). According to some preferred embodiments, the output physiological parameters are obtained by calculating the physiological signals at a single measurement time point in each measurement period T1. According to some preferred embodiments, the output physiological parameters are obtained through a mathematical operation of a plurality of physiological signals at a plurality of measurement time points in each measurement period T1. The aforementioned mathematical operation value is, for example, the accumulated value, the average value, the median, the average value of the median, and so on. According to some preferred embodiments, by controlling the amount of each refill to be equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) each consumption, and controlling the amount of AgCl of the counter electrode within the safety stock interval, the lower The next physiological signal obtained in a determination step maintains a stable proportional relationship with the next physiological parameter. According to some preferred embodiments, the step of removing each measured potential difference V1 is to disconnect the circuit that connects the working electrode and the counter electrode, or set each measured potential difference V1 to zero. In other words, the power can be turned off to make the measuring circuit have an open state; or, a 0 volt voltage can be applied between the working electrode and the counter electrode, wherein the operation time of either of the two operations is 0.01 to 0.5 seconds. Removing the step of measuring the potential difference V1 can avoid the generation of Λ-shaped physiological signals. According to some preferred embodiments, the step of removing each regenerative level difference V2 is to disconnect the circuit that connects the working electrode and the counter electrode, or set each regenerative level difference V2 to zero.
根据某些较佳实施例,传感器植入人体后需经过暖机时间,使传感器在体内达到平衡稳定才能稳定呈现与分析物浓度呈正相关的生理信号。因此,在测定步骤(S901)持续施加测定电压直至测定期间T1结束,并控制该测定期间T1以使得生理信号与分析物的生理参数达到稳定的比例关系。因此,测定期间T1可为变动值或为变动值和固定值的组合(例如变动值+固定值,该变动值可为1小时、2小时、3小时、6小时、12小时或24小时,该固定值可为例如30秒)。According to some preferred embodiments, after the sensor is implanted in the human body, a warm-up time is required to allow the sensor to reach equilibrium and stability in the body in order to stably present a physiological signal that is positively correlated with the concentration of the analyte. Therefore, in the measurement step (S901), the measurement voltage is continuously applied until the end of the measurement period T1, and the measurement period T1 is controlled so that the physiological signal and the physiological parameter of the analyte reach a stable proportional relationship. Therefore, the measurement period T1 can be a variable value or a combination of a variable value and a fixed value (for example, a variable value + a fixed value. The variable value can be 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, or 24 hours. The fixed value may be, for example, 30 seconds).
请参考图7A-7F、图10A-10D及图11,本发明利用施加电压于对电极R/C来测定一期间内对电极之反应电流,并经由将该期间内反应电流经数学运算而得知AgCl初始容量,例如通过计算反应电流曲线下的面积以定义AgCl初始容量,又称初始量或初始库 伦量(C initial),以下皆以量来说明。对电极R/C包含Ag和AgCl,当得知AgCl的百分比(X%AgCl)时,即可算出Ag百分比(Y%Ag=100%-X%AgCl)。于每次测定步骤(S901)中通过计算工作电极W的电流曲线下的面积来定义每次AgCl的消耗量(以C consume表示)。对电极R/C的AgCl具有对应于该生理信号Ia的消耗量C consume,即C consume=Ia*T1。于每次回充步骤(S902)中,通过计算对电极R/C的电流曲线下的面积来定义每次AgCl的回充量(以C replenish表示),即C replenish=Ib*t2,t2介于0~T2之间。 Please refer to FIGS. 7A-7F, FIGS. 10A-10D and FIG. 11. The present invention uses voltage applied to the counter electrode R/C to measure the reaction current of the counter electrode in a period, and the reaction current in the period is calculated by mathematical operation. Knowing the initial capacity of AgCl, for example, by calculating the area under the reaction current curve to define the initial capacity of AgCl, also known as the initial amount or initial coulombic amount (C initial ), the following are all explained by the amount. The counter electrode R/C contains Ag and AgCl. When the percentage of AgCl (X%AgCl) is known, the percentage of Ag can be calculated (Y%Ag=100%-X%AgCl). In each measurement step (S901), the consumption of AgCl (expressed as C consume ) is defined by calculating the area under the current curve of the working electrode W. The AgCl of the counter electrode R/C has a consumption C consume corresponding to the physiological signal Ia, that is, C consume = Ia*T1. In each recharge step (S902), the area under the current curve of the counter electrode R/C is calculated to define the recharge amount of AgCl each time ( indicated by C replenish ), that is, C replenish = Ib*t2, and t2 is between Between 0 and T2.
以下描述AgCl安全库存量的计算方法。在某些较佳实施例中,安全库存区间是以Ag与AgCl的比例呈现,本发明是以于对电极测定到的库伦量(C)以反映Ag与AgCl的比例关系。在某些较佳实施例中,Ag与AgCl的比例为99.9%:0.1%、99%:1%、95%:5%、90%:10%、70%:30%、50%:50%、40%:60%或30:70%,使AgCl在对电极上具备一程度上的量而不会被消耗殆尽,让每次生理信号测定步骤皆能稳定执行。AgCl的剩余量为回充量与初始量的和减去消耗量。在某些较佳实施例中,AgCl的剩余量在一区间范围内变动,亦即AgCl的剩余量被控制在初始量加减特定值(X值)的范围内,即(C replenish+C initial)-C consume=C initial±X,其中0<X<100%C initial、10%C initial<X≤90%C initial、或0.5%C initial<X≤50%C initial。在某些较佳实施例中,AgCl的剩余量可在一区间范围内逐渐下降、逐渐上升、或是平稳变动或任意变动但仍于该区间范围内。 The following describes the calculation method of AgCl safety stock. In some preferred embodiments, the safety stock interval is represented by the ratio of Ag to AgCl. The present invention uses the coulombic amount (C) measured on the counter electrode to reflect the ratio of Ag to AgCl. In some preferred embodiments, the ratio of Ag to AgCl is 99.9%: 0.1%, 99%: 1%, 95%: 5%, 90%: 10%, 70%: 30%, 50%: 50% , 40%:60% or 30:70%, so that AgCl has a certain amount of AgCl on the counter electrode without being exhausted, so that each physiological signal measurement step can be performed stably. The remaining amount of AgCl is the sum of the refill amount and the initial amount minus the consumption. In some preferred embodiments, the remaining amount of AgCl varies within an interval, that is, the remaining amount of AgCl is controlled within the range of the initial amount plus or minus a specific value (X value), that is, (C replenish + C initial )-C consume =C initial ±X, where 0<X<100%C initial , 10%C initial <X≤90%C initial , or 0.5%C initial <X≤50%C initial . In some preferred embodiments, the remaining amount of AgCl may gradually decrease, gradually increase, or change steadily or arbitrarily within an interval, but still within the interval.
请参考图12,其示出根据本发明另一实施例的测定待分析物的方法,通过该方法不但可延长微型生物传感器的使用寿命并且能缩减对电极之银及卤化银材料用量。该微型生物传感器可为例如图2A-2D所示的微型生物传感器,用于植入皮下以测定与生物流体(例如组织液)中的该待分析物所关联的生理参数的生理信号。该微型生物传感器的对电极的电极材料包括银及卤化银,在图12的实施例中,该待分析物可为组织液中的葡萄糖,生理参数为人体中的葡萄糖值,生理信号为微型生物传感器量得的电流值。以下仅描述此实施例的一个循环。此实施例的方法始于以下步骤:施加测定电压以驱动工作电极,以测定用以获得生理参数的生理信号,其中卤化银被消耗特定量(下文略称为消耗量)(S1001)。Please refer to FIG. 12, which shows a method for determining an analyte according to another embodiment of the present invention. By this method, the service life of the micro biosensor can be prolonged and the amount of silver and silver halide materials in the counter electrode can be reduced. The miniature biosensor may be, for example, the miniature biosensor shown in FIGS. 2A-2D, which is implanted subcutaneously to measure the physiological signal of the physiological parameter associated with the analyte in the biological fluid (for example, tissue fluid). The electrode material of the counter electrode of the micro biosensor includes silver and silver halide. In the embodiment of FIG. 12, the analyte can be glucose in tissue fluid, the physiological parameter is the glucose value in the human body, and the physiological signal is the micro biosensor. The measured current value. Only one cycle of this embodiment will be described below. The method of this embodiment starts with the following steps: applying a measuring voltage to drive the working electrode to measure a physiological signal for obtaining a physiological parameter, in which a specific amount of silver halide is consumed (hereinafter referred to as a consumption amount) (S1001).
接着停止施加测定电压(S1002),并利用所获得的生理信号来获得生理参数(S1003)。获得生理参数后,施加回充电压于对电极及工作电极之间,以驱动对电极,从而使卤化银的量被回充一回充量(S1004),其中回充量与初始量的和减去消耗量的值(即前文所述的剩余量)被控制在初始量加减特定值的范围内。上述控制步骤 是藉由控制回充量等于或不等于(包含约略相近、大于或小于)消耗量来达成,以维持卤化银的量在安全库存区间内。根据反应式,卤化银的摩尔数增减对应银的摩尔数增减,故为了便于说明,卤化银的消耗量对应模拟的银的增加量。在某些较佳实施例中,剩余量的值被控制成使得卤化银的量与银的量加上卤化银的量的和(AgCl/Ag+AgCl)的比值是大于0且小于1,亦即对电极的卤化银有一个量即可,较佳为介于0.01-0.99之间、介于0.1-0.9之间、介于0.2-0.8之间、介于0.3-0.7之间或介于0.4-0.6之间。在达到该回充量时停止施加回充电压(S1005)。之后再循环至步骤S1001执行下一个循环。Then stop applying the measurement voltage (S1002), and use the obtained physiological signal to obtain physiological parameters (S1003). After obtaining the physiological parameters, apply a recharge voltage between the counter electrode and the working electrode to drive the counter electrode, so that the amount of silver halide is recharged by a recharge amount (S1004), where the sum of the recharge amount and the initial amount decreases The value of the deconsumption amount (that is, the remaining amount mentioned above) is controlled within the range of the initial amount plus or minus a specific value. The above-mentioned control steps are achieved by controlling the refilling amount to be equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) the consumption, so as to maintain the amount of silver halide within the safety stock range. According to the reaction formula, the increase or decrease of the number of moles of silver halide corresponds to the increase or decrease of the number of moles of silver, so for the convenience of explanation, the consumption of silver halide corresponds to the increase of simulated silver. In some preferred embodiments, the value of the remaining amount is controlled such that the ratio of the amount of silver halide to the amount of silver plus the amount of silver halide (AgCl/Ag+AgCl) is greater than 0 and less than 1, also That is, there is only one amount of silver halide in the counter electrode, preferably between 0.01-0.99, between 0.1-0.9, between 0.2-0.8, between 0.3-0.7, or between 0.4- Between 0.6. When the recharge amount is reached, the application of the recharge voltage is stopped (S1005). Then it loops to step S1001 to execute the next loop.
以下描述本发明的一具体实施例,以生物传感器使用寿命须达到16天作为示例以计算所需电极信号感测段Ag/AgCl材料尺寸之方法,例如每次测量的待分析物平均测定电流为30nA、测定期间(T1)为30秒、且回充期间(t2)为30秒。每天所需AgCl的消耗量(C consume/day)=1.3mC/天。假设传感器使用寿命的需求为16天,则使用16天所需AgCl的消耗量为1.3x 16=20.8mC。 A specific embodiment of the present invention will be described below. A method for calculating the size of the Ag/AgCl material of the electrode signal sensing section is taken as an example with a biosensor service life of 16 days. For example, the average measured current of the analyte for each measurement is 30 nA, the measurement period (T1) is 30 seconds, and the recharge period (t2) is 30 seconds. The daily consumption of AgCl (C consume/day )=1.3mC/day. Assuming that the service life requirement of the sensor is 16 days, the consumption of AgCl required for 16 days is 1.3×16=20.8mC.
例如对电极的长度为2.5mm,其对应AgCl初始量C intial=10mC; For example, the length of the counter electrode is 2.5mm, which corresponds to the initial amount of AgCl C intial = 10mC;
在无执行AgCl的回充的情况下,针对传感器使用寿命16天,对电极需要的长度至少为:Without performing AgCl recharging, for the sensor service life of 16 days, the required length of the counter electrode is at least:
C 16day/C consume/day=20.8mC/1.3mg/day=16mm C 16day /C consume/day= 20.8mC/1.3mg/day=16mm
故在无使用本发明卤化银的回充方法的情况下,对电极的长度需超出16mm才能使传感器寿命达16天。Therefore, without using the silver halide recharging method of the present invention, the length of the counter electrode needs to exceed 16 mm in order to make the sensor life up to 16 days.
于本实施例中,在无使用本发明之卤化银的回充技术情况下,对电极信号感测段需配置相对应较大的Ag/AgCl材料尺寸才能达到16天的传感器寿命。通过本发明卤化银的回充方法,于两次测定步骤之间进行卤化银的回充步骤,该卤化银的消耗与回充可在短时间内重复循环(即用即充),故可缩减传感器中的Ag/AgCl材料用量,进而使传感器微型化,因此对电极信号感测段材料不须准备16天份的AgCl的容量以供消耗。例如,大约准备1~2天份AgCl的容量即可使用传感器达16天,由此达到延长传感器使用寿命之功效。1~2天份的AgCl的容量亦指于出厂前或执行第一次测定前的对电极所具有例如在约1.3~2.6mC之间的AgCl的初始量,该初始量亦可为其他更小或更大的范围。于其他实施例中亦可准备1~5天份、1~3天份、6~24小时、6~12小时等不同的AgCl容量。对电极信号感测段的材料尺寸只要具备让每次葡萄糖测定步骤皆能稳定执行、使测定电流能与体内的葡萄糖浓度呈现正相关性的容量即可。In this embodiment, without using the silver halide recharging technology of the present invention, the counter electrode signal sensing section needs to be equipped with a correspondingly larger Ag/AgCl material size to achieve the sensor life of 16 days. Through the silver halide recharging method of the present invention, the silver halide recharging step is performed between the two measurement steps. The consumption and recharging of the silver halide can be repeated in a short period of time (recharge when used), so it can be reduced The amount of Ag/AgCl material in the sensor further miniaturizes the sensor, so there is no need to prepare 16 days of AgCl capacity for the electrode signal sensing section material for consumption. For example, by preparing the capacity of AgCl for about 1 to 2 days, the sensor can be used for 16 days, thereby achieving the effect of extending the service life of the sensor. The capacity of AgCl for 1 to 2 days also refers to the initial amount of AgCl in the counter electrode before leaving the factory or before performing the first measurement, for example, between about 1.3 and 2.6 mC. The initial amount can also be other smaller Or a larger range. In other embodiments, different AgCl capacities may be prepared for 1 to 5 days, 1 to 3 days, 6 to 24 hours, and 6 to 12 hours. The material size of the signal sensing section of the counter electrode only needs to have the capacity to enable the stable execution of each glucose measurement step and the positive correlation between the measurement current and the glucose concentration in the body.
若在无使用本发明之氯化银的回充技术情况下,先前技术会通过增加电极长度/面积使传感器达到所需天数需求。以先前技术为例,传感器植入端长度约为12mm,因植入长度长,而为了避免植入深达皮下组织,需以斜角方式植入皮下,其植入伤口较大。另外举例来说,1~2天份的AgCl的容量约在1.3~2.6mC之间,换算该1~2天的对电极长度为2.5~5mm,其相较于无使用本发明卤化银的回充方法的情况下需要16mm的对电极长度,更加凸显本发明能有效缩减所需对电极尺寸。通过本发明卤化银的回充方法,可缩短植入端长度,例如使长度缩减为不大于10mm。于本发明图2A-2B所揭示的微型生物传感器100的连接区域117的下半部分至第二端114属于短植入端118(如图2A及2B所示),且短植入端118植入深度需至少满足到真皮层可测定到组织液葡萄糖的深度,通过本发明卤化银的回充方法,短植入端118的最长边不大于6mm,以使微型生物传感器100能以垂直于生物体表皮的方式被部分植入于生物体表皮下。短植入端118的最长边较佳为不大于5mm、4.5mm、3.5mm或2.5mm。本发明的短植入端118包含对电极的信号感测段132,其信号感测段132的最长边不大于6mm,较佳为2-6mm、2-5mm、2-4.5mm、2-3.5mm、0.5-2mm、0.2-1mm。If the silver chloride recharging technology of the present invention is not used, the prior art will increase the electrode length/area so that the sensor can meet the required number of days. Taking the prior art as an example, the length of the implanted end of the sensor is about 12mm. Because of the long implantation length, in order to avoid implanting deep into the subcutaneous tissue, it needs to be implanted under the skin at an oblique angle, and the implantation wound is relatively large. In addition, for example, the capacity of AgCl for 1 to 2 days is about 1.3 to 2.6 mC, and the length of the counter electrode for 1 to 2 days is 2.5 to 5 mm, which is compared with that without the silver halide of the present invention. In the case of the charging method, a length of the counter electrode of 16 mm is required, which further highlights that the present invention can effectively reduce the size of the required counter electrode. Through the silver halide refilling method of the present invention, the length of the implanted end can be shortened, for example, the length is reduced to no more than 10 mm. The lower half of the connecting area 117 to the second end 114 of the micro biosensor 100 disclosed in FIGS. 2A-2B of the present invention belong to the short implanted end 118 (as shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B), and the short implanted end 118 is implanted The penetration depth must at least meet the depth of the tissue fluid glucose that can be measured in the dermis. Through the silver halide refilling method of the present invention, the longest side of the short implant end 118 is not greater than 6 mm, so that the micro biosensor 100 can be perpendicular to the biological The method of the body surface is partially implanted under the surface of the living body. The longest side of the short implant end 118 is preferably no greater than 5 mm, 4.5 mm, 3.5 mm, or 2.5 mm. The short implant end 118 of the present invention includes the signal sensing section 132 of the counter electrode, and the longest side of the signal sensing section 132 is not greater than 6mm, preferably 2-6mm, 2-5mm, 2-4.5mm, 2- 3.5mm, 0.5-2mm, 0.2-1mm.
因此与未使用本发明之卤化银的回充技术情况比较下,通过本发明卤化银的回充方法,能有效延长传感器使用寿命、且能大幅缩减对电极上Ag/AgCl材料的使用,而使对电极信号感测段的尺寸可缩小。由于缩减对电极上Ag/AgCl材料的使用,而使传感器可微型化且可降低生物毒性。此外,电极尺寸缩小特别是指缩短传感器的植入端长度,因此可降低使用者植入痛感。Therefore, compared with the case where the silver halide recharging technology of the present invention is not used, the silver halide recharging method of the present invention can effectively extend the service life of the sensor, and can greatly reduce the use of Ag/AgCl material on the counter electrode, so that The size of the counter electrode signal sensing section can be reduced. As the use of Ag/AgCl materials on the electrode is reduced, the sensor can be miniaturized and biological toxicity can be reduced. In addition, the reduction of the electrode size particularly refers to shortening the length of the implanted end of the sensor, thus reducing the pain of implantation of the user.
实施例IIExample II
请参阅图13A及13B,其为本发明微型生物传感器的第一实施例的正面与背面示意图。本发明的微型生物传感器300包括基板310、设置于基板310上的工作电极320、对电极330与辅助电极340、以及包围工作电极320、对电极330与辅助电极340的化学试剂350(如图13C所示)。基板310的材质可选用任何已知适合使用于电极基板的材质且较佳具备可挠性及绝缘性质,例如但不限于:聚酯(Polyester)、聚酰亚胺(Polyimide)等高分子材质,前述高分子材质可以单独使用一种或者混合多种使用。基板310具有表面311(即第一表面)、与表面311相对的对侧表面312(即第二表面)、第一端313及第二端314,且基板310分为3个区域,分别为靠近第一端313的信号输出区域315、靠近第二端314的感测区域316、及位于信号输出区域315及感测区域316之间的连接区域317。工作电极320设置于基板310的表面311上,且从基板310的第一端313延伸至第二 端314,工作电极320包括位于基板310的信号输出区315的信号输出段321,及位于基板310的感测区316的信号感测段322。Please refer to FIGS. 13A and 13B, which are schematic diagrams of the front and back of the first embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention. The micro biosensor 300 of the present invention includes a substrate 310, a working electrode 320 disposed on the substrate 310, a counter electrode 330 and an auxiliary electrode 340, and a chemical reagent 350 surrounding the working electrode 320, the counter electrode 330 and the auxiliary electrode 340 (as shown in FIG. 13C Shown). The material of the substrate 310 can be any material that is known to be suitable for use in electrode substrates and preferably has flexibility and insulation properties, such as but not limited to polymer materials such as polyester and polyimide. The aforementioned polymer materials can be used singly or in combination of multiple types. The substrate 310 has a surface 311 (that is, the first surface), an opposite surface 312 (that is, the second surface) opposite to the surface 311, a first end 313 and a second end 314, and the substrate 310 is divided into 3 regions, which are respectively close to The signal output area 315 of the first end 313, the sensing area 316 close to the second end 314, and the connection area 317 between the signal output area 315 and the sensing area 316. The working electrode 320 is disposed on the surface 311 of the substrate 310 and extends from the first end 313 to the second end 314 of the substrate 310. The working electrode 320 includes a signal output section 321 located in the signal output area 315 of the substrate 310 and located on the substrate 310 The signal sensing section 322 of the sensing area 316.
对电极330与辅助电极340设置于基板310的对侧表面312,且从基板310的第一端313延伸至第二端314。对电极330包括位于基板310的感测区316的信号感测段332且辅助电极340包括位于基板310的感测区316的信号感测段342。微型生物传感器300的感测区316可以植入皮下使信号感测段322进行生物流体中待分析物所关联的生理信号的测定,生理信号会被传送至信号输出段321,再由信号输出段321传送至处理器210以得到生理参数。另该生理参数除了从传输单元200取得外,亦可经由无线/有线通信传送至用户装置20取得,常用的用户装置20例如智能型手机、生理信号接收器或血糖仪。The counter electrode 330 and the auxiliary electrode 340 are disposed on the opposite side surface 312 of the substrate 310 and extend from the first end 313 to the second end 314 of the substrate 310. The counter electrode 330 includes a signal sensing section 332 located in the sensing area 316 of the substrate 310 and the auxiliary electrode 340 includes a signal sensing section 342 located in the sensing area 316 of the substrate 310. The sensing area 316 of the micro biosensor 300 can be implanted subcutaneously so that the signal sensing section 322 measures the physiological signal associated with the analyte in the biological fluid. The physiological signal will be transmitted to the signal output section 321, and then the signal output section 321 is transmitted to the processor 210 to obtain physiological parameters. In addition to obtaining the physiological parameters from the transmission unit 200, the physiological parameters may also be transmitted to the user device 20 via wireless/wired communication, such as a smart phone, a physiological signal receiver, or a blood glucose meter.
对电极330表面的材料包含银(Silver)及卤化银(Silver Halide),其中卤化银较佳为氯化银(Silver Chloride)或碘化银(Silver Iodine),使该对电极330兼具参考电极的功能,即本发明的对电极330可以(1)与工作电极320形成电子回路,使工作电极320上电流畅通,以确保氧化反应在工作电极320上发生;以及(2)提供稳定的相对电位作为参考电位。因此,本发明的工作电极320与对电极330形成一个二电极系统。为了进一步降低成本以及提高本发明之生物传感器的生物兼容性,该银/卤化银更可与碳混合使用,例如将该银/卤化银混入碳胶,其卤化银含量只要让对电极330能稳定执行设定的测定动作即可。对电极330的部份的最外表面上还可以覆盖导电材料以防止卤化银解离(dissolution),进而保护对电极330,其中导电材料系选择不影响工作电极测定表现的导电材料为主,例如导电材料为碳(Carbon)。The material on the surface of the counter electrode 330 includes silver and silver halide, and the silver halide is preferably silver chloride (Silver Chloride) or silver iodide (Silver Iodine), so that the counter electrode 330 also functions as a reference electrode That is, the counter electrode 330 of the present invention can (1) form an electronic circuit with the working electrode 320, so that the working electrode 320 is smoothly connected to ensure that the oxidation reaction occurs on the working electrode 320; and (2) provide a stable relative potential as a reference Potential. Therefore, the working electrode 320 and the counter electrode 330 of the present invention form a two-electrode system. In order to further reduce the cost and improve the biocompatibility of the biosensor of the present invention, the silver/silver halide can be mixed with carbon. For example, the silver/silver halide is mixed with carbon glue, and the silver halide content only needs to make the counter electrode 330 stable. Just execute the set measurement action. The outermost surface of the counter electrode 330 can also be covered with a conductive material to prevent silver halide from dissolution, thereby protecting the counter electrode 330. The conductive material is mainly selected from conductive materials that do not affect the measurement performance of the working electrode, such as The conductive material is Carbon.
另一实施例中生物传感器不限于导线式或叠层式的电极结构。In another embodiment, the biosensor is not limited to a wire-type or stacked-type electrode structure.
在本发明的另一个实施例中,在准备将生物传感器运送出工厂出售之前,卤化银的初始量可以为零。在这种情况下,生物传感器的对电极330上没有卤化银。在将生物传感器皮下植入患者体内之后以及在进行首次测量之前的最开始回充期间中,经由氧化被涂布在对电极330上的银,可以在对电极330上回充初始量的卤化银。In another embodiment of the present invention, the initial amount of silver halide may be zero before the biosensor is ready to be shipped out of the factory for sale. In this case, there is no silver halide on the counter electrode 330 of the biosensor. After the biosensor is subcutaneously implanted in the patient and during the initial recharge period before the first measurement, the silver coated on the counter electrode 330 through oxidation can be recharged with the initial amount of silver halide on the counter electrode 330 .
辅助电极340,于回充步骤时,与对电极330形成电子回路,使对电极330上电流畅通,以确保氧化反应在对电极320上发生,其电极材料系选用与工作电极320同样材质或与工作电极320相比对于过氧化氢具有较低灵敏度之材料,例如碳。The auxiliary electrode 340 forms an electronic circuit with the counter electrode 330 during the recharging step, so that the counter electrode 330 is smoothly powered to ensure that the oxidation reaction occurs on the counter electrode 320. The electrode material is selected from the same material as the working electrode 320 or the same material as the working electrode 320 The working electrode 320 has a lower sensitivity to hydrogen peroxide than a material, such as carbon.
化学试剂350至少覆盖各电极的信号感测段322,332,342。另一实施例中,化学试剂350至少覆盖工作电极320的信号感测段322(图未示出)。也就是说,对电极330上可以不被化学试剂350覆盖。微型生物传感器300的感测区316可以植入皮下使工作电 极320的信号感测段322进行生物流体中待分析物所关联的生理信号的测定,生理信号会被传送至工作电极320的信号输出段321,再由信号输出段321传送至处理器210以得到生理参数。另该生理参数除了从传输单元200取得外,亦可经由无线/有线通信传送至用户装置20取得。The chemical reagent 350 covers at least the signal sensing sections 322, 332, and 342 of each electrode. In another embodiment, the chemical reagent 350 covers at least the signal sensing section 322 of the working electrode 320 (not shown in the figure). In other words, the counter electrode 330 may not be covered by the chemical reagent 350. The sensing area 316 of the micro biosensor 300 can be implanted subcutaneously so that the signal sensing section 322 of the working electrode 320 measures the physiological signal associated with the analyte in the biological fluid, and the physiological signal will be transmitted to the signal output of the working electrode 320 In section 321, the signal output section 321 transmits to the processor 210 to obtain physiological parameters. In addition to obtaining the physiological parameters from the transmission unit 200, the physiological parameters may also be transmitted to the user device 20 via wireless/wired communication for obtaining.
请参阅图13C,其为图13A中沿A-A’线的剖面示意图,其中A-A’线为从微型生物传感器300的感测区316的剖面线。在图13C中,工作电极320设置于基板310的表面311,对电极330及辅助电极340设置基板310的对侧表面312,且工作电极320、对电极330及辅助电极340的表面上覆盖化学试剂350。基本上化学试剂350至少覆盖于工作电极320的部分表面上。本发明的微型生物传感器300会在测定期间执行测定步骤,及在回充期间执行回充步骤。当执行测定步骤时,工作电极320的电压高于对电极330的电压,使电流从工作电极320往对电极330的方向流动,进而使工作电极320发生氧化反应(即工作电极320、化学试剂350及待分析物之间的电化学反应)而测定生理信号,对电极330发生还原反应,使对电极330中的卤化银(AgX)消耗而解离成银(Ag)及卤离子(X -)。由于对电极330中的卤化银被消耗,故需要回充对电极330中的卤化银以进行下一次的测定步骤。当执行回充步骤时,对电极330的电压高于辅助电极340的电压,使电流从对电极330往辅助电极340的方向流动,进而使对电极330发生氧化反应使银与生物体内的卤离子或结合而回充卤化银,详细测定步骤与回充步骤见图11说明。 Please refer to FIG. 13C, which is a schematic cross-sectional view along the line AA' in FIG. In FIG. 13C, the working electrode 320 is disposed on the surface 311 of the substrate 310, the counter electrode 330 and the auxiliary electrode 340 are disposed on the opposite surface 312 of the substrate 310, and the surfaces of the working electrode 320, the counter electrode 330 and the auxiliary electrode 340 are covered with chemical reagents. 350. Basically, the chemical reagent 350 covers at least a part of the surface of the working electrode 320. The micro biosensor 300 of the present invention performs the measurement step during the measurement period, and performs the refill step during the refill period. When the measurement step is performed, the voltage of the working electrode 320 is higher than the voltage of the counter electrode 330, causing the current to flow from the working electrode 320 to the direction of the counter electrode 330, thereby causing the working electrode 320 to undergo an oxidation reaction (that is, the working electrode 320, the chemical reagent 350 and an electrochemical reaction between the analyte) is measured physiological signals, reduction reaction of the electrode 330, the counter electrode 330 so that the silver halide (AgX) consumption dissociate into silver (Ag) and a halide ion (X -) . Since the silver halide in the counter electrode 330 is consumed, the silver halide in the counter electrode 330 needs to be recharged to perform the next measurement step. When the recharging step is performed, the voltage of the counter electrode 330 is higher than the voltage of the auxiliary electrode 340, so that the current flows from the counter electrode 330 to the direction of the auxiliary electrode 340, and the counter electrode 330 is oxidized to cause the silver to react with the halide ions in the living body. Or combined and refilled with silver halide, the detailed measurement steps and refilling steps are shown in Figure 11.
请参阅图14A,其为本发明的微型生物传感器的第二实施例的剖面示意图。在图14A中,本发明的工作电极320及辅助电极340可以设置于基板310的表面311上,对电极330设置于基板310的对侧表面312上,且工作电极320、对电极330及辅助电极340的表面上覆盖化学试剂350。在此实施例中,当执行测定步骤时,电流从工作电极320往对电极330的方向流动,进而使工作电极320发生氧化反应而测定生理信号,对电极330中的卤化银被消耗而解离成银(Ag)及卤离子(X -)。当执行回充步骤时,电流从对电极330往辅助电极340的方向流动,进而使对电极330发生氧化反应使银与卤离子结合而回充卤化银。 Please refer to FIG. 14A, which is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention. In FIG. 14A, the working electrode 320 and the auxiliary electrode 340 of the present invention may be disposed on the surface 311 of the substrate 310, the counter electrode 330 is disposed on the opposite surface 312 of the substrate 310, and the working electrode 320, the counter electrode 330 and the auxiliary electrode The surface of 340 is covered with a chemical reagent 350. In this embodiment, when the measurement step is performed, the current flows from the working electrode 320 to the counter electrode 330, and the working electrode 320 is oxidized to measure the physiological signal. The silver halide in the counter electrode 330 is consumed and dissociated. to silver (Ag) and a halide ion (X -). When the recharging step is performed, current flows from the counter electrode 330 to the auxiliary electrode 340, so that the counter electrode 330 undergoes an oxidation reaction to combine silver with halide ions to recharge the silver halide.
请参阅图14B,其为本发明的微型生物传感器的第三实施例的剖面示意图。在此实施例中,本发明的微型生物传感器300可以有两个工作电极,分别为第一工作电极323及第二工作电极324,第二工作电极324取代辅助电极。在图14B中,第一工作电极323及第二工作电极324设置于基板310的表面311,对电极330设置基板310的对侧表面312,且第一工作电极323、第二工作电极324及对电极330的表面上覆盖化学试剂350。 在测定步骤时,可以选择第一工作电极323或第二工作电极324来测定生理信号,且在回充步骤时,由第一工作电极323或第二工作电极324帮助对电极330回充卤化银。因此,在此实施例中,当执行测定步骤时,电流从第一工作电极323或第二工作电极324往对电极330的方向流动,进而使第一工作电极323或第二工作电极324发生氧化反应而测定生理信号,对电极330中的卤化银被消耗而解离成银(Ag)及卤离子(X -)。当执行回充步骤时,电流从对电极330往第一工作电极323或第二工作电极324的方向流动,进而使对电极330发生氧化反应使银与卤离子结合而回充卤化银。 Please refer to FIG. 14B, which is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention. In this embodiment, the micro biosensor 300 of the present invention may have two working electrodes, which are a first working electrode 323 and a second working electrode 324, respectively, and the second working electrode 324 replaces the auxiliary electrode. In FIG. 14B, the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode 324 are provided on the surface 311 of the substrate 310, the counter electrode 330 is provided on the opposite side surface 312 of the substrate 310, and the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324 and the opposite The surface of the electrode 330 is covered with a chemical reagent 350. In the measuring step, the first working electrode 323 or the second working electrode 324 can be selected to measure physiological signals, and in the recharging step, the first working electrode 323 or the second working electrode 324 helps to recharge the electrode 330 with silver halide . Therefore, in this embodiment, when the measurement step is performed, the current flows from the first working electrode 323 or the second working electrode 324 to the counter electrode 330, so that the first working electrode 323 or the second working electrode 324 is oxidized. The physiological signal is measured in response, and the silver halide in the counter electrode 330 is consumed and dissociated into silver (Ag) and halide ions (X ). When the recharging step is performed, current flows from the counter electrode 330 to the first working electrode 323 or the second working electrode 324, so that the counter electrode 330 undergoes an oxidation reaction to combine silver with halide ions to recharge the silver halide.
请参阅图14C,其为本发明的微型生物传感器的第四实施例的剖面示意图。在此实施例中,本发明的微型生物传感器300可以有两个工作电极,分别为第一工作电极323及第二工作电极324,第二工作电极324取代辅助电极。在图14C中,第一工作电极323设置于基板310的表面311,对电极330及第二工作电极324设置基板310的对侧表面312,且第一工作电极323、第二工作电极324及对电极330的表面上覆盖化学试剂350。在此实施例中,第一工作电极323的面积可以增加以作为测定的电极,第二工作电极324的面积可以降低以作为回充的电极,故在测定步骤时,以第一工作电极323来测定生理信号,且在回充步骤时,由第二工作电极324帮助对电极330回充卤化银。因此,在此实施例中,当执行测定步骤时,电流从第一工作电极323往对电极330的方向流动,进而使第一工作电极323发生氧化反应而测定生理信号,对电极330中的卤化银被消耗而解离成银(Ag)及卤离子(X -)。当执行回充步骤时,电流从对电极330往第二工作电极324的方向流动,进而使对电极330发生氧化反应使银与卤离子结合而回充卤化银。 Please refer to FIG. 14C, which is a schematic cross-sectional view of the fourth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention. In this embodiment, the micro biosensor 300 of the present invention may have two working electrodes, which are a first working electrode 323 and a second working electrode 324, respectively, and the second working electrode 324 replaces the auxiliary electrode. In FIG. 14C, the first working electrode 323 is provided on the surface 311 of the substrate 310, the counter electrode 330 and the second working electrode 324 are provided on the opposite side surface 312 of the substrate 310, and the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324 and the opposite side The surface of the electrode 330 is covered with a chemical reagent 350. In this embodiment, the area of the first working electrode 323 can be increased as the electrode for measurement, and the area of the second working electrode 324 can be reduced as the electrode for recharging. Therefore, in the measurement step, the first working electrode 323 is used as the electrode. The physiological signal is measured, and during the recharging step, the second working electrode 324 helps the electrode 330 to recharge the silver halide. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the measurement step is performed, the current flows from the first working electrode 323 to the counter electrode 330, so that the first working electrode 323 undergoes an oxidation reaction to measure physiological signals, and the halogenation in the counter electrode 330 silver is dissociated into silver (Ag) and a halide ion (X -) solution consumption. When the recharging step is performed, current flows from the counter electrode 330 to the second working electrode 324, so that the counter electrode 330 undergoes an oxidation reaction to combine silver with halide ions to recharge the silver halide.
请参阅图14D,其为本发明的微型生物传感器的第五实施例的剖面示意图。第五实施例为第一实施例多了一个工作电极,即在第五实施例中,本发明的微型生物传感器300有两个工作电极,分别为第一工作电极323及第二工作电极324,一个对电极330及一个辅助电极340。在图14D中,第一工作电极323及第二工作电极324设置于基板310的表面311,对电极330及辅助电极340设置基板310的对侧表面312,且第一工作电极323、第二工作电极324、对电极330及辅助电极340的表面上覆盖化学试剂350。在测定步骤时,可以选择第一工作电极323或第二工作电极324来测定生理信号,且在回充步骤时,由辅助电极340帮助对电极330回充卤化银。因此,在此实施例中,当执行测定步骤时,电流从第一工作电极323或第二工作电极324往对电极330的方向流动,进而使第一工作电极323或第二工作电极324发生氧化反应而测定生理信号,对电极330中 的卤化银被消耗而解离成银(Ag)及卤离子(X -)。当执行回充步骤时,电流从对电极330往辅助电极340的方向流动,进而使对电极330发生氧化反应使银与卤离子结合而回充卤化银。 Please refer to FIG. 14D, which is a schematic cross-sectional view of the fifth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention. The fifth embodiment is the first embodiment with one more working electrode. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the micro biosensor 300 of the present invention has two working electrodes, the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode 324, respectively. One counter electrode 330 and one auxiliary electrode 340. In FIG. 14D, the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode 324 are disposed on the surface 311 of the substrate 310, the counter electrode 330 and the auxiliary electrode 340 are disposed on the opposite surface 312 of the substrate 310, and the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode The surface of the electrode 324, the counter electrode 330, and the auxiliary electrode 340 are covered with a chemical reagent 350. In the measuring step, the first working electrode 323 or the second working electrode 324 can be selected to measure the physiological signal, and in the recharging step, the auxiliary electrode 340 helps the electrode 330 to be recharged with silver halide. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the measurement step is performed, the current flows from the first working electrode 323 or the second working electrode 324 to the counter electrode 330, so that the first working electrode 323 or the second working electrode 324 is oxidized. The physiological signal is measured in response, and the silver halide in the counter electrode 330 is consumed and dissociated into silver (Ag) and halide ions (X ). When the recharging step is performed, current flows from the counter electrode 330 to the auxiliary electrode 340, so that the counter electrode 330 undergoes an oxidation reaction to combine silver with halide ions to recharge the silver halide.
请参阅图14E,其为本发明的微型生物传感器的第六实施例的剖面示意图。在此实施例中,本发明的微型生物传感器300可以有三个工作电极,分别为第一工作电极323、第二工作电极324及第三工作电极325,第三工作电极325取代辅助电极。在图14E中,第一工作电极323及第二工作电极324设置于基板310的表面311,对电极330及第三工作电极325设置基板310的对侧表面312,且第一工作电极323、第二工作电极324、第三工作电极325及对电极330的表面上覆盖化学试剂350。在测定步骤时,可以选择第一工作电极323、第二工作电极324或第三工作电极325来测定生理信号,且在回充步骤时,亦可以选择第一工作电极323、第二工作电极324或第三工作电极325帮助对电极330回充卤化银。因此,在此实施例中,当执行测定步骤时,电流从第一工作电极323、第二工作电极324或第三工作电极325往对电极330的方向流动,进而使第一工作电极323、第二工作电极324或第三工作电极325发生氧化反应而测定生理信号,对电极330中的卤化银被消耗而解离成银(Ag)及卤离子(X -)。当执行回充步骤时,电流从对电极330往第一工作电极323、第二工作电极324或第三工作电极325的方向流动,进而使对电极330发生氧化反应使银与卤离子结合而回充卤化银。 Please refer to FIG. 14E, which is a schematic cross-sectional view of the sixth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention. In this embodiment, the micro biosensor 300 of the present invention may have three working electrodes, which are a first working electrode 323, a second working electrode 324, and a third working electrode 325, and the third working electrode 325 replaces the auxiliary electrode. In FIG. 14E, the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode 324 are provided on the surface 311 of the substrate 310, the counter electrode 330 and the third working electrode 325 are provided on the opposite side surface 312 of the substrate 310, and the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode The surfaces of the second working electrode 324, the third working electrode 325, and the counter electrode 330 are covered with a chemical reagent 350. In the measurement step, the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324, or the third working electrode 325 can be selected to measure physiological signals, and in the recharging step, the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode 324 can also be selected. Or the third working electrode 325 helps to recharge the electrode 330 with silver halide. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the measurement step is performed, the current flows from the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324, or the third working electrode 325 to the counter electrode 330, so that the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode The second working electrode 324 or the third working electrode 325 undergoes an oxidation reaction to measure physiological signals, and the silver halide in the counter electrode 330 is consumed and dissociated into silver (Ag) and halide ions (X ). When the recharging step is performed, the current flows from the counter electrode 330 to the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324, or the third working electrode 325, so that the counter electrode 330 undergoes an oxidation reaction and the silver and halide ions are combined and returned. Filled with silver halide.
请参阅图14F,其为本发明的微型生物传感器的第七实施例的剖面示意图。第七实施例是第六实施例的电极配置的变化。在此实施例中,如图14F图所示,第一工作电极323、第二工作电极324及第三工作电极325皆设置于基板310的表面311,对电极330设置基板310的对侧表面312,且第一工作电极323、第二工作电极324、第三工作电极325及对电极330的表面上覆盖化学试剂350。在测定步骤时,可以选择第一工作电极323、第二工作电极324或第三工作电极325来测定生理信号,且在回充步骤时,亦可以选择第一工作电极323、第二工作电极324或第三工作电极325帮助对电极330回充卤化银。因此,在此实施例中,当执行测定步骤时,电流从第一工作电极323、第二工作电极324或第三工作电极325往对电极330的方向流动,进而使第一工作电极323、第二工作电极324或第三工作电极325发生氧化反应而测定生理信号,对电极330中的卤化银被消耗而解离成银(Ag)及卤离子(X -)。当执行回充步骤时,电流从对电极330往第一工作电极323、第二工作电极324或第三工作电极325的方向流动,进而使对电极330发生氧化反应使银与卤离子结合而回充卤化银。 Please refer to FIG. 14F, which is a schematic cross-sectional view of the seventh embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention. The seventh embodiment is a variation of the electrode configuration of the sixth embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14F, the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324, and the third working electrode 325 are all disposed on the surface 311 of the substrate 310, and the counter electrode 330 is disposed on the opposite surface 312 of the substrate 310. , And the surfaces of the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324, the third working electrode 325, and the counter electrode 330 are covered with a chemical reagent 350. In the measurement step, the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324, or the third working electrode 325 can be selected to measure physiological signals, and in the recharging step, the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode 324 can also be selected. Or the third working electrode 325 helps to recharge the electrode 330 with silver halide. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the measurement step is performed, the current flows from the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324, or the third working electrode 325 to the counter electrode 330, so that the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode The second working electrode 324 or the third working electrode 325 undergoes an oxidation reaction to measure physiological signals, and the silver halide in the counter electrode 330 is consumed and dissociated into silver (Ag) and halide ions (X ). When the recharging step is performed, the current flows from the counter electrode 330 to the first working electrode 323, the second working electrode 324, or the third working electrode 325, so that the counter electrode 330 undergoes an oxidation reaction and the silver and halide ions are combined and returned. Filled with silver halide.
请参阅图14G,其为本发明的微型生物传感器的第八实施例的剖面示意图。相较于图14D差别在于第二工作电极324为U型,在此第八实施例中,第一工作电极323及第二工作电极324配置于基板310的表面311上,第二工作电极324邻设并围绕于第一工作电极323的侧边,对电极330与辅助电极340设置于基板310的对侧表面312上。在此实施例中,当执行测定步骤时,电流从第一工作电极323往对电极330的方向流动,进而使第一工作电极323发生氧化反应而测定生理信号,对电极330中的卤化银被消耗而解离成银(Ag)及卤离子(X -)。当执行回充步骤时,电流从对电极330往辅助电极340或第二工作电极324的方向流动,进而使对电极330发生氧化反应使银与卤离子结合而回充卤化银。 Please refer to FIG. 14G, which is a schematic cross-sectional view of the eighth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention. Compared with FIG. 14D, the difference is that the second working electrode 324 is U-shaped. In this eighth embodiment, the first working electrode 323 and the second working electrode 324 are disposed on the surface 311 of the substrate 310, and the second working electrode 324 is adjacent to The counter electrode 330 and the auxiliary electrode 340 are disposed on the opposite side surface 312 of the substrate 310 and are arranged around the side of the first working electrode 323. In this embodiment, when the measurement step is performed, the current flows from the first working electrode 323 to the counter electrode 330, so that the first working electrode 323 undergoes an oxidation reaction to measure physiological signals, and the silver halide in the counter electrode 330 is consumed dissociate into silver (Ag) and a halide ion (X -). When the recharging step is performed, current flows from the counter electrode 330 to the auxiliary electrode 340 or the second working electrode 324, so that the counter electrode 330 undergoes an oxidation reaction to combine silver with halide ions to recharge the silver halide.
以上图14C-14G其详细电极叠层省略,仅示意电极位置。The detailed electrode stacks of Figures 14C-14G above are omitted, and only the electrode positions are shown.
在上述任一实施例中,本发明的基板310为绝缘体。本发明的工作电极320及第一工作电极323的电极材料包含但不限于:碳、铂、铝、镓、金、铟、铱、铁、铅、镁、镍、锰、钼、锇、钯、铑、银、锡、钛、锌、硅、锆、前述元素的混合物、或前述元素的衍生物(如合金、氧化物或金属化合物等),较佳地,工作电极320及第一工作电极323的材料为贵金属、贵金属之衍生物或前述的组合。更佳地,工作电极320及第一工作电极323为含铂材料。第二工作电极324及第三工作电极325同样可使用如上述工作电极320及第一工作电极323所例举的元素或其衍生物。另一实施例中,第二工作电极324及第三工作电极325的电极材料选用与第一工作电极323相比对于过氧化氢具有较低灵敏度之材料,例如碳。In any of the above embodiments, the substrate 310 of the present invention is an insulator. The electrode materials of the working electrode 320 and the first working electrode 323 of the present invention include but are not limited to: carbon, platinum, aluminum, gallium, gold, indium, iridium, iron, lead, magnesium, nickel, manganese, molybdenum, osmium, palladium, Rhodium, silver, tin, titanium, zinc, silicon, zirconium, mixtures of the foregoing elements, or derivatives of the foregoing elements (such as alloys, oxides or metal compounds, etc.), preferably, the working electrode 320 and the first working electrode 323 The material is precious metal, precious metal derivative or a combination of the foregoing. More preferably, the working electrode 320 and the first working electrode 323 are made of platinum-containing materials. The second working electrode 324 and the third working electrode 325 can also use the elements or their derivatives as exemplified in the above-mentioned working electrode 320 and the first working electrode 323. In another embodiment, the electrode materials of the second working electrode 324 and the third working electrode 325 are selected from materials having a lower sensitivity to hydrogen peroxide than the first working electrode 323, such as carbon.
由于本发明的对电极330的电极材料包括银及卤化银(Ag/AgX),因此同时具有公知中对电极及参考电极的功能,即本发明的对电极330可以(1)与工作电极320形成电子回路,使工作电极320上电流畅通,以确保电化学反应在工作电极320上发生;(2)与辅助电极340形成电子回路,使对电极330上电流畅通,以确氧化反应在对电极330上发生;以及(3)提供稳定的相对电位作为参考电位。因此,本发明的工作电极320、对电极330与辅助电极340形成一个有别于传统的三电极系统。Since the electrode material of the counter electrode 330 of the present invention includes silver and silver halide (Ag/AgX), it has the functions of a well-known counter electrode and a reference electrode at the same time, that is, the counter electrode 330 of the present invention can be (1) formed with the working electrode 320 The electronic circuit enables the working electrode 320 to be energized smoothly to ensure that the electrochemical reaction occurs on the working electrode 320; (2) to form an electronic circuit with the auxiliary electrode 340 to make the counter electrode 330 to be energized smoothly to ensure that the oxidation reaction occurs on the counter electrode 330 And (3) provide a stable relative potential as a reference potential. Therefore, the working electrode 320, the counter electrode 330 and the auxiliary electrode 340 of the present invention form a three-electrode system which is different from the traditional three-electrode system.
当本发明的辅助电极340的电极材料为表面覆盖铂时,辅助电极340亦可作为测定生理信号的电极。When the electrode material of the auxiliary electrode 340 of the present invention is covered with platinum, the auxiliary electrode 340 can also be used as an electrode for measuring physiological signals.
在上述任一实施例中,为了防止银电极材料的过度氯化而发生断线,还可以在基板310的对侧表面312与对电极330的银之间添加一层导电材料(如碳)。然而,若对电极330的底层是碳会造成开关处的阻值过高,故还可在碳导电材料跟基板310的对侧 表面312之间再增设一层导电层,例如为银以降低信号输出端的阻抗,使本发明的对电极330从基板310的对侧表面312开始依序为导电层、碳层及银/卤化银层。In any of the above embodiments, in order to prevent the silver electrode material from being broken due to excessive chlorination, a layer of conductive material (such as carbon) may be added between the opposite surface 312 of the substrate 310 and the silver of the opposite electrode 330. However, if the bottom layer of the counter electrode 330 is carbon, the resistance at the switch will be too high. Therefore, a conductive layer, such as silver, can be added between the carbon conductive material and the opposite surface 312 of the substrate 310 to reduce the signal. The impedance of the output end makes the counter electrode 330 of the present invention form a conductive layer, a carbon layer, and a silver/silver halide layer in order from the opposite surface 312 of the substrate 310.
定电压电压施加应用Constant voltage voltage application
请参考图15A-15B和7A-7D,其中图15A和图15B分别示出本发明中处于测定模式和回充模式的定电压电路,图7A-7D分别示出该定电压电路以不同方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的电流示意图。测定模式可分别藉由施加测定电位差Vl和移除测定电位差Vl而开始和停止,而对应的电流以Ia表示。在测定模式时,于测定期间Tl施加测定电位差Vl于工作电极W与对电极R/C之间,使工作电极W的电压高于对电极R/C的电压。如图15A所示,此时开关S1和S4为闭路状态,而开关S2和S3为开路状态,工作电极W为+Vl,对电极R/C为接地,辅助电极Aux为开路状态,以使工作电极W进行氧化反应,并与化学试剂和待分析物进行电化学反应而输出生理信号Ia,同时对电极R/C的AgCl具有对应于该生理信号Ia的消耗量。如图7A-7D所示,在多个测定期间Tl之间的是未进行测定的期间T2。在某些较佳实施例中,T2为固定值。Please refer to Figures 15A-15B and 7A-7D. Figures 15A and 15B respectively show the constant voltage circuit in the measurement mode and the recharge mode of the present invention. Figures 7A-7D show the constant voltage circuit alternately in different ways. Schematic diagram of current in measurement mode and recharge mode. The measurement mode can be started and stopped by applying the measurement potential difference V1 and removing the measurement potential difference V1, respectively, and the corresponding current is represented by Ia. In the measurement mode, the measurement potential difference V1 is applied between the working electrode W and the counter electrode R/C during the measurement period T1, so that the voltage of the working electrode W is higher than the voltage of the counter electrode R/C. As shown in Figure 15A, the switches S1 and S4 are in the closed state at this time, while the switches S2 and S3 are in the open state, the working electrode W is +Vl, the counter electrode R/C is grounded, and the auxiliary electrode Aux is in an open state to make the work The electrode W undergoes an oxidation reaction, and electrochemically reacts with the chemical reagent and the analyte to output a physiological signal Ia, and at the same time, the AgCl of the electrode R/C has a consumption amount corresponding to the physiological signal Ia. As shown in FIGS. 7A-7D, between the plurality of measurement periods T1 is a period T2 during which no measurement is performed. In some preferred embodiments, T2 is a fixed value.
回充模式可分别藉由施加回充电位差V2和移除回充电位差V2而开始和停止,而对应的电流以Ib表示。V2为0.1V至0.8V之间的固定值,较佳为0.2V至0.5V之间的固定值。在回充模式时,施加回充电位差V2于对电极R/C与辅助电极Aux之间持续回充期间t2(t2介于0至T2之间),使对电极R/C的电压高于辅助电极Aux的电压。如图15B所示,此时开关S1和S4为开路状态,而开关S2和S3为闭路状态,工作电极W为开路状态,对电极R/C为+V2,辅助电极Aux接地,以使对电极R/C上的Ag进行氧化反应,而回充对电极R/C上的AgCl达一回充量。在定电压电路中的回充电位差V2为固定电压,测得的输出电流为Ib。本发明是通过计算电流曲线下的面积以定义AgCl的容量(Capacity,单位库伦,以符号"C"表示),故测定模式中AgCl的消耗量为Ia*Tl,回充模式中AgCl的回充量为Ib*t2。因此,可经由调控回充电位差V2的施加时间t2来控制AgCl的回充量。换言之,在对电极R/C上的AgCl保持在安全库存量之内的前提下,可使回充量等于或不等于(包含约略相近、大于或小于)消耗量。The recharging mode can be started and stopped by applying the recharging gap V2 and removing the recharging gap V2 respectively, and the corresponding current is represented by Ib. V2 is a fixed value between 0.1V and 0.8V, preferably a fixed value between 0.2V and 0.5V. In the recharge mode, apply the recharge potential V2 between the counter electrode R/C and the auxiliary electrode Aux for the recharge period t2 (t2 is between 0 and T2), so that the voltage of the counter electrode R/C is higher than The voltage of the auxiliary electrode Aux. As shown in Figure 15B, the switches S1 and S4 are in an open state at this time, while the switches S2 and S3 are in a closed state, the working electrode W is in an open state, the counter electrode R/C is +V2, and the auxiliary electrode Aux is grounded to make the counter electrode The Ag on the R/C undergoes an oxidation reaction, and the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C is recharged to a recharge. The recharge potential V2 in the constant voltage circuit is a fixed voltage, and the measured output current is Ib. The present invention defines the capacity of AgCl by calculating the area under the current curve (Capacity, unit coulomb, represented by the symbol "C"), so the consumption of AgCl in the measurement mode is Ia*Tl, and the recharge of AgCl in the recharge mode The amount is Ib*t2. Therefore, the recharge amount of AgCl can be controlled by regulating the application time t2 of the recharge potential V2. In other words, on the premise that the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C is kept within the safety inventory, the recharge amount can be made equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) the consumption.
图7A-7D中横轴为时间,V1的线条表示测定电位差V1的施加和移除,V2的线条表示回充电位差V2的施加和移除。请参考图7A,在一较佳实施例中,V2和T2都是固定值,V2的施加时间t2(即回充期间)是变动值。回充期间t2是根据在测定模式所测得的生理信号Ia及测定期间T1而在0至T2之间动态调整。如图7A中所示,t2可为t2’、t2’’、或t2’’’…。换言之,回充期间t2可根据AgCl的消耗量而改变,若AgCl的消耗量 大,则可回充较长的时间以使对电极R/C上的AgCl保持在安全库存量之内。举例而言,在t2’’期间所回充的AgCl的量将大于t2’期间所回充的AgCl量。The horizontal axis in FIGS. 7A-7D represents time, the line of V1 represents the application and removal of the measured potential difference V1, and the line of V2 represents the application and removal of the recharge potential difference V2. Please refer to FIG. 7A. In a preferred embodiment, V2 and T2 are both fixed values, and the application time t2 of V2 (that is, the recharging period) is a variable value. The recharge period t2 is dynamically adjusted from 0 to T2 based on the physiological signal Ia measured in the measurement mode and the measurement period T1. As shown in FIG. 7A, t2 can be t2', t2', or t2''.... In other words, the recharge period t2 can be changed according to the consumption of AgCl. If the consumption of AgCl is large, it can be recharged for a longer time to keep the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C within the safe inventory. For example, the amount of AgCl recharged during t2'' will be greater than the amount of AgCl recharged during t2'.
请参考图7B,在另一较佳实施例中,V2、T2和t2都是固定值,其中t2=T2。也就是说,测定模式和回充模式是无缝交替的,在未进行测定的期间即为回充期间。请参考图7C和7D,在某些较佳实施例中,V2、T2和t2都是固定值,其中t2为大于0且小于T2的固定值,例如t2=1/2的T2、2/5的T2、3/5的T2等。图7C和7D的差别在于,图7C中是在每次测定模式结束后,经历一段缓冲时间(缓冲时间=T2-t2),才开始回充模式;图7D中是每次测定模式结束后未经缓冲时间即立即开始回充模式,而在每次回充模式结束与下一次测定模式开始之间间隔一段时间。在某些较佳实施例中,t2小于T2,且t2可为T2期间的任何时间段。Please refer to FIG. 7B. In another preferred embodiment, V2, T2, and t2 are all fixed values, where t2=T2. In other words, the measurement mode and the recharge mode are seamlessly alternated, and the period during which no measurement is performed is the recharge period. Please refer to Figures 7C and 7D. In some preferred embodiments, V2, T2, and t2 are all fixed values, where t2 is a fixed value greater than 0 and less than T2, such as T2 = 1/2 of T2, 2/5 T2, 3/5 T2, etc. The difference between Fig. 7C and Fig. 7D is that in Fig. 7C, after each measurement mode is over, after a period of buffering time (buffer time=T2-t2), the recharge mode starts; The recharge mode starts immediately after the buffer time, and there is a period of time between the end of each recharge mode and the start of the next measurement mode. In some preferred embodiments, t2 is less than T2, and t2 can be any time period during T2.
请参考图7E和7F,其示出本发明的定电压电路以不同方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的电流示意图。图7E和7F中,横轴为时间,纵轴为电流,曲线表示所测定到的生理信号Ia换算而成的生理参数值曲线。在这两个实施例中,类似于75A,V2和T2为固定值,回充期间t2是变动值。图7E和7F中,曲线下白色面积代表测定模式中AgCl的消耗量(Ia*Tl),斜线面积代表回充模式中AgCl的回充量(Ib*t2)。由图中可看出,为了使Ib*t2接近Ia*Tl或在Ia*Tl的某个范围内,回充期间t2是根据所测得的生理信号Ia及测定期间T1而在0至T2之间动态调整。根据需要,可选择在未执行测定模式的期间(T2)的前段(如图7E所示)或后段(如图7F所示)进行回充模式。Please refer to FIGS. 7E and 7F, which show the current schematic diagrams of the constant voltage circuit of the present invention alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode in different ways. In FIGS. 7E and 7F, the horizontal axis is time and the vertical axis is current, and the curve represents the physiological parameter value curve converted from the measured physiological signal Ia. In these two embodiments, similar to 75A, V2 and T2 are fixed values, and t2 during recharging is a variable value. In Figures 7E and 7F, the white area under the curve represents the AgCl consumption in the measurement mode (Ia*Tl), and the oblique area represents the AgCl recharge in the recharge mode (Ib*t2). It can be seen from the figure that in order to make Ib*t2 close to Ia*Tl or within a certain range of Ia*Tl, the recharge period t2 is based on the measured physiological signal Ia and the measurement period T1 and is set between 0 and T2. Dynamic adjustment between time. According to needs, the recharging mode can be selected in the front part (as shown in FIG. 7E) or the back part (as shown in FIG. 7F) of the period (T2) in which the measurement mode is not performed.
有段切换的定电流电压施加应用Constant current and voltage application with segment switching
请参考图8A-8B和图10A-10C,其中图8A和图8B分别示出本发明中处于测定模式和回充模式的有段切换的定电流电路,图10A-10C示出本发明的定电流电路以不同方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的三种电压示意图。测定模式可分别藉由施加测定电位差Vl和移除测定电位差Vl而开始和停止,而对应的电流以Ia表示。在测定模式时,施加测定电位差Vl于工作电极W与对电极R/C之间持续测定期间T1。如图8A所示,此时开关S1和S4为闭路状态,而其他开关都为开路状态,工作电极W为+V1,对电极R/C为接地,辅助电极Aux为开路状态,以使工作电极W进行氧化反应,并与化学试剂和待分析物进行电化学反应而输出生理信号Ia,同时对电极R/C的AgCl具有对应于该生理信号Ia的消耗量。如图10A-10C所示,在多个测定期间Tl之间的是未进行测定的期间T2。在某些较佳实施例中,T2为固定值。Please refer to Figures 8A-8B and Figures 10A-10C, where Figures 8A and 8B respectively show the constant current circuit in the measurement mode and the recharge mode of the present invention, and Figures 10A-10C show the constant current circuit of the present invention. The current circuit alternately performs three voltage schematic diagrams of measurement mode and recharge mode in different ways. The measurement mode can be started and stopped by applying the measurement potential difference V1 and removing the measurement potential difference V1, respectively, and the corresponding current is represented by Ia. In the measurement mode, the measurement potential difference V1 is applied between the working electrode W and the counter electrode R/C for the measurement period T1. As shown in Figure 8A, the switches S1 and S4 are in the closed state at this time, and the other switches are in the open state, the working electrode W is +V1, the counter electrode R/C is grounded, and the auxiliary electrode Aux is in the open state, so that the working electrode W undergoes an oxidation reaction, and electrochemically reacts with the chemical reagent and the analyte to output a physiological signal Ia, and at the same time, the AgCl of the counter electrode R/C has a consumption amount corresponding to the physiological signal Ia. As shown in FIGS. 10A-10C, between the plurality of measurement periods T1 is a period T2 during which no measurement is performed. In some preferred embodiments, T2 is a fixed value.
回充模式可分别藉由施加回充电位差V2(V2为变动值)和移除回充电位差V2而 开始和停止,而对应的电流以Ib表示。在回充模式时,施加回充电位差V2于辅助电极Aux与对电极R/C之间持续回充期间t2(t2介于0至T2之间)。如图8B所示,此时开关S1和S4为开路状态,S2和I_F1至I_Fn所对应的至少一个开关为闭路状态(图中示例性地示出I_F1和I_F3对应的开关为闭路状态),工作电极W为开路状态,辅助电极Aux为接地,对电极R/C为+V2,以使对电极R/C上的Ag进行氧化反应,进而回充AgCl。在回充模式时,可根据该生理信号Ia的大小及测定期间T1,而选择切换I_F1至I_Fn所对应的至少一个开关以输出固定电流Ib,并经由调控电位差V2的施加时间t2来控制AgCl的回充量。换言之,在对电极R/C上的AgCl保持在安全库存量之内的前提下,可使回充量等于或不等于(包含约略相近、大于或小于)消耗量。The recharging mode can be started and stopped by applying the recharging gap V2 (V2 is a variable value) and removing the recharging gap V2, and the corresponding current is represented by Ib. In the recharging mode, the recharging level difference V2 is applied between the auxiliary electrode Aux and the counter electrode R/C for the recharging period t2 (t2 is between 0 and T2). As shown in Figure 8B, at this time, switches S1 and S4 are in an open state, and at least one switch corresponding to S2 and I_F1 to I_Fn is in a closed state (the figure exemplarily shows that the switches corresponding to I_F1 and I_F3 are in a closed state), and work The electrode W is in an open state, the auxiliary electrode Aux is grounded, and the counter electrode R/C is +V2, so that the Ag on the counter electrode R/C is oxidized, and then AgCl is recharged. In the recharge mode, according to the magnitude of the physiological signal Ia and the measurement period T1, at least one switch corresponding to I_F1 to I_Fn can be selected to output a fixed current Ib, and the AgCl can be controlled by regulating the application time t2 of the potential difference V2 The amount of recharge. In other words, on the premise that the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C is kept within the safety inventory, the recharge amount can be made equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) the consumption.
无段切换的定电流电压施加应用Application of constant current and voltage without segment switching
请参考图9A-9B和图10A-10C,其中图9A和图9B分别示出本发明中处于测定模式和回充模式的无段切换的定电流电路。本实施例的测定模式与回充模式与图8A-8B类似,故于此不再赘述,图8A-8B实施例之差异仅在本实施例在回充模式时,可根据该生理信号Ia,藉由数字模拟转换器(DAC)的控制而输出固定电流Ib,并经由调控电位差V2的施加时间t2来控制AgCl的回充量。换言之,在对电极R/C上的AgCl保持在安全库存量之内的前提下,可使回充量等于或不等于(包含约略相近、大于或小于)消耗量。Please refer to FIGS. 9A-9B and FIGS. 10A-10C, where FIGS. 9A and 9B respectively show the stepless switching constant current circuit in the measurement mode and the recharge mode in the present invention. The measurement mode and recharge mode of this embodiment are similar to those in Figs. 8A-8B, so they will not be repeated here. The difference between the embodiments of Figs. 8A-8B is only when the embodiment is in the recharge mode, according to the physiological signal Ia, The fixed current Ib is output by the control of the digital-to-analog converter (DAC), and the recharge amount of AgCl is controlled by adjusting the application time t2 of the potential difference V2. In other words, on the premise that the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C is kept within the safety inventory, the recharge amount can be made equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) the consumption.
图10A-10C中横轴为时间,纵轴为电流,其中V1的线条表示测定电位差V1的施加和移除,V2的线条表示回充电位差V2的施加和移除。请参考图10A,在一较佳实施例中,T2是固定值,V2和V2的施加时间t2(即回充期间)是变动值。回充期间t2是根据在测定模式所测得的生理信号Ia及测定期间T1而在0至T2之间动态调整。如图10A中所示,t2可为t2’、t2’’、或t2’’’…。换言之,回充期间t2可根据AgCl的消耗量而改变,若AgCl的消耗量大,则可回充较长的时间以使对电极R/C上的AgCl保持在安全库存量之内。In FIGS. 10A-10C, the horizontal axis is time and the vertical axis is current. The line of V1 represents the application and removal of the measured potential difference V1, and the line of V2 represents the application and removal of the recharge potential V2. Please refer to FIG. 10A. In a preferred embodiment, T2 is a fixed value, and the application time t2 of V2 and V2 (that is, the recharging period) is a variable value. The recharge period t2 is dynamically adjusted from 0 to T2 based on the physiological signal Ia measured in the measurement mode and the measurement period T1. As shown in FIG. 10A, t2 can be t2', t2'', or t2'''... In other words, the recharge period t2 can be changed according to the consumption of AgCl. If the consumption of AgCl is large, it can be recharged for a longer period of time to keep the AgCl on the counter electrode R/C within the safe inventory.
请参考图10B,在另一较佳实施例中,V2是变动值,T2和t2都是固定值,其中t2为大于0且小于T2的固定值,例如t2=1/2的T2、2/5的T2、3/7的T2等。在此实施例中,V2是根据于生理信号测定步骤(即在测定模式中)的AgCl的消耗量而动态调整。动态调整方式的其中一个实施例如下。使用例如上述的有段切换的定电流电路,该电路具有n个固定电流源与n个开关,各固定电流源分别对应一个开关。于回充模式时,依据AgCl的消耗量,选择开启n个开关中的至少一个开关(即使该开关处于闭路状态)以 输出固定电流值。在回充期间t2为固定值的情况下,可以藉由选择不同的固定电流输出来控制AgCl的回充量。Please refer to FIG. 10B. In another preferred embodiment, V2 is a variable value, and T2 and t2 are both fixed values, where t2 is a fixed value greater than 0 and less than T2, such as T2 = 1/2 of T2, 2/ 5 T2, 3/7 T2, etc. In this embodiment, V2 is dynamically adjusted according to the consumption of AgCl in the physiological signal measurement step (that is, in the measurement mode). One example of the dynamic adjustment method is as follows. For example, the above-mentioned constant current circuit with segment switching is used. The circuit has n fixed current sources and n switches, and each fixed current source corresponds to a switch. In the recharge mode, according to the consumption of AgCl, at least one of the n switches is selected to be turned on (even if the switch is in a closed state) to output a fixed current value. When the recharge period t2 is a fixed value, the recharge amount of AgCl can be controlled by selecting different fixed current outputs.
请参考图10C,在另一较佳实施例中,V2是变动值,T2和t2都是固定值,其中t2=T2。也就是说,测定模式和回充模式是无缝交替的,在未进行测定的期间即为回充期间。Please refer to FIG. 10C. In another preferred embodiment, V2 is a variable value, and T2 and t2 are both fixed values, where t2=T2. In other words, the measurement mode and the recharge mode are seamlessly alternated, and the period during which no measurement is performed is the recharge period.
相较于无段切换的定电流电路,有段切换的定电流电路可通过多个开关控制多个电流路径,而得以根据所需的电流量以分段式的定电流进行回充,以此方式较为省电且可以降低成本。此外,不管是定电压电路或定电流电路,电位差可以来自直流电源或交流电源,较佳来自直流电源。Compared with a constant current circuit with no segment switching, a constant current circuit with segment switching can control multiple current paths through multiple switches, and can recharge with a segmented constant current according to the amount of current required. The method is more power-efficient and can reduce costs. In addition, whether it is a constant voltage circuit or a constant current circuit, the potential difference can come from a DC power source or an AC power source, preferably from a DC power source.
图7A-7F、图8A-8B、图9A-9B以及图10A-10C的实施例都是描述测定步骤和回充步骤交替循环的操作方式,亦即每个测定步骤之间都有一个AgCl回充步骤,此方式可较佳地确保AgCl保持在安全库存量之内。然而,在某些较佳实施例中,亦可在进行N次的测定期间选择性搭配Y次的AgCl回充,其中Y≤N,使AgCl的累积回充量仍可保持在安全库存范围内。测定步骤和回充步骤也不必然需要以交替循环的方式进行,亦可于数次测定步骤后再进行一次回充步骤,或是在预定的测定时间之后,才进行一次回充步骤。举例而言,可于测定10次后再进行一次回充步骤,或可于累积测定时间达1小时后才进行一次回充步骤。The examples of Figures 7A-7F, Figures 8A-8B, Figures 9A-9B, and Figures 10A-10C all describe the alternate cycle of the measurement step and the refilling step, that is, there is an AgCl return between each measurement step. In the charging step, this method can better ensure that AgCl remains within the safety stock. However, in some preferred embodiments, Y times of AgCl recharge can also be selectively matched during N measurements, where Y≤N, so that the cumulative recharge of AgCl can still be kept within the safety stock range. . The measurement step and the refilling step do not necessarily need to be performed in an alternating cycle, and the refilling step may be performed again after several measurement steps, or the refilling step may be performed only after a predetermined measurement time. For example, the refilling step can be performed again after 10 measurements, or the refilling step can be performed only after the cumulative measurement time reaches 1 hour.
请参考图10D,其示出本发明的定电流电路以类似图10C的方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的示意图。图10D中,曲线表示所测定到的生理信号Ia所转换成的生理参数值曲线,且类似于图10C,T2和t2都是固定值,V2是变动值。图8D中,曲线下白色面积代表测定模式中AgCl的消耗量(Ia*Tl),斜线面积代表回充模式中AgCl的回充量(Ib*t2)。由图中可看出,为了使Ib*t2接近Ia*Tl或在Ia*Tl的某个范围内,回充电位差V2是是根据AgCl的消耗量而动态调整。Please refer to FIG. 10D, which shows a schematic diagram of the constant current circuit of the present invention alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode in a manner similar to FIG. 10C. In Fig. 10D, the curve represents the physiological parameter value curve converted from the measured physiological signal Ia, and is similar to Fig. 10C, T2 and t2 are both fixed values, and V2 is a variable value. In Fig. 8D, the white area under the curve represents the consumption of AgCl in the measurement mode (Ia*Tl), and the slanted area represents the recharge of AgCl in the recharge mode (Ib*t2). It can be seen from the figure that in order to make Ib*t2 close to Ia*Tl or within a certain range of Ia*Tl, the recharge position difference V2 is dynamically adjusted according to the consumption of AgCl.
另外图7E、7F及图10D中,虽未显示每次执行生理信号测定步骤后所输出各生理参数值输出时机点,但生理参数值不限于完成测定时输出或于在回充期间内输出,而AgCl回充步骤不限于在每一个生理参数输出后执行或获得生理信号后执行。In addition, in Figures 7E, 7F and Figure 10D, although the output timing of each physiological parameter value output after each physiological signal measurement step is performed is not shown, the physiological parameter value is not limited to the output when the measurement is completed or during the recharge period. The AgCl refilling step is not limited to being executed after each physiological parameter is output or after the physiological signal is obtained.
于包含工作电极W和对电极R/C的两电极系统中,工作电极W必须在执行氧化反应和执行还原反应之间不断循环切换。在电极的化学反应环境中,氧化和还原反应之间的切换须经过一回稳期,例如数秒钟或数分钟才能回稳。相较之下,在包含工作电极W、对电极R/C和辅助电极Aux的三电极系统中,可利用工作电极W和对电极R/C之 间的回路进行测定步骤,接着经由辅助电极Aux与对电极R/C之间的回路进行回充步骤,由此可避免工作电极W需要回稳期的缺点,亦即在测定步骤之后可立即进行回充步骤。In a two-electrode system including a working electrode W and a counter electrode R/C, the working electrode W must constantly switch between performing an oxidation reaction and performing a reduction reaction. In the chemical reaction environment of the electrode, the switching between oxidation and reduction reactions must go through a stabilization period, such as several seconds or minutes. In contrast, in a three-electrode system including a working electrode W, a counter electrode R/C, and an auxiliary electrode Aux, the loop between the working electrode W and the counter electrode R/C can be used to perform the measurement step, and then the auxiliary electrode Aux The circuit between the counter electrode R/C and the counter electrode R/C is recharged, thereby avoiding the disadvantage that the working electrode W needs a stabilization period, that is, the recharging step can be performed immediately after the measurement step.
请参考图11,其示出根据本发明一实施例的测定待分析物的方法,通过该方法可延长微型生物传感器的使用寿命。该微型生物传感器可为例如图13A-图14所示的微型生物传感器,用于植入皮下以测定与生物流体(例如组织液)中的该待分析物所关联的生理参数的生理信号。在图11的实施例中,该待分析物可为组织液中的葡萄糖,生理参数为人体中的葡萄糖值,生理信号为微型生物传感器量得的电流值。此实施例中,测定待分析物的方法包含反复循环地执行测定步骤(S901)及回充步骤(S902)。测定步骤(S901)包含使用前述定电压或定电流电路于测定期间T1执行如前述的测定模式以输出生理信号(即电流值),同时对电极的AgCl具有对应于该电流值的消耗量。测定步骤(S901)还包含通过停止如前述的测定模式来停止测定步骤,且该电流值经运算后输出生理参数(即葡萄糖值)。Please refer to FIG. 11, which shows a method for determining an analyte according to an embodiment of the present invention, by which the service life of the micro biosensor can be prolonged. The miniature biosensor may be, for example, the miniature biosensor shown in FIGS. 13A-14, which is implanted subcutaneously to measure the physiological signal of the physiological parameter associated with the analyte in the biological fluid (for example, tissue fluid). In the embodiment of FIG. 11, the analyte may be glucose in the tissue fluid, the physiological parameter is the glucose value in the human body, and the physiological signal is the current value measured by the micro biosensor. In this embodiment, the method for measuring the analyte includes repeatedly executing the measuring step (S901) and the refilling step (S902). The measurement step (S901) includes using the aforementioned constant voltage or constant current circuit to perform the aforementioned measurement mode during the measurement period T1 to output a physiological signal (ie, current value), and at the same time, the AgCl of the counter electrode has a consumption corresponding to the current value. The measuring step (S901) further includes stopping the measuring step by stopping the aforementioned measuring mode, and the current value is calculated to output a physiological parameter (ie, a glucose value).
以下实施例是针对N次测定步骤(S901)及N次回充步骤(S902)的循环,其中所提到的生理参数较佳是葡萄糖值,所提到的生理信号较佳是电流值。根据某些较佳实施例,各测定电位差V1于测定期间T1被施加,各回充电位差V2于回充期间t2被施加,且测定期间T1为固定值,其可为3秒内、5秒内、10秒内、15秒内、30秒内、1分钟内、2分钟内、5分钟内或10分钟内的一时间值。根据某些较佳实施例,较佳为30秒内的时间值。测定期间T1为固定值,且可为2.5秒、5秒、15秒、30秒、1分钟、2.5分钟、5分钟、10分钟或30分钟,较佳为30秒。根据某些较佳实施例,各测定期间T1加上各回充期间t2为固定值。根据某些较佳实施例,各回充电位差V2具有固定电压值,各回充期间t2是根据AgCl的每次消耗量而动态调整(如图7A所示)。根据某些较佳实施例,输出的各生理参数是经由各测定期间T1中的一个单一测定时间点的各生理信号运算而获得。根据某些较佳实施例,输出的各生理参数是经由各测定期间T1中的多个测定时间点的多个生理信号的一数学运算值运算而获得。前述数学运算值为例如累加值、平均值、中位数、中位数的平均值等。根据某些较佳实施例,藉由控制每次回充量为等于或不等于(包含约略相近、大于或小于)每次消耗量,而控制对电极之AgCl量在安全库存区间内,而使下一测定步骤时所获得的下一生理信号与下一生理参数保持稳定的比例关系。根据某些较佳实施例,移除各测定电位差V1的步骤是将配置于连通工作电极及对电极之电路断路、或设定各测定电位差V1为0。换言之,可进行断电,以使 测定电路具有开路状态;或者,可施加0伏特电压于工作电极及对电极之间,其中该两项操作其中任一操作的操作时间皆为0.01~0.5秒。移除测定电位差V1的步骤可避免Λ形的生理信号产生。根据某些较佳实施例,移除各回充电位差V2的步骤是将配置于连通辅助电极及对电极之电路断路、或设定各回充电位差V2为0。The following embodiments are directed to the cycle of N measurement steps (S901) and N refill steps (S902), wherein the physiological parameter mentioned is preferably the glucose value, and the physiological signal mentioned is preferably the current value. According to some preferred embodiments, each measurement potential difference V1 is applied during the measurement period T1, each recharge level difference V2 is applied during the recharge period t2, and the measurement period T1 is a fixed value, which can be within 3 seconds, 5 seconds Within, within 10 seconds, within 15 seconds, within 30 seconds, within 1 minute, within 2 minutes, within 5 minutes, or within 10 minutes. According to some preferred embodiments, the time value is preferably within 30 seconds. The measurement period T1 is a fixed value, and can be 2.5 seconds, 5 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2.5 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, or 30 minutes, preferably 30 seconds. According to some preferred embodiments, each measurement period T1 plus each recharge period t2 is a fixed value. According to some preferred embodiments, each recharge level difference V2 has a fixed voltage value, and each recharge period t2 is dynamically adjusted according to each consumption of AgCl (as shown in FIG. 7A). According to some preferred embodiments, the output physiological parameters are obtained by calculating the physiological signals at a single measurement time point in each measurement period T1. According to some preferred embodiments, the output physiological parameters are obtained through a mathematical operation of a plurality of physiological signals at a plurality of measurement time points in each measurement period T1. The aforementioned mathematical operation value is, for example, the accumulated value, the average value, the median, the average value of the median, and so on. According to some preferred embodiments, by controlling the amount of each refill to be equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) each consumption, and controlling the amount of AgCl of the counter electrode within the safety stock interval, the lower The next physiological signal obtained in a determination step maintains a stable proportional relationship with the next physiological parameter. According to some preferred embodiments, the step of removing each measured potential difference V1 is to disconnect the circuit that connects the working electrode and the counter electrode, or set each measured potential difference V1 to zero. In other words, the power can be turned off to make the measurement circuit open; or, a voltage of 0 volts can be applied between the working electrode and the counter electrode, and the operating time of either of the two operations is 0.01 to 0.5 seconds. Removing the step of measuring the potential difference V1 can avoid the generation of Λ-shaped physiological signals. According to some preferred embodiments, the step of removing each regenerative level difference V2 is to disconnect the circuit configured to connect the auxiliary electrode and the counter electrode, or to set each regenerative level difference V2 to zero.
根据某些较佳实施例,传感器植入人体后需经过暖机时间,使传感器在体内达到平衡稳定才能稳定呈现与分析物浓度呈正相关的生理信号。因此,在测定步骤(S901)持续施加测定电压直至测定期间T1结束,并控制该测定期间T1以使得生理信号与分析物的生理参数达到稳定的比例关系。因此,测定期间T1可为变动值或为变动值和固定值的组合(例如变动值+固定值,该变动值可为1小时、2小时、3小时、6小时、12小时或24小时,该固定值可为例如30秒)。According to some preferred embodiments, after the sensor is implanted in the human body, a warm-up time is required to allow the sensor to reach equilibrium and stability in the body in order to stably present a physiological signal that is positively correlated with the concentration of the analyte. Therefore, in the measurement step (S901), the measurement voltage is continuously applied until the end of the measurement period T1, and the measurement period T1 is controlled so that the physiological signal and the physiological parameter of the analyte reach a stable proportional relationship. Therefore, the measurement period T1 can be a variable value or a combination of a variable value and a fixed value (for example, a variable value + a fixed value. The variable value can be 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, or 24 hours. The fixed value may be, for example, 30 seconds).
请参考图7A-7F、图10A-10D及图11,本发明利用施加电压于对电极R/C来测定一期间内对电极之反应电流,并经由将该期间内反应电流经数学运算而得知AgCl初始容量,例如通过计算反应电流曲线下的面积以定义AgCl初始容量,又称初始量或初始库伦量(C initial),以下皆以量来说明。对电极R/C包含Ag和AgCl,当得知AgCl的百分比(X%AgCl)时,即可算出Ag百分比(Y%Ag=100%-X%AgCl)。于每次测定步骤(S901)中通过计算工作电极W的电流曲线下的面积来定义每次AgCl的消耗量(以C consume表示)。对电极R/C的AgCl具有对应于该生理信号Ia的消耗量C consume,即C consume=Ia*T1。于每次回充步骤(S902)中,通过计算对电极R/C的电流曲线下的面积来定义每次AgCl的回充量(以C replenish表示),即C replenish=Ib*t2,t2介于0~T2之间。 Please refer to FIGS. 7A-7F, FIGS. 10A-10D and FIG. 11. The present invention uses voltage applied to the counter electrode R/C to measure the reaction current of the counter electrode in a period, and the reaction current in the period is calculated by mathematical operation. Knowing the initial capacity of AgCl, for example, by calculating the area under the reaction current curve to define the initial capacity of AgCl, also known as the initial amount or initial coulombic amount (C initial ), the following are all explained by the amount. The counter electrode R/C contains Ag and AgCl. When the percentage of AgCl (X%AgCl) is known, the percentage of Ag can be calculated (Y%Ag=100%-X%AgCl). In each measurement step (S901), the consumption of AgCl (expressed as C consume ) is defined by calculating the area under the current curve of the working electrode W. The AgCl of the counter electrode R/C has a consumption C consume corresponding to the physiological signal Ia, that is, C consume = Ia*T1. In each recharge step (S902), the area under the current curve of the counter electrode R/C is calculated to define the recharge amount of AgCl each time ( indicated by C replenish ), that is, C replenish = Ib*t2, and t2 is between Between 0 and T2.
以下描述AgCl安全库存量的计算方法。在某些较佳实施例中,安全库存区间是以Ag与AgCl的比例呈现,本发明是以于对电极测定到的库伦量(C)以反映Ag与AgCl的比例关系。在某些较佳实施例中,Ag与AgCl的比例为99.9%:0.1%、99%:1%、95%:5%、90%:10%、70%:30%、50%:50%、40%:60%或30:70%,使AgCl在对电极上具备一程度上的量而不会被消耗殆尽,让每次生理信号测定步骤皆能稳定执行。AgCl的剩余量为回充量与初始量的和减去消耗量。在某些较佳实施例中,AgCl的剩余量在一区间范围内变动,亦即AgCl的剩余量被控制在初始量加减特定值(X值)的范围内,即(C replenishe+C initial)-C consume=C initial±X,其中0<X<100%C initial、10%C initial<X≤90%C initial、或0.5%C initial<X≤50%C initial。在某些较佳实施例中,AgCl的剩余量可在一区间范围内逐渐下降、逐渐上升、或是平稳变动或任意变动但仍于该区间范围内。 The following describes the calculation method of AgCl safety stock. In some preferred embodiments, the safety stock interval is represented by the ratio of Ag to AgCl. The present invention uses the coulombic amount (C) measured on the counter electrode to reflect the ratio of Ag to AgCl. In some preferred embodiments, the ratio of Ag to AgCl is 99.9%: 0.1%, 99%: 1%, 95%: 5%, 90%: 10%, 70%: 30%, 50%: 50% , 40%:60% or 30:70%, so that AgCl has a certain amount of AgCl on the counter electrode without being exhausted, so that each physiological signal measurement step can be performed stably. The remaining amount of AgCl is the sum of the refill amount and the initial amount minus the consumption. In some preferred embodiments, the remaining amount of AgCl varies within an interval, that is, the remaining amount of AgCl is controlled within the range of the initial amount plus or minus a specific value (X value), namely (C replenishe + C initial )-C consume =C initial ±X, where 0<X<100%C initial , 10%C initial <X≤90%C initial , or 0.5%C initial <X≤50%C initial . In some preferred embodiments, the remaining amount of AgCl may gradually decrease, gradually increase, or change steadily or arbitrarily within an interval, but still within the interval.
请参考图11,其示出根据本发明另一实施例的测定待分析物的方法,通过该方法可延长微型生物传感器的使用寿命并且能缩减对电极之银及卤化银材料用量。该微型生物传感器可为例如图13A-13C及图14A-14G所示的微型生物传感器,用于植入皮下以测定与生物流体(例如组织液)中的该待分析物所关联的生理参数的生理信号。该微型生物传感器的对电极的电极材料包括银及卤化银,在图11的实施例中,该待分析物可为组织液中的葡萄糖,生理参数为人体中的葡萄糖值,生理信号为微型生物传感器量得的电流值。以下仅描述此实施例的一个循环。此实施例的方法始于以下步骤:施加测定电压以驱动工作电极,以测定用以获得生理参数的生理信号,其中卤化银被消耗特定量(下文略称为消耗量)(S1001)。Please refer to FIG. 11, which shows a method for determining an analyte according to another embodiment of the present invention, by which the service life of the micro biosensor can be prolonged and the amount of silver and silver halide materials for the counter electrode can be reduced. The miniature biosensor can be, for example, the miniature biosensor shown in FIGS. 13A-13C and 14A-14G, which is implanted subcutaneously to measure the physiological parameters associated with the analyte in the biological fluid (for example, tissue fluid). Signal. The electrode material of the counter electrode of the micro biosensor includes silver and silver halide. In the embodiment of FIG. 11, the analyte can be glucose in tissue fluid, the physiological parameter is the glucose value in the human body, and the physiological signal is the micro biosensor. The measured current value. Only one cycle of this embodiment will be described below. The method of this embodiment starts with the following steps: applying a measuring voltage to drive the working electrode to measure a physiological signal for obtaining a physiological parameter, in which a specific amount of silver halide is consumed (hereinafter referred to as a consumption amount) (S1001).
接着停止施加测定电压(S1002),并利用所获得的生理信号来获得生理参数(S1003)。获得生理参数后,施加回充电压于对电极及辅助电极之间,以驱动对电极,从而使卤化银的量被回充一回充量(S1004),其中回充量与初始量的和减去消耗量的值(即前文所述的剩余量)被控制在初始量加减特定值的范围内。上述控制步骤是藉由控制回充量等于或不等于(包含约略相近、大于或小于)消耗量来达成,以维持卤化银的量在安全库存区间内。根据反应式,卤化银的摩尔数增减对应银的摩尔数增减,故为了便于说明,卤化银的消耗量对应模拟的银的增加量。在某些较佳实施例中,剩余量的值被控制成使得卤化银的量与银的量加上卤化银的量的和(AgCl/Ag+AgCl)的比值是大于0且小于1,亦即对电极的卤化银有一个量即可,较佳为介于0.01-0.99之间、介于0.1-0.9之间、介于0.2-0.8之间、介于0.3-0.7之间或介于0.4-0.6之间。在达到该回充量时停止施加回充电压(S1005)。之后再循环至步骤S1001执行下一个循环。Then stop applying the measurement voltage (S1002), and use the obtained physiological signal to obtain physiological parameters (S1003). After obtaining the physiological parameters, apply a recharge voltage between the counter electrode and the auxiliary electrode to drive the counter electrode, so that the amount of silver halide is recharged by a recharge amount (S1004), where the sum of the recharge amount and the initial amount decreases The value of the deconsumption amount (that is, the remaining amount mentioned above) is controlled within the range of the initial amount plus or minus a specific value. The above-mentioned control steps are achieved by controlling the refilling amount to be equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) the consumption, so as to maintain the amount of silver halide within the safety stock range. According to the reaction formula, the increase or decrease of the number of moles of silver halide corresponds to the increase or decrease of the number of moles of silver, so for the convenience of explanation, the consumption of silver halide corresponds to the increase of simulated silver. In some preferred embodiments, the value of the remaining amount is controlled such that the ratio of the amount of silver halide to the amount of silver plus the amount of silver halide (AgCl/Ag+AgCl) is greater than 0 and less than 1, also That is, there is only one amount of silver halide in the counter electrode, preferably between 0.01-0.99, between 0.1-0.9, between 0.2-0.8, between 0.3-0.7, or between 0.4- Between 0.6. When the recharge amount is reached, the application of the recharge voltage is stopped (S1005). Then it loops to step S1001 to execute the next loop.
以下描述本发明的一具体实施例,以生物传感器使用寿命须达到16天作为示例以计算所需电极信号感测段Ag/AgCl材料尺寸之方法,例如每次测量的待分析物平均测定电流为30nA、测定期间(T1)为30秒、且回充期间(t2)为30秒。每天所需AgCl的消耗量(C consume/day)=1.3mC/天。假设传感器使用寿命的需求为16天,则使用16天所需AgCl的消耗量为1.3x 16=20.8mC。 A specific embodiment of the present invention will be described below. A method for calculating the size of the Ag/AgCl material of the electrode signal sensing section is taken as an example with a biosensor service life of 16 days. For example, the average measured current of the analyte for each measurement is 30 nA, the measurement period (T1) is 30 seconds, and the recharge period (t2) is 30 seconds. The daily consumption of AgCl (C consume/day )=1.3mC/day. Assuming that the service life requirement of the sensor is 16 days, the consumption of AgCl required for 16 days is 1.3×16=20.8mC.
例如对电极的长度为2.5mm,其对应AgCl初始量C intial=10mC; For example, the length of the counter electrode is 2.5mm, which corresponds to the initial amount of AgCl C intial = 10mC;
在无执行AgCl的回充的情况下,针对传感器使用寿命16天,对电极需要的长度至少为:Without performing AgCl recharging, for the sensor service life of 16 days, the required length of the counter electrode is at least:
C 16day/C consume/day=20.8mC/1.3mg/day=16mm C 16day /C consume/day= 20.8mC/1.3mg/day=16mm
故在无使用本发明卤化银的回充方法的情况下,对电极的长度需超出16mm才能使传感器寿命达16天。Therefore, without using the silver halide recharging method of the present invention, the length of the counter electrode needs to exceed 16 mm in order to make the sensor life up to 16 days.
于本实施例中,在无使用本发明之卤化银的回充技术情况下,对电极信号感测段需配置相对应较大的Ag/AgCl材料尺寸才能达到16天的传感器寿命。通过本发明卤化银的回充方法,于两次测定步骤之间进行卤化银的回充步骤,该卤化银的消耗与回充可在短时间内重复循环(即用即充),故可缩减传感器中的Ag/AgCl材料用量,进而使传感器微型化,因此对电极信号感测段材料不须准备16天份的AgCl的容量以供消耗。例如,大约准备1~2天份AgCl的容量即可使用传感器达16天,由此达到延长传感器使用寿命之功效。1~2天份的AgCl的容量亦指于出厂前或执行第一次测定前的对电极所具有例如在约1.3~2.6mC之间的AgCl的初始量,该初始量亦可为其他更小或更大的范围。于其他实施例中亦可准备1~5天份、1~3天份、6~24小时、6~12小时等不同的AgCl容量。对电极信号感测段的材料尺寸只要具备让每次葡萄糖测定步骤皆能稳定执行、使测定电流能与体内的葡萄糖浓度呈现正相关性的容量即可。In this embodiment, without using the silver halide recharging technology of the present invention, the counter electrode signal sensing section needs to be equipped with a correspondingly larger Ag/AgCl material size to achieve the sensor life of 16 days. Through the silver halide recharging method of the present invention, the silver halide recharging step is performed between the two measurement steps. The consumption and recharging of the silver halide can be repeated in a short period of time (recharge when used), so it can be reduced The amount of Ag/AgCl material in the sensor further miniaturizes the sensor, so there is no need to prepare 16 days of AgCl capacity for the electrode signal sensing section material for consumption. For example, by preparing the capacity of AgCl for about 1 to 2 days, the sensor can be used for 16 days, thereby achieving the effect of extending the service life of the sensor. The capacity of AgCl for 1 to 2 days also refers to the initial amount of AgCl in the counter electrode before leaving the factory or before performing the first measurement, for example, between about 1.3 and 2.6 mC. The initial amount can also be other smaller Or a larger range. In other embodiments, different AgCl capacities may be prepared for 1 to 5 days, 1 to 3 days, 6 to 24 hours, and 6 to 12 hours. The material size of the signal sensing section of the counter electrode only needs to have the capacity to enable the stable execution of each glucose measurement step and the positive correlation between the measurement current and the glucose concentration in the body.
若在无使用本发明之氯化银的回充技术情况下,先前技术会通过增加电极长度/面积使传感器达到所需天数需求,以先前技术为例,传感器植入端长度约为12mm,因植入长度长,而为了避免植入深达皮下组织,需以斜角方式植入皮下,其植入伤口较大。另外举例来说,1~2天份的AgCl的容量约在1.3~2.6mC之间,换算该1~2天的对电极长度为2.5~5mm,其相较于无使用本发明卤化银的回充方法的情况下需要16mm的对电极长度,更加凸显本发明能有效缩减所需对电极尺寸。通过本发明卤化银的回充方法,可缩短植入端长度,例如使长度缩减为不大于10mm。于本发明的微型生物传感器300的连接区域317的下半部分至第二端314属于短植入端318(如图13A及13B所示),且短植入端318植入深度需至少满足到真皮层可测定到组织液葡萄糖的深度,故短植入端318的最长边不大于6mm,以使微型生物传感器300能以垂直于生物体表皮的方式被部分植入于生物体表皮下。短植入端318的最长边较佳为不大于5mm、4.5mm或3.5mm或2.5mm。本发明的短植入端包含对电极330的信号感测段332,其信号感测段332最长边不大于6mm,较佳为2-6mm、2-5mm、2-4.5mm或2-3.5mm、0.5-2mm、0.2-1mm。If the silver chloride recharging technology of the present invention is not used, the prior art will increase the electrode length/area to make the sensor reach the required number of days. Taking the prior art as an example, the sensor implantation end length is about 12mm. The implantation length is long, and in order to avoid implanting deep into the subcutaneous tissue, it needs to be implanted under the skin at an oblique angle, and the implantation wound is relatively large. In addition, for example, the capacity of AgCl for 1 to 2 days is about 1.3 to 2.6 mC, and the length of the counter electrode for 1 to 2 days is 2.5 to 5 mm, which is compared with that without the silver halide of the present invention. In the case of the charging method, a length of the counter electrode of 16 mm is required, which further highlights that the present invention can effectively reduce the size of the required counter electrode. Through the silver halide refilling method of the present invention, the length of the implanted end can be shortened, for example, the length is reduced to no more than 10 mm. In the micro biosensor 300 of the present invention, the lower half of the connection area 317 to the second end 314 belong to the short implant end 318 (as shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B), and the implant depth of the short implant end 318 must be at least The dermis layer can measure the depth of tissue fluid glucose, so the longest side of the short implanted end 318 is not greater than 6 mm, so that the micro biosensor 300 can be partially implanted under the epidermis of the organism in a manner perpendicular to the epidermis of the organism. The longest side of the short implant end 318 is preferably no more than 5 mm, 4.5 mm, 3.5 mm, or 2.5 mm. The short implanted end of the present invention includes the signal sensing section 332 of the counter electrode 330, and the longest side of the signal sensing section 332 is not greater than 6mm, preferably 2-6mm, 2-5mm, 2-4.5mm or 2-3.5 mm, 0.5-2mm, 0.2-1mm.
因此与未使用本发明之卤化银的回充技术情况比较下,通过本发明卤化银的回充方法,能有效延长传感器使用寿命、且能大幅缩减对电极上Ag/AgCl材料的使用,而使对电极信号感测段的尺寸可缩小。由于缩减对电极上Ag/AgCl材料的使用,而使传 感器可微型化且可降低生物毒性。此外,电极尺寸缩小特别是指缩短传感器的植入端长度,因此可降低使用者植入痛感。Therefore, compared with the case where the silver halide recharging technology of the present invention is not used, the silver halide recharging method of the present invention can effectively extend the service life of the sensor, and can greatly reduce the use of Ag/AgCl material on the counter electrode, so that The size of the counter electrode signal sensing section can be reduced. As the use of Ag/AgCl materials on the electrode is reduced, the sensor can be miniaturized and biological toxicity can be reduced. In addition, the reduction of the electrode size particularly refers to shortening the length of the implanted end of the sensor, thus reducing the pain of implantation of the user.
实施例IIIExample III
请参阅图18A及18B,其为本发明微型生物传感器的第一实施例的正面与背面示意图。本发明的微型生物传感器400包括基板410、设置于基板410上的第一工作电极420、第二工作电极430、第一对电极440与第二对电极450、以及包围第一工作电极420、第二工作电极430、第一对电极440与第二对电极450的化学试剂460(如图18C所示)。基板410的材质可选用任何已知适合使用于电极基板的材质且较佳具备可挠性及绝缘性质,例如但不限于:聚酯(Polyester)、聚酰亚胺(Polyimide)等高分子材质,前述高分子材质可以单独使用一种或者混合多种使用。基板410具有表面411(即第一表面)、与表面411相对的对侧表面412(即第二表面)、第一端413及第二端414,且基板410分为3个区域,分别为靠近第一端413的信号输出区域415、靠近第二端414的感测区域416、及位于信号输出区域415及感测区域416之间的连接区域417。第一工作电极420与第二工作电极430设置于基板410的表面411上,且从基板410的第一端413延伸至第二端414。第一工作电极420包括位于基板410的信号输出区415的第一信号输出段421,及位于基板410的感测区416的第一信号感测段422。第二工作电极430包括位于基板410的信号输出区415的第二信号输出段431,及位于基板410的感测区416的第二信号感测段432。Please refer to FIGS. 18A and 18B, which are schematic diagrams of the front and back of the first embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention. The micro biosensor 400 of the present invention includes a substrate 410, a first working electrode 420, a second working electrode 430, a first pair of electrodes 440 and a second pair of electrodes 450, and surrounding the first working electrode 420, a The two working electrodes 430, the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 are chemical reagents 460 (as shown in FIG. 18C). The material of the substrate 410 can be any material that is known to be suitable for use in electrode substrates and preferably has flexibility and insulation properties, such as but not limited to polymer materials such as polyester and polyimide. The aforementioned polymer materials can be used singly or in combination of multiple types. The substrate 410 has a surface 411 (that is, the first surface), an opposite surface 412 (that is, the second surface) opposite to the surface 411, a first end 413 and a second end 414, and the substrate 410 is divided into 3 regions, which are respectively close to The signal output area 415 of the first end 413, the sensing area 416 close to the second end 414, and the connection area 417 between the signal output area 415 and the sensing area 416. The first working electrode 420 and the second working electrode 430 are disposed on the surface 411 of the substrate 410 and extend from the first end 413 to the second end 414 of the substrate 410. The first working electrode 420 includes a first signal output section 421 located in the signal output area 415 of the substrate 410 and a first signal sensing section 422 located in the sensing area 416 of the substrate 410. The second working electrode 430 includes a second signal output section 431 located in the signal output area 415 of the substrate 410 and a second signal sensing section 432 located in the sensing area 416 of the substrate 410.
第一对电极440与第二对电极450设置于基板410的对侧表面412,且从基板410的第一端413延伸至第二端414。第一对电极440包括位于基板410的信号输出区415的第三信号输出段441,及位于基板410的感测区416的第三信号感测段442,且第二对电极450包括位于基板410的信号输出区415的第四信号输出段451,及位于基板410的感测区416的第四信号感测段452。第一对电极440及第二对电极450表面的材料包含银(Silver)及卤化银(Silver Halide),其中卤化银较佳为氯化银(Silver Chloride)或碘化银(Silver Iodine),使第一对电极440及第二对电极450兼具参考电极的功能,即本发明的第一对电极440及第二对电极450可以(1)与第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430形成电子回路,使第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430上电流畅通,以确保氧化反应在第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430上发生;以及(2)提供稳定的相对电位作为参考电位。因此,本发明的第一工作电极420、第二工作电极430、第一对电极440及第二对电极450形成一个四电极系统。为了进一步降低成本以及提高本发明之生物传感器的生物兼容 性,该银/卤化银更可与碳混合使用,例如将该银/卤化银混入碳胶,其卤化银含量只要让第一对电极440及第二对电极450能稳定执行设定的测定动作即可。第一对电极440及第二对电极450的部份的表面上还可以覆盖导电材料以防止卤化银解离(dissolution),进而保护第一对电极440及第二对电极450,其中导电材料系选择不影响工作电极测定表现的导电材质为主,例如导电材料为碳(Carbon)。The first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 are disposed on the opposite side surface 412 of the substrate 410 and extend from the first end 413 to the second end 414 of the substrate 410. The first pair of electrodes 440 includes a third signal output section 441 located in the signal output area 415 of the substrate 410, and a third signal sensing section 442 located in the sensing area 416 of the substrate 410, and the second pair of electrodes 450 includes a third signal output section 441 located on the substrate 410. The fourth signal output section 451 of the signal output area 415 and the fourth signal sensing section 452 of the sensing area 416 of the substrate 410 are located. The materials on the surfaces of the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 include silver and silver halide, and the silver halide is preferably silver chloride (Silver Chloride) or silver iodide (Silver Iodine). The counter electrode 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 both have the functions of reference electrodes, that is, the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 of the present invention can (1) form an electronic circuit with the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 , Enabling the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 to be smoothly energized to ensure that the oxidation reaction occurs on the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430; and (2) providing a stable relative potential as a reference potential. Therefore, the first working electrode 420, the second working electrode 430, the first pair of electrodes 440, and the second pair of electrodes 450 of the present invention form a four-electrode system. In order to further reduce the cost and improve the biocompatibility of the biosensor of the present invention, the silver/silver halide can be mixed with carbon. For example, the silver/silver halide is mixed into the carbon glue, and the silver halide content is as long as the first pair of electrodes 440 And the second pair of electrodes 450 can perform the set measurement operation stably. The surface of the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 may also be covered with conductive materials to prevent silver halide from dissolution, thereby protecting the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450, wherein the conductive material is The conductive material that does not affect the measurement performance of the working electrode is mainly selected, for example, the conductive material is Carbon.
另一实施例中生物传感器不限于导线式或叠层式的电极结构。In another embodiment, the biosensor is not limited to a wire-type or stacked-type electrode structure.
在本发明的另一个实施例中,在准备将生物传感器运送出工厂出售之前,卤化银的初始量可以为零。在这种情况下,生物传感器的第一对电极440及/或第二对电极450上没有卤化银。在将生物传感器皮下植入患者体内之后以及在进行首次测量之前的最开始回充期间中,经由氧化被涂布在第一对电极440及/或第二对电极450上的银,可以在第一对电极440及/或第二对电极450上回充初始量的卤化银。In another embodiment of the present invention, the initial amount of silver halide may be zero before the biosensor is ready to be shipped out of the factory for sale. In this case, there is no silver halide on the first pair of electrodes 440 and/or the second pair of electrodes 450 of the biosensor. After the biosensor is subcutaneously implanted in the patient's body and during the initial recharging period before the first measurement, the silver coated on the first pair of electrodes 440 and/or the second pair of electrodes 450 through oxidation may be in the first pair of electrodes. The pair of electrodes 440 and/or the second pair of electrodes 450 are refilled with the initial amount of silver halide.
化学试剂460至少覆盖于第一工作电极420的第一信号感测段422。于另一实施例中,化学试剂460至少覆盖于第一工作电极420与第二工作电极430的第一信号感测段422与第二信号感测段432。另一实施例,化学试剂460包覆所有电极之信号感测段422,432,442,452。而在另一实施例中,第一对电极440及/或第二对电极450可以不被化学试剂460覆盖。微型生物传感器400的感测区416可以植入皮下使第一信号感测段422与第二信号感测段432进行生物流体中待分析物所关联的生理信号的测定,生理信号会分别被传送至信号第一输出段421与第二输出段431,再由第一输出段421与第二输出段431传送至处理器210以得到生理参数。另该生理参数除了从传输单元200取得外,亦可经由无线/有线通信传送至用户装置20取得,常用的用户装置20例如智能型手机、生理信号接收器或血糖仪。The chemical reagent 460 at least covers the first signal sensing section 422 of the first working electrode 420. In another embodiment, the chemical reagent 460 covers at least the first signal sensing section 422 and the second signal sensing section 432 of the first working electrode 420 and the second working electrode 430. In another embodiment, the chemical reagent 460 covers the signal sensing sections 422, 432, 442, and 452 of all electrodes. In another embodiment, the first pair of electrodes 440 and/or the second pair of electrodes 450 may not be covered by the chemical reagent 460. The sensing area 416 of the micro biosensor 400 can be implanted subcutaneously so that the first signal sensing section 422 and the second signal sensing section 432 perform the determination of the physiological signals associated with the analyte in the biological fluid, and the physiological signals will be transmitted separately The first output section 421 and the second output section 431 of the signal are transmitted to the processor 210 from the first output section 421 and the second output section 431 to obtain physiological parameters. In addition to obtaining the physiological parameters from the transmission unit 200, the physiological parameters may also be transmitted to the user device 20 via wireless/wired communication, such as a smart phone, a physiological signal receiver, or a blood glucose meter.
请参阅图18C,其为图18A中沿A-A’线的剖面示意图,其中A-A’线为从微型生物传感器400的感测区416的剖面线。在图18C中,第一工作电极420与第二工作电极430设置于基板410的表面411,第一对电极440与第二对电极450设置基板410的对侧表面412,且第一工作电极420、第二工作电极430、第一对电极440与第二对电极450的表面上覆盖化学试剂460。基本上化学试剂460至少覆盖于一个工作电极的部分表面上。本发明的微型生物传感器400会在测定期间执行测定步骤,及在回充期间执行回充步骤。在测定步骤时,可以选择第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430来测定生理信号,且在回充步骤时,由第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430帮助第一对电极440或第二对电极450回充卤化银。因此,在此实施例中,当执行测定步骤时,第一工作电极420或第 二工作电极430的电压高于第一对电极440或第二对电极450的电压,使电流从第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430往第一对电极440或第二对电极450的方向流动,进而使第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430发生氧化反应(即第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430、化学试剂460及待分析物之间的电化学反应)而测定生理信号,第一对电极440或第二对电极450发生还原反应,使第一对电极440或第二对电极450中的卤化银消耗而解离成银(Ag)及卤离子(X -)。由于第一对电极440或第二对电极450中的卤化银被消耗,故需要回充第一对电极440或第二对电极450中的卤化银以进行下一次的测定步骤。当执行回充步骤时,第一对电极440或第二对电极450的电压高于第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430的电压,使电流从第一对电极440或第二对电极450往第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430的方向流动,进而使第一对电极440或第二对电极450发生氧化反应使银与卤离子结合而回充卤化银,详细测定步骤与回充步骤见图12说明。 Please refer to FIG. 18C, which is a schematic cross-sectional view along the line AA' in FIG. In FIG. 18C, the first working electrode 420 and the second working electrode 430 are disposed on the surface 411 of the substrate 410, the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 are disposed on the opposite surface 412 of the substrate 410, and the first working electrode 420 The surfaces of the second working electrode 430, the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 are covered with a chemical reagent 460. Basically, the chemical reagent 460 covers at least a part of the surface of a working electrode. The micro biosensor 400 of the present invention will perform the measurement step during the measurement period and perform the refill step during the refill period. In the measuring step, the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 can be selected to measure physiological signals, and in the recharging step, the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 helps the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second electrode Two pairs of electrodes 450 are recharged with silver halide. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the measurement step is performed, the voltage of the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 is higher than the voltage of the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450, so that the current flows from the first working electrode. 420 or the second working electrode 430 flows in the direction of the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450, thereby causing the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 to undergo an oxidation reaction (that is, the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430). The electrochemical reaction between the electrode 430, the chemical reagent 460 and the analyte) to measure the physiological signal, the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 undergo a reduction reaction, so that the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 silver halide consumed dissociate into silver (Ag) and a halide ion (X -). Since the silver halide in the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 is consumed, it is necessary to recharge the silver halide in the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 to perform the next measurement step. When the recharging step is performed, the voltage of the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 is higher than the voltage of the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430, so that the current flows from the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 Flow in the direction of the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430, and then cause the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 to oxidize to combine silver and halide ions to recharge the silver halide. Detailed measurement steps and recharge The steps are illustrated in Figure 12.
请参阅图19A,其为本发明的微型生物传感器的第二实施例的剖面示意图。第二实施例为第一实施例的电极配置的变化。在此实施例中,如图19A所示,本发明的微型生物传感器400的第一工作电极420及第一对电极440设置于基板410的表面411,第二工作电极430及第二对电极450设置基板410的对侧表面412,且第一工作电极420、第二工作电极430、第一对电极440或第二对电极450的表面上覆盖化学试剂460。同样地,在测定步骤时,可以选择第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430来测定生理信号,且在回充步骤时,亦可以选择第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430帮助对第一对电极440或第二对电极450回充卤化银。因此,在此实施例中,当执行测定步骤时,电流从第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430往第一对电极440或第二对电极450的方向流动,进而使第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430发生氧化反应而测定生理信号,第一对电极440或第二对电极450发生还原反应,使第一对电极440或第二对电极450中的卤化银消耗而解离成银(Ag)及卤离子(X -)。当执行回充步骤时,电流从第一对电极440或第二对电极450往第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430的方向流动,进而使第一对电极440或第二对电极450发生氧化反应使银与卤离子结合而回充卤化银。 Please refer to FIG. 19A, which is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention. The second embodiment is a change of the electrode configuration of the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19A, the first working electrode 420 and the first pair of electrodes 440 of the micro biosensor 400 of the present invention are disposed on the surface 411 of the substrate 410, and the second working electrode 430 and the second pair of electrodes 450 The opposite side surface 412 of the substrate 410 is provided, and the surface of the first working electrode 420, the second working electrode 430, the first pair of electrodes 440, or the second pair of electrodes 450 is covered with a chemical reagent 460. Similarly, in the measuring step, the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 can be selected to measure physiological signals, and in the recharging step, the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 can also be selected to help The pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 are backfilled with silver halide. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the measurement step is performed, the current flows from the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 to the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450, so that the first working electrode 420 Or the second working electrode 430 undergoes an oxidation reaction to measure physiological signals, and the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 undergo a reduction reaction, so that the silver halide in the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 is consumed and dissociated into silver (Ag) and a halide ion (X -). When the recharging step is performed, the current flows from the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 to the direction of the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430, thereby causing the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 to generate The oxidation reaction combines silver and halide ions to recharge the silver halide.
请参阅图19B,其为本发明的微型生物传感器的第三实施例的剖面示意图。在第三实施例中,本发明的微型生物传感器400的第一工作电极420设置于基板410的表面411,第二工作电极430、第一对电极440及第二对电极450设置基板410的对侧表面412,且第一工作电极420、第二工作电极430、第一对电极440或第二对电极450的表面上覆盖化学试剂460。第二工作电极430位置除了被配置于两个对极之间外,亦可设置在最 左或最右侧边位置(图未示出)。在本实施例中,在测定步骤时,可以选择第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430来测定生理信号,且在回充步骤时,亦皆可以选择第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430帮助对第一对电极440或第二对电极450回充卤化银。Please refer to FIG. 19B, which is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention. In the third embodiment, the first working electrode 420 of the micro biosensor 400 of the present invention is arranged on the surface 411 of the substrate 410, and the second working electrode 430, the first pair of electrodes 440, and the second pair of electrodes 450 are arranged on the surface of the substrate 410. The side surface 412, and the surface of the first working electrode 420, the second working electrode 430, the first pair of electrodes 440, or the second pair of electrodes 450 are covered with a chemical reagent 460. The second working electrode 430 can be arranged between the two opposite electrodes, and can also be arranged at the leftmost or rightmost position (not shown in the figure). In this embodiment, in the measuring step, the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 can be selected to measure physiological signals, and in the recharging step, the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode can also be selected 430 helps to recharge the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 with silver halide.
请参阅图19C,其为本发明的微型生物传感器的第四实施例的剖面示意图。在第四实施例中,本发明的微型生物传感器400的第一工作电极420及第二工作电极430设置于基板410的表面411上,第二工作电极430为U型并邻设且围绕于第一工作电极420的侧边,第一对电极440及第二对电极450设置于基板410的对侧表面412上,且第一工作电极420、第二工作电极430、第一对电极440及第二对电极450的表面上覆盖化学试剂460。在此实施例中,在测定步骤时,可以选择第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430来测定生理信号,且在回充步骤时,亦可以选择第一工作电极420或第二工作电极430帮助对第一对电极440或第二对电极450回充卤化银。Please refer to FIG. 19C, which is a schematic cross-sectional view of the fourth embodiment of the micro biosensor of the present invention. In the fourth embodiment, the first working electrode 420 and the second working electrode 430 of the micro biosensor 400 of the present invention are disposed on the surface 411 of the substrate 410, and the second working electrode 430 is U-shaped and is adjacently disposed and surrounds the first working electrode. On the side of a working electrode 420, the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 are disposed on the opposite side surface 412 of the substrate 410, and the first working electrode 420, the second working electrode 430, the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second The surfaces of the two pairs of electrodes 450 are covered with a chemical reagent 460. In this embodiment, in the measurement step, the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 can be selected to measure physiological signals, and in the recharging step, the first working electrode 420 or the second working electrode 430 can also be selected. It helps to recharge the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 with silver halide.
以上图18C-19C其详细电极叠层省略,仅示意电极位置。以上图18C-19C基本上化学试剂460至少覆盖第一工作电极420部分的表面上。The detailed electrode stacks of Figures 18C-19C above are omitted, and only the electrode positions are shown. The above FIGS. 18C-19C basically cover the surface of the first working electrode 420 with the chemical reagent 460 at least.
在上述任一实施例中,第一工作电极420及第二工作电极430的材料包含但不限于:碳、铂、铝、镓、金、铟、铱、铁、铅、镁、镍、锰、钼、锇、钯、铑、银、锡、钛、锌、硅、锆、前述元素的混合物、或前述元素的衍生物(如合金、氧化物或金属化合物等),较佳地,第一工作电极420及第二工作电极430的材料为贵金属、贵金属之衍生物或前述的组合,更佳地,第一工作电极420及第二工作电极430为含铂材料。于另一实施例中,第二工作电极430的电极材料系选用与第一工作电极420相比对于过氧化氢具有较低灵敏度之材料,例如碳。In any of the above embodiments, the materials of the first working electrode 420 and the second working electrode 430 include but are not limited to: carbon, platinum, aluminum, gallium, gold, indium, iridium, iron, lead, magnesium, nickel, manganese, Molybdenum, osmium, palladium, rhodium, silver, tin, titanium, zinc, silicon, zirconium, mixtures of the foregoing elements, or derivatives of the foregoing elements (such as alloys, oxides or metal compounds, etc.), preferably, the first work The materials of the electrode 420 and the second working electrode 430 are precious metals, derivatives of precious metals, or a combination of the foregoing. More preferably, the first working electrode 420 and the second working electrode 430 are platinum-containing materials. In another embodiment, the electrode material of the second working electrode 430 is selected from a material having a lower sensitivity to hydrogen peroxide than that of the first working electrode 420, such as carbon.
在上述任一实施例中,为了防止银电极材料的过度氯化而发生断线,还可以在基板410的对侧表面412与第一对电极440及第二对电极450的银之间添加一层导电材料(如碳)。然而,若第一对电极440及第二对电极450的底层是碳会造成开关处的阻值过高,故还可在碳导电材料跟基板410的对侧表面412之间再增设一层导电层,例如为银以降低信号输出端的阻抗,使本发明的第一对电极440及第二对电极450从基板410的对侧表面412开始依序为导电层、碳层及银/卤化银层。In any of the above embodiments, in order to prevent the silver electrode material from being disconnected due to excessive chlorination, it is also possible to add one between the opposite side surface 412 of the substrate 410 and the silver of the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450. Layer of conductive material (such as carbon). However, if the bottom layer of the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 is carbon, the resistance at the switch will be too high. Therefore, a layer of conductive material can be added between the carbon conductive material and the opposite surface 412 of the substrate 410. The layer, such as silver, is used to reduce the impedance of the signal output terminal, so that the first pair of electrodes 440 and the second pair of electrodes 450 of the present invention start from the opposite side surface 412 of the substrate 410 as a conductive layer, a carbon layer, and a silver/silver halide layer in order .
由于本发明的微型生物传感器400有两个工作电极及两个对电极,使微型生物传感器400可以在使用例如第一工作电极420与第一对电极440执行测定步骤的同时,使用第二工作电极430与第二对电极450执行回充步骤。或使用例如第一工作电极420连续执行测定步骤的同时,使用第二工作电极430帮助第一对电极440或第二对电极450 执行回充步骤。Since the micro biosensor 400 of the present invention has two working electrodes and two counter electrodes, the micro biosensor 400 can use, for example, the first working electrode 420 and the first pair of electrodes 440 to perform the measurement step while using the second working electrode. 430 and the second pair of electrodes 450 perform a recharging step. Or, for example, the first working electrode 420 is used to continuously perform the measurement step, while the second working electrode 430 is used to help the first pair of electrodes 440 or the second pair of electrodes 450 perform the recharging step.
定电压电压施加应用Constant voltage voltage application
请参考图20A-20C,其分别示出本发明中根据不同方式可进行测定模式和回充模式的定电压电路。测定模式可分别藉由施加测定电位差Vl和移除测定电位差Vl而开始和停止,而对应的电流以Ia表示。在定电压电路中,第一工作电极W1是藉由开关S1控制,第一对电极R/C1是藉由开关S5和S6控制,第二工作电极W2是藉由开关S2和S7控制,第二对电极R/C2是藉由开关S3和S4控制。藉由上述开关的控制,可有多种弹性的操作方式,以下示例说明。Please refer to FIGS. 20A-20C, which respectively show the constant voltage circuit in the present invention that can perform the measurement mode and the recharge mode according to different methods. The measurement mode can be started and stopped by applying the measurement potential difference V1 and removing the measurement potential difference V1, respectively, and the corresponding current is represented by Ia. In the constant voltage circuit, the first working electrode W1 is controlled by switch S1, the first pair of electrodes R/C1 is controlled by switches S5 and S6, the second working electrode W2 is controlled by switches S2 and S7, and the second The counter electrode R/C2 is controlled by switches S3 and S4. With the above-mentioned switch control, there are many flexible operation modes, as shown in the following example.
如图20A所示,在测定模式时,于测定期间Tl施加测定电位差Vl于第一工作电极W1与第一对电极R/C1之间,使第一工作电极W1的电压高于第一对电极R/C1的电压。此时开关S1和S6为闭路状态,而开关S5为开路状态,第一工作电极W1为+Vl,第一对电极R/C1接地,以使第一工作电极W1进行氧化反应,并与化学试剂和待分析物进行电化学反应而输出生理信号Ia,同时第一对电极R/C1的AgCl具有对应于该生理信号Ia的消耗量。在回充模式时,可分别藉由施加回充电位差V2和移除回充电位差V2而开始和停止,而对应的电流以Ib表示。V2为0.1V至0.8V之间的固定值,较佳为0.2V至0.5V之间的固定值。在回充模式时,施加回充电位差V2于第二工作电极W2与第二对电极R/C2之间持续回充期间t2,使第二对电极R/C2的电压高于第二工作电极W2的电压。此时开关S4和S7为开路状态,而开关S2和S3为闭路状态,第二对电极R/C2为+V2,第二工作电极W2为接地,以使第二对电极R/C2上的Ag进行氧化反应,而回充第二对电极R/C2上的AgCl达一回充量。在定电压电路中的回充电位差V2为固定电压,测得的输出电流为Ib。本发明是通过计算电流曲线下的面积以定义AgCl的容量(Capacity,单位库伦,以符号"C"表示),故测定模式中AgCl的消耗量为Ia*Tl,回充模式中AgCl的回充量为Ib*t2。因此,可经由调控回充电位差V2的施加时间t2来控制AgCl的回充量。换言之,在第一或第二对电极R/C1或R/C2上的AgCl保持在安全库存量之内的前提下,可使回充量等于或不等于(包含约略相近、大于或小于)消耗量。图20A以同时进行测定模式的时序与回充模式的时序重迭进行示意,上述开关的控制亦可变换其它形式电路而具有多种弹性的操作方式,在某些较佳实施例中,使测定模式时序与回充模式时序除了同时进行外,亦可部分重迭或不重迭。As shown in FIG. 20A, in the measurement mode, the measurement potential difference V1 is applied between the first working electrode W1 and the first pair of electrodes R/C1 during the measurement period T1, so that the voltage of the first working electrode W1 is higher than that of the first pair of electrodes. Voltage of electrode R/C1. At this time, the switches S1 and S6 are in the closed state, and the switch S5 is in the open state. The first working electrode W1 is +Vl, and the first pair of electrodes R/C1 is grounded, so that the first working electrode W1 undergoes oxidation reaction and reacts with chemical reagents. Electrochemically reacts with the analyte to output a physiological signal Ia, and at the same time, the AgCl of the first pair of electrodes R/C1 has a consumption corresponding to the physiological signal Ia. In the recharging mode, it can be started and stopped by applying the recharging gap V2 and removing the recharging gap V2 respectively, and the corresponding current is represented by Ib. V2 is a fixed value between 0.1V and 0.8V, preferably a fixed value between 0.2V and 0.5V. In the recharge mode, apply the recharge potential V2 between the second working electrode W2 and the second pair of electrodes R/C2 for the recharge period t2, so that the voltage of the second pair of electrodes R/C2 is higher than that of the second working electrode The voltage of W2. At this time, the switches S4 and S7 are in the open state, and the switches S2 and S3 are in the closed state. The second pair of electrodes R/C2 is +V2, and the second working electrode W2 is grounded, so that the Ag on the second pair of electrodes R/C2 The oxidation reaction is carried out, and the AgCl on the second pair of electrodes R/C2 is recharged to a recharge amount. The recharge potential V2 in the constant voltage circuit is a fixed voltage, and the measured output current is Ib. The present invention defines the capacity of AgCl by calculating the area under the current curve (Capacity, unit coulomb, represented by the symbol "C"), so the consumption of AgCl in the measurement mode is Ia*Tl, and the recharge of AgCl in the recharge mode The amount is Ib*t2. Therefore, the recharge amount of AgCl can be controlled by regulating the application time t2 of the recharge potential V2. In other words, under the premise that the AgCl on the first or second pair of electrodes R/C1 or R/C2 is kept within the safety inventory, the recharge amount can be equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) consumption quantity. Figure 20A illustrates that the timing of the simultaneous measurement mode and the timing of the recharge mode overlap. The above-mentioned switch control can also be changed to other forms of circuits to have a variety of flexible operation modes. In some preferred embodiments, the measurement The mode sequence and the recharge mode sequence can be carried out at the same time, and can also be partially overlapped or not overlapped.
图20B-20C类似图20A,差异仅在于图20B示出的是使用W2和R/C2进行测定并使用W1和R/C1进行回充的实施例;以及图20C示出的是使用W1和R/C2进行测定并使用 W2和R/C1进行回充的实施例。在某些较佳实施例中,定电压电路交替地切换至图20A和图20B并重复循环。在某些较佳实施例中,定电压电路交替地切换至图20A和图20C并重复循环。以上述方式,第一对电极R/C1和第二对电极R/C2可轮流被消耗及回充,以使这两个对电极上的AgCl都能保持在安全库存量之内。在某些较佳实施例中,定电压电路可具有第三电压源以控制回充电压差不同于测定电压差。Figures 20B-20C are similar to Figure 20A, the only difference is that Figure 20B shows an embodiment using W2 and R/C2 for measurement and W1 and R/C1 for refilling; and Figure 20C shows an embodiment using W1 and R /C2 is measured and W2 and R/C1 are used for refilling. In some preferred embodiments, the constant voltage circuit alternately switches to FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B and repeats the cycle. In some preferred embodiments, the constant voltage circuit alternately switches to FIG. 20A and FIG. 20C and repeats the cycle. In the above manner, the first pair of electrodes R/C1 and the second pair of electrodes R/C2 can be consumed and recharged in turn, so that the AgCl on the two pairs of electrodes can be kept within the safe inventory. In some preferred embodiments, the constant voltage circuit may have a third voltage source to control the recharge voltage difference to be different from the measured voltage difference.
通过控制电压差的施加和开关的切换,如图20A-20C所示出的定电压电路亦可交替进行测定模式和回充模式。图7A-7D分别示出该定电压电路以不同方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的电流示意图。如图所示,在多个测定期间Tl之间的是未进行测定的期间T2。在某些较佳实施例中,T2为固定值。图7A7D中横轴为时间,V1的线条表示测定电位差V1的施加和移除,V2的线条表示回充电位差V2的施加和移除。请参考图7A,在一较佳实施例中,V2和T2都是固定值,V2的施加时间t2(即回充期间)是变动值。回充期间t2是根据在测定模式所测得的生理信号Ia及测定期间T1而在0至T2之间动态调整。如图7A中所示,t2可为t2’、t2’’、或t2’’’…。换言之,回充期间t2可根据AgCl的消耗量而改变,若AgCl的消耗量大,则可回充较长的时间以使第一对电极R/C1上的AgCl保持在安全库存量之内。举例而言,在t2’’期间所回充的AgCl的量将大于t2’期间所回充的AgCl量。By controlling the application of the voltage difference and the switching of the switch, the constant voltage circuit shown in Figs. 20A-20C can also alternately perform the measurement mode and the recharge mode. 7A-7D respectively show the current schematic diagrams of the constant voltage circuit alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode in different ways. As shown in the figure, between a plurality of measurement periods T1 is a period T2 during which no measurement is performed. In some preferred embodiments, T2 is a fixed value. The horizontal axis in FIG. 7A7D represents time, the line of V1 represents the application and removal of the measured potential difference V1, and the line of V2 represents the application and removal of the recharge potential difference V2. Please refer to FIG. 7A. In a preferred embodiment, V2 and T2 are both fixed values, and the application time t2 of V2 (that is, the recharging period) is a variable value. The recharge period t2 is dynamically adjusted from 0 to T2 based on the physiological signal Ia measured in the measurement mode and the measurement period T1. As shown in FIG. 7A, t2 can be t2', t2', or t2''.... In other words, the recharge period t2 can be changed according to the consumption of AgCl. If the consumption of AgCl is large, it can be recharged for a longer time to keep the AgCl on the first pair of electrodes R/C1 within the safe inventory. For example, the amount of AgCl recharged during t2'' will be greater than the amount of AgCl recharged during t2'.
请参考图7B,在另一较佳实施例中,V2、T2和t2都是固定值,其中t2=T2。也就是说,测定模式和回充模式是无缝交替的,在未进行测定的期间即为回充期间。请参考图7C和7D,在某些较佳实施例中,V2、T2和t2都是固定值,其中t2为大于0且小于T2的固定值,例如t2=1/2的T2、2/5的T2、3/5的T2等。图7C和7D的差别在于,图7C中是在每次测定模式结束后,经历一段缓冲时间(缓冲时间=T2-t2),才开始回充模式;图7D中是每次测定模式结束后未经缓冲时间即立即开始回充模式,而在每次回充模式结束与下一次测定模式开始之间间隔一段时间。在某些较佳实施例中,t2小于T2,且t2可为T2期间的任何时间段。Please refer to FIG. 7B. In another preferred embodiment, V2, T2, and t2 are all fixed values, where t2=T2. In other words, the measurement mode and the recharge mode are seamlessly alternated, and the period during which no measurement is performed is the recharge period. Please refer to Figures 7C and 7D. In some preferred embodiments, V2, T2, and t2 are all fixed values, where t2 is a fixed value greater than 0 and less than T2, such as T2 = 1/2 of T2, 2/5 T2, 3/5 T2, etc. The difference between Fig. 7C and Fig. 7D is that in Fig. 7C, after each measurement mode is over, after a period of buffering time (buffer time=T2-t2), the recharge mode starts; The recharge mode starts immediately after the buffer time, and there is a period of time between the end of each recharge mode and the start of the next measurement mode. In some preferred embodiments, t2 is less than T2, and t2 can be any time period during T2.
请参考图7E和7F,其示出本发明的定电压电路以不同方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的电流示意图。图7E和7F中,横轴为时间,纵轴为电流,曲线表示所测定到的生理信号Ia换算而成的生理参数值曲线。在这两个实施例中,类似于图7A,V2和T2为固定值,回充期间t2是变动值。图7E和7F中,曲线下白色面积代表测定模式中AgCl的消耗量(Ia*Tl),斜线面积代表回充模式中AgCl的回充量(Ib*t2)。由图中可看出,为了使Ib*t2接近Ia*Tl或在Ia*Tl的某个范围内,回充期间t2是根据所测得的生理信号Ia 及测定期间T1而在0至T2之间动态调整。根据需要,可选择在未执行测定模式的期间(T2)的前段(如图7E所示)或后段(如图7F所示)进行回充模式。Please refer to FIGS. 7E and 7F, which show the current schematic diagrams of the constant voltage circuit of the present invention alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode in different ways. In FIGS. 7E and 7F, the horizontal axis is time and the vertical axis is current, and the curve represents the physiological parameter value curve converted from the measured physiological signal Ia. In these two embodiments, similar to FIG. 7A, V2 and T2 are fixed values, and t2 during the recharge period is a variable value. In Figures 7E and 7F, the white area under the curve represents the AgCl consumption in the measurement mode (Ia*Tl), and the oblique area represents the AgCl recharge in the recharge mode (Ib*t2). It can be seen from the figure that, in order to make Ib*t2 close to Ia*Tl or within a certain range of Ia*Tl, the refill period t2 is based on the measured physiological signal Ia and the measurement period T1 and is set between 0 and T2. Dynamic adjustment between time. According to needs, the recharging mode can be selected in the front part (as shown in FIG. 7E) or the back part (as shown in FIG. 7F) of the period (T2) in which the measurement mode is not performed.
有段切换的定电流电压施加应用Constant current and voltage application with segment switching
请参考图21,其示出本发明中可进行测定模式和回充模式的有段切换的定电流电路。有段切换的定电流电路重复循环进行测定模式与回充模式的方式与图20A类似,故于此不再赘述。主要差异在于回充模式可分别藉由施加回充电位差V2(V2为变动值)和移除回充电位差V2而开始和停止,而对应的电流以Ib表示。以回充模式执行于于第二工作电极W2与第二对电极R/C2为例,施加回充电位差V2于第二工作电极W2与第二对电极R/C2之间持续回充期间t2。此时开关S2、S3为闭路状态,开关S2和部分定电流电路61中的I_F1至I_Fn所对应的至少一个开关为闭路状态,第二工作电极W2为接地,第二对电极R/C2为+V2,以使第二对电极R/C2上的Ag进行氧化反应,而回充AgCl。本实施例中有段切换的定电流电路可通过控制I_F1至I_Fn所对应的多个开关,选择性切换至I_F1、I_F2、I_F3…I_Fn以调整所需的回充电位差V2并输出电流Ib。在回充模式时,可根据生理信号Ia的大小及测定期间T1,而经由调控回充电位差V2及其施加时间t2来控制AgCl的回充量。换言之,在第一或第二对电极R/C1或R/C2上的AgCl保持在安全库存量之内的前提下,可使回充量等于或不等于(包含约略相近、大于或小于)消耗量。在另一实施例中,部分定电流电路61可设置连接第二对电极R/C2。Please refer to FIG. 21, which shows a constant current circuit capable of segmented switching between the measurement mode and the recharge mode in the present invention. The method of the constant current circuit with segment switching to repeat the measurement mode and the recharge mode is similar to that of FIG. 20A, so it will not be repeated here. The main difference is that the recharging mode can be started and stopped by applying the recharging gap V2 (V2 is a variable value) and removing the recharging gap V2, and the corresponding current is represented by Ib. Taking the recharging mode executed on the second working electrode W2 and the second pair of electrodes R/C2 as an example, the recharging potential V2 is applied between the second working electrode W2 and the second pair of electrodes R/C2 for the recharging period t2 . At this time, the switches S2 and S3 are in the closed state, the switch S2 and at least one switch corresponding to I_F1 to I_Fn in the partial constant current circuit 61 are in the closed state, the second working electrode W2 is grounded, and the second pair of electrodes R/C2 is + V2, so that the Ag on the second pair of electrodes R/C2 undergoes an oxidation reaction, and AgCl is backfilled. The constant current circuit with segment switching in this embodiment can selectively switch to I_F1, I_F2, I_F3...I_Fn by controlling multiple switches corresponding to I_F1 to I_Fn to adjust the required recharge level difference V2 and output the current Ib. In the recharging mode, the recharging amount of AgCl can be controlled by adjusting the recharging level difference V2 and its application time t2 according to the magnitude of the physiological signal Ia and the measurement period T1. In other words, under the premise that the AgCl on the first or second pair of electrodes R/C1 or R/C2 is kept within the safety inventory, the recharge amount can be equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) consumption quantity. In another embodiment, part of the constant current circuit 61 may be configured to connect to the second pair of electrodes R/C2.
无段切换的定电流电压施加应用Application of constant current and voltage without segment switching
请参考图22,其示出本发明中可进行测定模式和回充模式的无段切换的定电流电路。无段切换的定电流电路的测定模式与图20A-20C类似,回充模式与图21类似,故于此不再赘述。图22与图21的实施例之差异仅在图22的定电流电路中,无段切换的部分定电流电路71是藉由数字模拟转换器(DAC)的控制而输出固定电流Ib。Please refer to FIG. 22, which shows a constant current circuit capable of stepless switching between the measurement mode and the recharge mode in the present invention. The measurement mode of the constant current circuit with stepless switching is similar to that of Figs. 20A-20C, and the recharging mode is similar to that of Fig. 21, so it will not be repeated here. The difference between the embodiment of FIG. 22 and FIG. 21 is only that in the constant current circuit of FIG. 22, the part of the constant current circuit 71 with stepless switching is controlled by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC) to output a fixed current Ib.
请参考图10A-10C,其示出本发明的定电流电路以不同方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的电压示意图。图10A-10C中横轴为时间,V1的线条表示测定电位差V1的施加和移除,V2的线条表示回充电位差V2的施加和移除。请参考图10A,在一较佳实施例中,T2是固定值,V2和V2的施加时间t2(即回充期间)是变动值。回充期间t2是根据在测定模式所测得的生理信号Ia及测定期间T1而在0至T2之间动态调整。如图10A中所示,t2可为t2’、t2’’、或t2’’’…。换言之,回充期间t2可根据AgCl的消耗量而改变,若AgCl的消耗量大,则可回充较长的时间以使第一对电极R/C1上的AgCl保持在安全库存量之内。Please refer to FIGS. 10A-10C, which show the voltage schematic diagrams of the constant current circuit of the present invention alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode in different ways. The horizontal axis in FIGS. 10A-10C represents time, the line of V1 represents the application and removal of the measured potential difference V1, and the line of V2 represents the application and removal of the recharge potential difference V2. Please refer to FIG. 10A. In a preferred embodiment, T2 is a fixed value, and the application time t2 of V2 and V2 (that is, the recharging period) is a variable value. The recharge period t2 is dynamically adjusted from 0 to T2 based on the physiological signal Ia measured in the measurement mode and the measurement period T1. As shown in FIG. 10A, t2 can be t2', t2'', or t2'''... In other words, the recharge period t2 can be changed according to the consumption of AgCl. If the consumption of AgCl is large, it can be recharged for a longer time to keep the AgCl on the first pair of electrodes R/C1 within the safe inventory.
请参考图10B,在另一较佳实施例中,V2是变动值,T2和t2都是固定值,其中t2为大于0且小于T2的固定值,例如t2=1/2的T2、2/5的T2、3/7的T2等。在此实施例中,V2是根据于生理信号测定步骤(即在测定模式中)的AgCl的消耗量而动态调整。动态调整方式的其中一个实施例如下。使用例如上述的有段切换的定电流电路,该电路具有n个固定电流源与n个开关,各固定电流源分别对应一个开关。于回充模式时,依据AgCl的消耗量,选择开启n个开关中的至少一个开关(即使该开关处于闭路状态)以输出固定电流值。在回充期间t2为固定值的情况下,可以藉由选择不同的固定电流输出来控制AgCl的回充量。Please refer to FIG. 10B. In another preferred embodiment, V2 is a variable value, and T2 and t2 are both fixed values, where t2 is a fixed value greater than 0 and less than T2, such as T2 = 1/2 of T2, 2/ 5 T2, 3/7 T2, etc. In this embodiment, V2 is dynamically adjusted according to the consumption of AgCl in the physiological signal measurement step (that is, in the measurement mode). One example of the dynamic adjustment method is as follows. For example, the above-mentioned constant current circuit with segment switching is used. The circuit has n fixed current sources and n switches, and each fixed current source corresponds to a switch. In the recharge mode, according to the consumption of AgCl, at least one of the n switches is selected to be turned on (even if the switch is in a closed state) to output a fixed current value. When the recharge period t2 is a fixed value, the recharge amount of AgCl can be controlled by selecting different fixed current outputs.
请参考图10C,在另一较佳实施例中,V2是变动值,T2和t2都是固定值,其中t2=T2。也就是说,测定模式和回充模式是无缝交替的,在未进行测定的期间即为回充期间。Please refer to FIG. 10C. In another preferred embodiment, V2 is a variable value, and T2 and t2 are both fixed values, where t2=T2. In other words, the measurement mode and the recharge mode are seamlessly alternated, and the period during which no measurement is performed is the recharge period.
相较于无段切换的定电流电路,有段切换的定电流电路可通过多个开关控制多个电流路径,而得以根据所需的电流量以分段式的定电流进行回充,以此方式较为省电且可以降低成本。此外,不管是定电压电路或定电流电路,电位差可以来自直流电源或交流电源,较佳为直流电源。Compared with a constant current circuit with no segment switching, a constant current circuit with segment switching can control multiple current paths through multiple switches, and can recharge with a segmented constant current according to the amount of current required. The method is more power-efficient and can reduce costs. In addition, whether it is a constant voltage circuit or a constant current circuit, the potential difference can come from a DC power source or an AC power source, preferably a DC power source.
图7A-7F、图21-22以及图10A-10C的实施例都是描述测定步骤和回充步骤交替循环的操作方式,亦即每个测定步骤之间都有一个AgCl回充步骤,此方式可较佳地确保AgCl保持在安全库存量之内。然而,在某些较佳实施例中,亦可在进行N次的测定期间选择性搭配Y次的AgCl回充,其中Y≤N,使AgCl的累积回充量仍可保持在安全库存范围内。测定步骤和回充步骤也不必然需要以交替循环的方式进行,亦可于数次测定步骤后再进行一次回充步骤,或是在预定的测定时间之后,才进行一次回充步骤。举例而言,可于测定10次后再进行一次回充步骤,或可于累积测定时间达1小时后才进行一次回充步骤。The embodiments of Figures 7A-7F, Figures 21-22, and Figures 10A-10C all describe the alternate cycle of the measurement step and the refilling step, that is, there is an AgCl refilling step between each measurement step. This method It can better ensure that AgCl remains within the safety stock. However, in some preferred embodiments, Y times of AgCl recharge can also be selectively matched during N measurements, where Y≤N, so that the cumulative recharge of AgCl can still be kept within the safety stock range. . The measurement step and the refilling step do not necessarily need to be performed in an alternating cycle, and the refilling step may be performed again after several measurement steps, or the refilling step may be performed only after a predetermined measurement time. For example, the refilling step can be performed again after 10 measurements, or the refilling step can be performed only after the cumulative measurement time reaches 1 hour.
请参考图10D,其示出本发明的定电流电路以类似图10C的方式交替进行测定模式和回充模式的示意图。图10D中,曲线表示所测定到的生理信号Ia所转换成的生理参数值曲线,且类似于图10C,T2和t2都是固定值,V2是变动值。图10D中,曲线下白色面积代表测定模式中AgCl的消耗量(Ia*Tl),斜线面积代表回充模式中AgCl的回充量(Ib*t2)。由图中可看出,为了使Ib*t2接近Ia*Tl或在Ia*Tl的某个范围内,回充电位差V2是是根据AgCl的消耗量而动态调整。Please refer to FIG. 10D, which shows a schematic diagram of the constant current circuit of the present invention alternately performing the measurement mode and the recharge mode in a manner similar to FIG. 10C. In FIG. 10D, the curve represents the physiological parameter value curve converted into the measured physiological signal Ia, and similar to FIG. 10C, T2 and t2 are both fixed values, and V2 is a variable value. In Figure 10D, the white area under the curve represents the consumption of AgCl in the measurement mode (Ia*Tl), and the slanted area represents the recharge volume of AgCl in the recharge mode (Ib*t2). It can be seen from the figure that in order to make Ib*t2 close to Ia*Tl or within a certain range of Ia*Tl, the recharge position difference V2 is dynamically adjusted according to the consumption of AgCl.
另外图7E、7F及图10D中,虽未显示每次执行生理信号测定步骤后所输出各生理 参数值输出时机点,但生理参数值不限于完成测定时输出或于在回充期间内输出,而AgCl回充步骤不限于在每一个生理参数输出后执行或获得生理信号后执行。In addition, in Figures 7E, 7F and Figure 10D, although the output timing of each physiological parameter value output after each physiological signal measurement step is performed is not shown, the physiological parameter value is not limited to the output when the measurement is completed or during the recharge period. The AgCl refilling step is not limited to being executed after each physiological parameter is output or after the physiological signal is obtained.
在前述使用本发明的定电流或定电压电路交替进行测定模式和回充模式的实施例中,在测定模式和回充模式中所使用的工作电极都可为第一工作电极W1和第二工作电极W2的任一者,在测定模式中所使用的对电极亦可为第一对电极R/C1和第二对电极R/C2的任一者,然而在回充模式中所使用的对电极较佳为前一次测定模式中所使用的对电极。以下说明两个示例性实施例。实施例1依时间先后进行:(a)使用W1/W2(表示W1和W2其一者)及R/C1测定、(b)使用W1/W2另一者及R/C1回充、(c)使用W1/W2其一者及R/C2测定、(d)使用W1/W2另一者及R/C2回充、重复执行步骤(a)-(d)。实施例2依时间先后重复执行步骤(a)、(b)、(a)、(b)、(c)、(d)、(c)、(d)。In the foregoing embodiment in which the constant current or constant voltage circuit of the present invention is used to alternately perform the measurement mode and the recharge mode, the working electrodes used in the measurement mode and the recharge mode can be the first working electrode W1 and the second working electrode W1. For any of the electrodes W2, the counter electrode used in the measurement mode can also be either the first pair of electrodes R/C1 and the second pair of electrodes R/C2, but the counter electrode used in the recharge mode Preferably, it is the counter electrode used in the previous measurement mode. Two exemplary embodiments are described below. Example 1 is carried out in chronological order: (a) use W1/W2 (representing one of W1 and W2) and R/C1 measurement, (b) use the other W1/W2 and R/C1 recharge, (c) Use one of W1/W2 and R/C2 to measure, (d) use the other W1/W2 and R/C2 to recharge, repeat steps (a)-(d). In Embodiment 2, steps (a), (b), (a), (b), (c), (d), (c), (d) are repeatedly executed in chronological order.
请参考图23A和23B,其示出本发明的定电流或定电压电路同时进行测定模式和回充模式的不同实施例的示意图。图23A和23B中横轴为时间,V1的线条表示测定电位差V1的施加和移除,V2的线条表示回充电位差V2的施加和移除。由于本发明中有两个对电极及两个工作电极,故测定步骤和回充步骤可同时进行。图23A的实施例中,由第一工作电极W1与第一对电极R/C1形成的第一组合和第二工作电极W2与第二对电极R/C2形成的第二组合轮流进行测定和回充步骤。亦即,第一组合用于进行测定步骤时,第二组合用于进行回充步骤,反之亦然。图23B的实施例中,第一工作电极W1固定用于测定步骤,第二工作电极W2固定用于回充步骤,而两个对电极则是在测定步骤和回充步骤之间轮流使用。在某些较佳实施例中,多个T1彼此不重迭。在某些较佳实施例中,多个t2彼此不重迭。在某些较佳实施例中,T1和t2重迭(表示同时间开始和结束)或部分重迭。图23A和23B示出第一次进行测定(使用R/C1)时未同时伴随回充步骤,第二次进行测定(使用R/C2)时才同时进行回充(回充R/C1)。然而,亦可于第一次进行测定(使用R/C1)时即同时伴随回充步骤(回充R/C2)。Please refer to FIGS. 23A and 23B, which show schematic diagrams of different embodiments in which the constant current or constant voltage circuit of the present invention performs the measurement mode and the recharge mode at the same time. The horizontal axis in FIGS. 23A and 23B is time, the line of V1 represents the application and removal of the measured potential difference V1, and the line of V2 represents the application and removal of the recharge potential difference V2. Since there are two counter electrodes and two working electrodes in the present invention, the measuring step and the recharging step can be performed at the same time. In the embodiment of FIG. 23A, the first combination formed by the first working electrode W1 and the first pair of electrodes R/C1 and the second combination formed by the second working electrode W2 and the second pair of electrodes R/C2 alternately perform measurement and return. Filling steps. That is, when the first combination is used for the measurement step, the second combination is used for the refill step, and vice versa. In the embodiment of FIG. 23B, the first working electrode W1 is fixed for the measuring step, the second working electrode W2 is fixed for the recharging step, and the two counter electrodes are used alternately between the measuring step and the recharging step. In some preferred embodiments, multiple T1s do not overlap with each other. In some preferred embodiments, multiple t2s do not overlap with each other. In some preferred embodiments, T1 and t2 overlap (meaning that they start and end at the same time) or partially overlap. Figures 23A and 23B show that the first measurement (using R/C1) is not accompanied by the refilling step, and the second measurement (using R/C2) is performed at the same time (refilling R/C1). However, it can also be accompanied by the refilling step (refilling R/C2) at the first measurement (using R/C1).
请参考图11,其示出根据本发明一实施例的测定待分析物的方法,通过该方法可延长微型生物传感器的使用寿命。该微型生物传感器可为例如图18A-18C及图19A-19C所示的微型生物传感器,用于植入皮下以测定与生物流体(例如组织液)中的该待分析物所关联的生理参数的生理信号。在图9的实施例中,该待分析物可为组织液中的葡萄糖,生理参数为人体中的葡萄糖值(或浓度),生理信号为微型生物传感器量得的电流值。此实施例中,测定待分析物的方法包含反复循环地执行测定步骤(S901)及回充步骤(S902)。测定步骤(S901)包含使用前述定电压或定电流电路 于测定期间T1执行如前述的测定模式以输出生理信号(即电流值),同时对电极的AgCl具有对应于该电流值的消耗量。测定步骤(S901)还包含通过停止如前述的测定模式来停Please refer to FIG. 11, which shows a method for determining an analyte according to an embodiment of the present invention, by which the service life of the micro biosensor can be prolonged. The miniature biosensor can be, for example, the miniature biosensor shown in FIGS. 18A-18C and 19A-19C, which is used to be implanted subcutaneously to measure the physiological parameters associated with the analyte in the biological fluid (for example, tissue fluid). Signal. In the embodiment of FIG. 9, the analyte may be glucose in tissue fluid, the physiological parameter is the glucose value (or concentration) in the human body, and the physiological signal is the current value measured by the micro biosensor. In this embodiment, the method for measuring the analyte includes repeatedly executing the measuring step (S901) and the refilling step (S902). The measurement step (S901) includes using the aforementioned constant voltage or constant current circuit to perform the aforementioned measurement mode during the measurement period T1 to output a physiological signal (i.e., current value), and at the same time, the AgCl of the counter electrode has a consumption amount corresponding to the current value. The measurement step (S901) also includes stopping the measurement mode as described above.
以下实施例是针对N次测定步骤(S901)及N次回充步骤(S902)的循环,其中所提到的生理参数较佳是葡萄糖值,所提到的生理信号较佳是电流值。根据某些较佳实施例,各测定电位差V1于测定期间T1被施加,各回充电位差V2于回充期间t2被施加,且测定期间T1为固定值,其可为3秒内、5秒内、10秒内、15秒内、30秒内、1分钟内、2分钟内、5分钟内或10分钟内的一时间值。根据某些较佳实施例,较佳为30秒内的时间值。根据某些较佳实施例,测定期间T1为固定值,且可为2.5秒、5秒、15秒、30秒、1分钟、2.5分钟、5分钟、10分钟或30分钟,较佳为30秒。根据某些较佳实施例,各测定期间T1加上各回充期间t2为固定值。根据某些较佳实施例,各回充电位差V2具有固定电压值,各回充期间t2是根据AgCl的每次消耗量而动态调整(如图7A所示)。根据某些较佳实施例,输出的各生理参数是经由各测定期间T1中的一个单一测定时间点的各生理信号运算而获得。根据某些较佳实施例,输出的各生理参数是经由各测定期间T1中的多个测定时间点的多个生理信号的一数学运算值运算而获得。前述数学运算值为例如累加值、平均值、中位数、中位数的平均值等。根据某些较佳实施例,藉由控制每次回充量为等于或不等于(包含约略相近、大于或小于)每次消耗量,而控制对电极之AgCl量在安全库存区间内,而使下一测定步骤时所获得的下一生理信号与下一生理参数保持稳定的比例关系。根据某些较佳实施例,移除各测定电位差V1的步骤是将配置于连通工作电极及对电极之电路断路、或设定各测定电位差V1为0。换言之,可进行断电,以使测定电路具有开路状态;或者,可施加0伏特电压于工作电极及对电极之间,其中该两项操作其中任一操作的操作时间皆为0.01~0.5秒。移除测定电位差V1的步骤可避免Λ形的生理信号产生。根据某些较佳实施例,移除各回充电位差V2的步骤是将配置于连通工作电极及对电极之电路断路、或设定各回充电位差V2为0。The following embodiments are directed to the cycle of N measurement steps (S901) and N refill steps (S902), wherein the physiological parameter mentioned is preferably the glucose value, and the physiological signal mentioned is preferably the current value. According to some preferred embodiments, each measurement potential difference V1 is applied during the measurement period T1, each recharge level difference V2 is applied during the recharge period t2, and the measurement period T1 is a fixed value, which can be within 3 seconds, 5 seconds Within, within 10 seconds, within 15 seconds, within 30 seconds, within 1 minute, within 2 minutes, within 5 minutes, or within 10 minutes. According to some preferred embodiments, the time value is preferably within 30 seconds. According to some preferred embodiments, the measurement period T1 is a fixed value, and can be 2.5 seconds, 5 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2.5 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes or 30 minutes, preferably 30 seconds . According to some preferred embodiments, each measurement period T1 plus each recharge period t2 is a fixed value. According to some preferred embodiments, each recharge level difference V2 has a fixed voltage value, and each recharge period t2 is dynamically adjusted according to each consumption of AgCl (as shown in FIG. 7A). According to some preferred embodiments, the output physiological parameters are obtained by calculating the physiological signals at a single measurement time point in each measurement period T1. According to some preferred embodiments, the output physiological parameters are obtained through a mathematical operation of a plurality of physiological signals at a plurality of measurement time points in each measurement period T1. The aforementioned mathematical operation value is, for example, the accumulated value, the average value, the median, the average value of the median, and so on. According to some preferred embodiments, by controlling the amount of each refill to be equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) each consumption, and controlling the amount of AgCl of the counter electrode within the safety stock interval, the lower The next physiological signal obtained in a determination step maintains a stable proportional relationship with the next physiological parameter. According to some preferred embodiments, the step of removing each measured potential difference V1 is to disconnect the circuit that connects the working electrode and the counter electrode, or set each measured potential difference V1 to zero. In other words, the power can be turned off to make the measuring circuit have an open state; or, a 0 volt voltage can be applied between the working electrode and the counter electrode, wherein the operation time of either of the two operations is 0.01 to 0.5 seconds. Removing the step of measuring the potential difference V1 can avoid the generation of Λ-shaped physiological signals. According to some preferred embodiments, the step of removing each regenerative level difference V2 is to disconnect the circuit that connects the working electrode and the counter electrode, or set each regenerative level difference V2 to zero.
根据某些较佳实施例,传感器植入人体后需经过暖机时间,使传感器在体内达到平衡稳定才能稳定呈现与分析物浓度呈正相关的生理信号。因此,在测定步骤(S901)持续施加测定电压直至测定期间T1结束,并控制该测定期间T1以使得生理信号与分析物的生理参数达到稳定的比例关系。因此,测定期间T1可为变动值或为变动值和固定值的组合(例如变动值+固定值,该变动值可为1小时、2小时、3小时、6小时、12小时或24小时,该固定值可为例如30秒)。According to some preferred embodiments, after the sensor is implanted in the human body, a warm-up time is required to allow the sensor to reach equilibrium and stability in the body in order to stably present a physiological signal that is positively correlated with the concentration of the analyte. Therefore, in the measurement step (S901), the measurement voltage is continuously applied until the measurement period T1 ends, and the measurement period T1 is controlled so that the physiological signal and the physiological parameter of the analyte reach a stable proportional relationship. Therefore, the measurement period T1 can be a variable value or a combination of a variable value and a fixed value (for example, a variable value + a fixed value. The variable value can be 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, or 24 hours. The fixed value may be, for example, 30 seconds).
请参考图7A-7F、图10A-10D及图11,本发明利用施加电压于对电极R/C来测定一期间内对电极之反应电流,并经由将该期间内反应电流经数学运算而得知AgCl初始容量,例如通过计算反应电流曲线下的面积以定义AgCl初始容量,又称初始量或初始库伦量(C initial),以下皆以量来说明。对电极R/C包含Ag和AgCl,当得知AgCl的百分比(X%AgCl)时,即可算出Ag百分比(Y%Ag=100%-X%AgCl)。于每次测定步骤(S901)中通过计算工作电极W的电流曲线下的面积来定义每次AgCl的消耗量(以C consume表示)。对电极R/C的AgCl具有对应于该生理信号Ia的消耗量C consume,即C consume=Ia*T1。于每次回充步骤(S902)中,通过计算对电极R/C的电流曲线下的面积来定义每次AgCl的回充量(以C replenish表示),即C replenish=Ib*t2,t2介于0~T2之间。 Please refer to FIGS. 7A-7F, FIGS. 10A-10D and FIG. 11. The present invention uses voltage applied to the counter electrode R/C to measure the reaction current of the counter electrode in a period, and the reaction current in the period is calculated by mathematical operation. Knowing the initial capacity of AgCl, for example, by calculating the area under the reaction current curve to define the initial capacity of AgCl, also known as the initial amount or initial coulombic amount (C initial ), the following are all explained by the amount. The counter electrode R/C contains Ag and AgCl. When the percentage of AgCl (X%AgCl) is known, the percentage of Ag can be calculated (Y%Ag=100%-X%AgCl). In each measurement step (S901), the consumption of AgCl (expressed as C consume ) is defined by calculating the area under the current curve of the working electrode W. The AgCl of the counter electrode R/C has a consumption C consume corresponding to the physiological signal Ia, that is, C consume = Ia*T1. In each recharge step (S902), the area under the current curve of the counter electrode R/C is calculated to define the recharge amount of AgCl each time ( indicated by C replenish ), that is, C replenish = Ib*t2, and t2 is between Between 0 and T2.
以下描述AgCl安全库存量的计算方法。在某些较佳实施例中,安全库存区间是以Ag与AgCl的比例呈现,本发明是以于对电极测定到的库伦量(C)以反映Ag与AgCl的比例关系。在某些较佳实施例中,Ag与AgCl的比例为99.9%:0.1%、99%:1%、95%:5%、90%:10%、70%:30%、50%:50%、40%:60%或30:70%,使AgCl在对电极上具备一程度上的量而不会被消耗殆尽,让每次生理信号测定步骤皆能稳定执行。AgCl的剩余量为回充量与初始量的和减去消耗量。在某些较佳实施例中,AgCl的剩余量在一区间范围内变动,亦即AgCl的剩余量被控制在初始量加减特定值(X值)的范围内,即(C replenish+C initial)-C consume=C initial±X,其中0<X<100%C initial、10%C initial<X≤90%C initial、或0.5%C initial<X≤50%C initial。在某些较佳实施例中,AgCl的剩余量可在一区间范围内逐渐下降、逐渐上升、或是平稳变动或任意变动但仍于该区间范围内。 The following describes the calculation method of AgCl safety stock. In some preferred embodiments, the safety stock interval is represented by the ratio of Ag to AgCl. The present invention uses the coulombic amount (C) measured on the counter electrode to reflect the ratio of Ag to AgCl. In some preferred embodiments, the ratio of Ag to AgCl is 99.9%: 0.1%, 99%: 1%, 95%: 5%, 90%: 10%, 70%: 30%, 50%: 50% , 40%: 60% or 30: 70%, so that AgCl has a certain amount on the counter electrode without being exhausted, so that each physiological signal measurement step can be performed stably. The remaining amount of AgCl is the sum of the refill amount and the initial amount minus the consumption. In some preferred embodiments, the remaining amount of AgCl varies within an interval, that is, the remaining amount of AgCl is controlled within the range of the initial amount plus or minus a specific value (X value), that is, (C replenish + C initial )-C consume =C initial ±X, where 0<X<100%C initial , 10%C initial <X≤90%C initial , or 0.5%C initial <X≤50%C initial . In some preferred embodiments, the remaining amount of AgCl may gradually decrease, gradually increase, or change steadily or arbitrarily within an interval, but still within the interval.
请参考图12,其示出根据本发明另一实施例的测定待分析物的方法,通过该方法不但可延长微型生物传感器的使用寿命并且能缩减对电极之银及卤化银材料用量。该微型生物传感器可为例如图18A-18C及图19A-19C所示的微型生物传感器,用于植入皮下以测定与生物流体(例如组织液)中的该待分析物所关联的生理参数的生理信号。该微型生物传感器的对电极的电极材料包括银及卤化银,在图12的实施例中,该待分析物可为组织液中的葡萄糖,生理参数为人体中的葡萄糖值,生理信号为微型生物传感器量得的电流值。以下仅描述此实施例的2个循环。此实施例的方法始于以下步骤:于第一测定期间施加测定电压以驱动第一或第二工作电极W1/W2,以测定用以获得生理参数的生理信号,其中第一或第二对电极R/C1或R/C2(假设为第一对电极R/C1)的卤化银被消耗一消耗量(S1101)。Please refer to FIG. 12, which shows a method for determining an analyte according to another embodiment of the present invention. By this method, the service life of the micro biosensor can be prolonged and the amount of silver and silver halide materials in the counter electrode can be reduced. The miniature biosensor can be, for example, the miniature biosensor shown in FIGS. 18A-18C and 19A-19C, which is used to be implanted subcutaneously to measure the physiological parameters associated with the analyte in the biological fluid (for example, tissue fluid). Signal. The electrode material of the counter electrode of the micro biosensor includes silver and silver halide. In the embodiment of FIG. 12, the analyte can be glucose in tissue fluid, the physiological parameter is the glucose value in the human body, and the physiological signal is the micro biosensor. The measured current value. Only 2 cycles of this embodiment are described below. The method of this embodiment starts with the following steps: during the first measurement period, the measurement voltage is applied to drive the first or second working electrode W1/W2 to measure the physiological signal used to obtain the physiological parameter, wherein the first or second pair of electrodes The silver halide of R/C1 or R/C2 (assuming the first pair of electrodes R/C1) is consumed by a consumption amount (S1101).
接着停止施加测定电压(S1102),并利用所获得的生理信号来获得生理参数(S1103)。获得生理参数后,于第一回充期间施加回充电压以驱动在S1101中使用而具有该消耗量的对电极(即第一对电极R/C1),从而使卤化银的量被回充一回充量(S1104),其中回充量与初始量的和减去消耗量的值(即前文所述的剩余量)被控制在初始量加减特定值的范围内。上述控制步骤是藉由控制回充量等于或不等于(包含约略相近、大于或小于)消耗量来达成,以维持卤化银的量在安全库存区间内。根据反应式,卤化银的摩尔数增减对应银的摩尔数增减,故为了便于说明,卤化银的消耗量对应模拟的银的增加量。在某些较佳实施例中,剩余量的值被控制成使得卤化银的量与银的量加上卤化银的量的和(AgCl/Ag+AgCl)的比值是大于0且小于1,亦即对电极的卤化银有一个量即可,较佳为介于0.01-0.99之间、介于0.1-0.9之间、介于0.2-0.8之间、介于0.3-0.7之间或介于0.4-0.6之间。在达到该回充量时停止施加回充电压(S1105)。之后再回至步骤S1101,于第二测定期间施加测定电压以驱动第一或第二工作电极W1/W2,以测定用以获得另一生理参数的另一生理信号,其中另一个对电极(即第二对电极R/C2)的卤化银被消耗一消耗量。接着停止施加测定电压(S1102),并利用所获得的生理信号来获得生理参数(S1103)。获得生理参数后,于第二回充期间施加回充电压以驱动在S1101中使用而具有该消耗量的对电极(即第二对电极R/C2),从而使卤化银的量被回充一回充量(S1104)。之后再循环至步骤S1001执行下一个循环。Then, the application of the measurement voltage is stopped (S1102), and the obtained physiological signal is used to obtain the physiological parameter (S1103). After the physiological parameters are obtained, the recharge voltage is applied during the first recharge period to drive the counter electrode used in S1101 with the consumption (ie the first pair of electrodes R/C1), so that the amount of silver halide is recharged. The recharge amount (S1104), wherein the value of the sum of the recharge amount and the initial amount minus the consumption amount (that is, the remaining amount mentioned above) is controlled within the range of the initial amount plus or minus a specific value. The above-mentioned control steps are achieved by controlling the refilling amount to be equal to or not equal to (including approximately similar, greater than or less than) the consumption, so as to maintain the amount of silver halide within the safety stock range. According to the reaction formula, the increase or decrease of the number of moles of silver halide corresponds to the increase or decrease of the number of moles of silver, so for the convenience of explanation, the consumption of silver halide corresponds to the increase of simulated silver. In some preferred embodiments, the value of the remaining amount is controlled such that the ratio of the amount of silver halide to the amount of silver plus the amount of silver halide (AgCl/Ag+AgCl) is greater than 0 and less than 1, also That is, there is only one amount of silver halide in the counter electrode, preferably between 0.01-0.99, between 0.1-0.9, between 0.2-0.8, between 0.3-0.7, or between 0.4- Between 0.6. When the recharge amount is reached, the application of the recharge voltage is stopped (S1105). Then return to step S1101. During the second measurement period, the measurement voltage is applied to drive the first or second working electrode W1/W2 to measure another physiological signal for obtaining another physiological parameter, and the other counter electrode (ie The silver halide of the second pair of electrodes R/C2) is consumed by a consumption amount. Then, the application of the measurement voltage is stopped (S1102), and the obtained physiological signal is used to obtain the physiological parameter (S1103). After the physiological parameters are obtained, the recharge voltage is applied during the second recharge period to drive the counter electrode used in S1101 with the consumption (ie the second pair of electrodes R/C2), so that the amount of silver halide is recharged. Recharge amount (S1104). Then it loops to step S1001 to execute the next loop.
以下描述本发明的一具体实施例,以生物传感器使用寿命须达到16天作为示例以计算所需电极信号感测段Ag/AgCl材料尺寸之方法,例如每次测量的待分析物平均测定电流为30nA、测定期间(T1)为30秒、且回充期间(t2)为30秒。每天所需AgCl的消耗量(C consume/day)=1.3mC/天。假设传感器使用寿命的需求为16天,则使用16天所需AgCl的消耗量为1.3x 16=20.8mC。 A specific embodiment of the present invention will be described below. A method for calculating the size of the Ag/AgCl material of the electrode signal sensing section is taken as an example with a biosensor service life of 16 days. For example, the average measured current of the analyte for each measurement is 30 nA, the measurement period (T1) is 30 seconds, and the recharge period (t2) is 30 seconds. The daily consumption of AgCl (C consume/day )=1.3mC/day. Assuming that the service life requirement of the sensor is 16 days, the consumption of AgCl required for 16 days is 1.3×16=20.8mC.
例如对电极的长度为2.5mm,其对应AgCl初始量C intial=10mC; For example, the length of the counter electrode is 2.5mm, which corresponds to the initial amount of AgCl C intial = 10mC;
在无执行AgCl的回充的情况下,针对传感器使用寿命16天,对电极需要的长度至少为:Without performing AgCl recharging, for the sensor service life of 16 days, the required length of the counter electrode is at least:
C 16day/C consume/day=20.8mC/1.3mg/day=16mm C 16day /C consume/day= 20.8mC/1.3mg/day=16mm
故在无使用本发明卤化银的回充方法的情况下,对电极的长度需超出16mm才能使传感器寿命达16天。Therefore, without using the silver halide recharging method of the present invention, the length of the counter electrode needs to exceed 16 mm in order to make the sensor life up to 16 days.
于本实施例中,在无使用本发明之卤化银的回充技术情况下,对电极信号感测段需配置相对应较大的Ag/AgCl材料尺寸才能达到16天的传感器寿命。通过本发明卤化 银的回充方法,于两次测定步骤之间进行卤化银的回充步骤,该卤化银的消耗与回充可在短时间内重复循环(即用即充),故可缩减传感器中的Ag/AgCl材料用量,进而使传感器微型化,因此对电极信号感测段材料不需准备16天份的AgCl的容量以供消耗。例如,大约准备1~2天份AgCl的容量即可使用传感器达16天,由此达到延长传感器使用寿命之功效。1~2天份的AgCl的容量亦指于出厂前或执行第一次测定前的对电极所具有例如在约1.3~2.6mC之间的AgCl的初始量,该初始量亦可为其他更小或更大的范围。于其他实施例中亦可准备1~5天份、1~3天份、6~24小时、6~12小时等不同的AgCl容量。对电极信号感测段的材料尺寸只要具备让每次葡萄糖测定步骤皆能稳定执行、使测定电流能与体内的葡萄糖浓度呈现正相关性的容量即可。In this embodiment, without using the silver halide recharging technology of the present invention, the counter electrode signal sensing section needs to be equipped with a correspondingly larger Ag/AgCl material size to achieve the sensor life of 16 days. Through the silver halide recharging method of the present invention, the silver halide recharging step is performed between the two measurement steps. The consumption and recharging of the silver halide can be repeated in a short period of time (recharge when used), so it can be reduced The amount of Ag/AgCl material in the sensor further miniaturizes the sensor, so there is no need to prepare 16 days of AgCl capacity for the electrode signal sensing section material for consumption. For example, by preparing the capacity of AgCl for about 1 to 2 days, the sensor can be used for 16 days, thereby achieving the effect of extending the service life of the sensor. The capacity of AgCl for 1 to 2 days also refers to the initial amount of AgCl in the counter electrode before leaving the factory or before performing the first measurement, for example, between about 1.3 and 2.6 mC. The initial amount can also be other smaller Or a larger range. In other embodiments, different AgCl capacities may be prepared for 1 to 5 days, 1 to 3 days, 6 to 24 hours, and 6 to 12 hours. The material size of the signal sensing section of the counter electrode only needs to have the capacity to enable the stable execution of each glucose measurement step and the positive correlation between the measurement current and the glucose concentration in the body.
若在无使用本发明之氯化银的回充技术情况下,先前技术会通过增加电极长度/面积使传感器达到所需天数需求。以先前技术为例,传感器植入端长度约为12mm,因植入长度长,而为了避免植入深达皮下组织,需以斜角方式植入皮下,其植入伤口较大。另外举例来说,1~2天份的AgCl的容量约在1.3~2.6mC之间,换算该1~2天的对电极长度为2.5~5mm,其相较于无使用本发明卤化银的回充方法的情况下需要16mm的对电极长度,更加凸显本发明能有效缩减所需对电极尺寸。通过本发明卤化银的回充方法,可缩短植入端长度,例如使长度缩减为不大于10mm。于本发明图18A-18C所揭示的微型生物传感器400的连接区域417的下半部分至第二端414属于短植入端418(如图18A及18B所示),且短植入端418植入深度需至少满足到真皮层可测定到组织液葡萄糖的深度,通过本发明卤化银的回充方法,短植入端418的最长边不大于6mm,以使微型生物传感器400能以垂直于生物体表皮的方式被部分植入于生物体表皮下。短植入端418的最长边较佳为不大于5mm、4.5mm、3.5mm或2.5mm。本发明的短植入端418包含第三信号感测段442及第四信号感测段452,且第三信号感测段442及第四信号感测段452的最长边不大于6mm,较佳为2-6mm、2-5mm、2-4.5mm、2-3.5mm、0.5-2mm、0.2-1mm。If the silver chloride recharging technology of the present invention is not used, the prior art will increase the electrode length/area so that the sensor can meet the required number of days. Taking the prior art as an example, the length of the implanted end of the sensor is about 12mm. Due to the long implantation length, in order to avoid implanting deep into the subcutaneous tissue, it needs to be implanted under the skin at an oblique angle, and the implantation wound is relatively large. In addition, for example, the capacity of AgCl for 1 to 2 days is about 1.3 to 2.6 mC, and the length of the counter electrode for 1 to 2 days is 2.5 to 5 mm, which is compared with that without the silver halide of the present invention. In the case of the charging method, a length of the counter electrode of 16 mm is required, which further highlights that the present invention can effectively reduce the size of the required counter electrode. Through the silver halide refilling method of the present invention, the length of the implanted end can be shortened, for example, the length is reduced to no more than 10 mm. The lower half of the connection area 417 of the micro biosensor 400 disclosed in FIGS. 18A-18C of the present invention to the second end 414 belong to the short implanted end 418 (as shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B), and the short implanted end 418 is implanted The penetration depth must be at least the depth of the tissue fluid glucose that can be measured in the dermis. Through the silver halide refilling method of the present invention, the longest side of the short implant end 418 is not more than 6 mm, so that the micro biosensor 400 can be perpendicular to the biological The method of the body surface is partially implanted under the surface of the living body. The longest side of the short implant end 418 is preferably no greater than 5 mm, 4.5 mm, 3.5 mm, or 2.5 mm. The short implanted end 418 of the present invention includes a third signal sensing section 442 and a fourth signal sensing section 452, and the longest side of the third signal sensing section 442 and the fourth signal sensing section 452 is not greater than 6 mm, which is relatively Preferably they are 2-6mm, 2-5mm, 2-4.5mm, 2-3.5mm, 0.5-2mm, 0.2-1mm.
因此与未使用本发明之卤化银的回充技术情况比较下,通过本发明卤化银的回充方法,能有效延长传感器使用寿命、且能大幅缩减对电极上Ag/AgCl材料的使用,而使对电极信号感测段的尺寸可缩小。由于缩减对电极上Ag/AgCl材料的使用,而使传感器可微型化且可降低生物毒性。此外,电极尺寸缩小特别是指缩短传感器的植入端长度,因此可降低使用者植入痛感。在本发明包含四电极的装置中,由于可同时进行测定和回充,故相较于包含两电极或三电极的装置可具有更短的对电极尺寸及更弹性 及有效率的操作模式。Therefore, compared with the case where the silver halide recharging technology of the present invention is not used, the silver halide recharging method of the present invention can effectively extend the service life of the sensor, and can greatly reduce the use of Ag/AgCl material on the counter electrode, so that The size of the counter electrode signal sensing section can be reduced. As the use of Ag/AgCl materials on the electrode is reduced, the sensor can be miniaturized and biological toxicity can be reduced. In addition, the reduction of the electrode size particularly refers to shortening the length of the implanted end of the sensor, thus reducing the pain of implantation of the user. In the device of the present invention including four electrodes, since measurement and recharging can be performed at the same time, it can have a shorter counter electrode size and a more flexible and efficient operation mode than a device including two electrodes or three electrodes.
减小对电极的尺寸Reduce the size of the counter electrode
为了减小对电极的尺寸,可以使对电极上的卤化银的量最小化至足以支持对生物传感器的至少一次测定的初始量。基于卤化银的初始量来量化对电极的尺寸,该初始量足以处理与患者中的分析物相关的生理参数的生理信号的至少一次的测定。在第一次测定之后,执行回充期间以回充被消耗的卤化银。因此,本发明提供了一种用于确定生物传感器的对电极的尺寸并且用于延长生物传感器的使用寿命的方法。In order to reduce the size of the counter electrode, the amount of silver halide on the counter electrode can be minimized to an initial amount sufficient to support at least one measurement of the biosensor. The size of the counter electrode is quantified based on the initial amount of silver halide, which is sufficient to process at least one determination of the physiological signal of the physiological parameter related to the analyte in the patient. After the first measurement, the silver halide that was consumed during the refill period was refilled. Therefore, the present invention provides a method for determining the size of the counter electrode of a biosensor and for extending the lifespan of the biosensor.
图24为根据本发明一实施例的流程图。如图24所示,该方法包括以下步骤:步骤a:定义由该生物传感器执行至少一次该测定期间中的该卤化银的一所需消耗量范围;步骤b:根据该所需消耗量范围的一上限值加上一缓冲量决定该初始量,以于该再生期间中的该卤化银的一所需回充量范围被控制成足以让该卤化银的一量维持在一安全库存区间内,以确保在该再生期间后的一第二测定期间所获得的一第二生理信号与一第二生理参数保持一稳定的比例关系;步骤c:转换该初始量成该对电极的该尺寸;步骤d:使该对电极具有包含至少该初始量的该卤化银;步骤e:于该测定期间测定该生理信号且该卤化银被消耗一消耗量;以及步骤f:于该再生期间该卤化银被回充一回充量。Fig. 24 is a flowchart according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 24, the method includes the following steps: Step a: Define a required consumption range of the silver halide during the measurement period performed by the biosensor at least once; Step b: According to the required consumption range An upper limit plus a buffer amount determines the initial amount, so that a required recharge amount range of the silver halide during the regeneration period is controlled to be sufficient to maintain an amount of the silver halide within a safety stock interval To ensure that a second physiological signal obtained during a second measurement period after the regeneration period maintains a stable proportional relationship with a second physiological parameter; step c: converting the initial quantity to the size of the pair of electrodes; Step d: Make the pair of electrodes contain at least the initial amount of the silver halide; Step e: Measure the physiological signal during the measurement period and the silver halide is consumed by a consumption amount; and Step f: During the regeneration period the silver halide It is recharged once.
根据本发明的一个实施例,在准备将生物传感器出厂销售之前,已备妥具有初始量的卤化银。可经由在对电极上印刷具有初始量的卤化银层或经由卤化涂布于对电极上的银层以使其具有初始量的卤化银。According to an embodiment of the present invention, before the biosensor is ready to be sold out of the factory, an initial amount of silver halide is prepared. The silver halide layer can be printed with an initial amount on the counter electrode or a silver layer coated on the counter electrode via halogenation so that it has an initial amount of silver halide.
在本发明的另一个实施例中,在准备将生物传感器运送出工厂出售之前,卤化银的初始量可以为零。在这种情况下,生物传感器的对电极上没有卤化银。在将生物传感器皮下植入患者体内之后以及在进行首次测量之前的最开始回充期间中,经由氧化被涂布在对电极上的银,可以在对电极上回充初始量的卤化银。In another embodiment of the present invention, the initial amount of silver halide may be zero before the biosensor is ready to be shipped out of the factory for sale. In this case, there is no silver halide on the counter electrode of the biosensor. After the biosensor is subcutaneously implanted in the patient's body and during the initial recharging period before the first measurement, the silver coated on the counter electrode through oxidation can be recharged with the initial amount of silver halide on the counter electrode.
通常,当将生物传感器植入患者体内时,对皮肤和/或皮下组织可能造成的创伤有时会导致传感器监测的信号不稳定。另外,在使用生物传感器之前,必须将生物传感器完全“湿润”或水合以与患者体内的分析物(例如生物流体中的葡萄糖)达成平衡。因此,在将生物传感器植入到生物体内之后,在生物传感器的最开始测量之前,使用者必须等待一段暖机期,以备妥获得分析物浓度的准确读数。在这种情况下,由于生物传感器在植入生物体之后就需要在测量分析物之前需要暖机期,因此可以在热机期中执行最开始的回充期而不会延迟任何所需的测量。Generally, when a biosensor is implanted in a patient, the possible trauma to the skin and/or subcutaneous tissue sometimes causes the signal monitored by the sensor to be unstable. In addition, before using the biosensor, the biosensor must be completely "moistened" or hydrated to achieve a balance with the analyte in the patient (for example, glucose in the biological fluid). Therefore, after the biosensor is implanted in the organism, the user must wait for a warm-up period before the initial measurement of the biosensor in order to obtain an accurate reading of the analyte concentration. In this case, since the biosensor needs a warm-up period before measuring the analyte after being implanted in the organism, the initial recharge period can be performed in the warm-up period without delaying any required measurement.
为了能够了解如何决定卤化银的初始量,以下举例一种计算方法,通过于生理传感器上执行至少一次生理信号测定期间,以定义卤化银所需消耗量范围,其所需消耗量范围系与待分析物的该生理参数相关联,以人体内的葡萄糖测定且卤化银为一氯化银为例,选择一预定侦测葡萄糖浓度的上限值作为基准,例如葡萄糖浓度为600mg/dL时进行一次生理信号测定以获得所需消耗电流为每秒100nA,如果测量期间持续30秒,则一个测定期间内所需氯化银的消耗量为3000nC(或0.003mC),这是将100nA乘以30秒获得的。在这种情况下,可以将测量一次所需氯化银的消耗量的上限选择为大于或等于0.003mC。于其他实施例中,上限值可以选择其它浓度值。In order to understand how to determine the initial amount of silver halide, the following is an example of a calculation method that defines the required consumption range of silver halide by performing at least one physiological signal measurement period on the physiological sensor. The physiological parameters of the analyte are correlated. Taking the glucose measurement in the human body and the silver halide as a silver chloride as an example, a predetermined upper limit of the detected glucose concentration is selected as the reference, for example, it is performed once when the glucose concentration is 600 mg/dL Physiological signal measurement to obtain the required consumption current is 100nA per second. If the measurement period lasts for 30 seconds, the required consumption of silver chloride during a measurement period is 3000nC (or 0.003mC), which is 100nA multiplied by 30 seconds acquired. In this case, the upper limit of the consumption of silver chloride required for one measurement can be selected to be greater than or equal to 0.003 mC. In other embodiments, other concentration values can be selected for the upper limit value.
由于不同患者的分析物浓度或同一患者在不同时间的浓度可能会在很大程度上波动及体内环境变因多等因素,因此建议使用更大范围的所需卤化银的消耗量(亦即需要较大的初始量),因此所需卤化银的消耗量范围还须加上缓冲量以应付患者体内分析物浓度的波动以满足在测定过程中让卤化银在对电极一量保持在一安全库存区间内变动,使测定的生理信号与生理参数保持一稳定的比例关系。缓冲量可以大于0,并且可以基于生物传感器的预定使用期间来调整。预定使用期间的时间可以是一次测定期间的时间的任意倍数,例如1、2、4、10和100倍等等,或者根据传感器选择一适当的预定使用期间,例如1小时、2小时、6小时、1天、2天、3天、5天等等来准备充足但量少的初始量。Because the analyte concentration of different patients or the concentration of the same patient at different times may fluctuate to a large extent and the internal environment is variable, it is recommended to use a larger range of silver halide consumption (that is, the need Larger initial amount), so the required silver halide consumption range must also be added with a buffer amount to cope with the fluctuation of the analyte concentration in the patient's body so as to keep the silver halide in a safe inventory at the counter electrode during the measurement process. Changes within the interval, so that the measured physiological signals and physiological parameters maintain a stable proportional relationship. The amount of buffering can be greater than 0, and can be adjusted based on the predetermined period of use of the biosensor. The time of the scheduled use period can be any multiple of the time of the measurement period, such as 1, 2, 4, 10, 100 times, etc., or an appropriate scheduled use period is selected according to the sensor, such as 1 hour, 2 hours, 6 hours , 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 5 days, etc. to prepare a sufficient but small initial amount.
另外所需消耗量范围除了选择一次测定作为计算基准外,亦可根据生物传感器的预定使用期间,选择多个测定期间来调整所需消耗量范围,而相对应的缓冲量亦跟随所需消耗量范围而调整,进而调整所需卤化银的初始量。In addition to the required consumption range, in addition to selecting one measurement as the calculation basis, you can also select multiple measurement periods to adjust the required consumption range according to the expected use period of the biosensor, and the corresponding buffering amount also follows the required consumption. The range is adjusted to adjust the initial amount of silver halide required.
在本发明的另一实施例中,所需消耗量范围的算术平均值、几何平均值、或中间数也可以被使用来取代所需消耗范围的上限以决定初始量,这取决于生物传感器可能面临的实际情况。举例来说,已知一次测定中生物传感器测定到的生理信号的平均电流为每秒20nA,如果测量期间持续30秒,则一个测量期间内平均所需氯化银的消耗量为600nC(或0.0006mC),这是将20nA乘以30秒获得的。在这种情况下,可以将测量一次所需氯化银的平均消耗量决定为0.0006mC。In another embodiment of the present invention, the arithmetic mean, geometric mean, or median of the required consumption range can also be used to replace the upper limit of the required consumption range to determine the initial amount, which depends on the biosensor's possibility. The actual situation faced. For example, it is known that the average current of the physiological signal measured by the biosensor in a measurement is 20nA per second. If the measurement period lasts for 30 seconds, the average consumption of silver chloride during a measurement period is 600nC (or 0.0006). mC), which is obtained by multiplying 20nA by 30 seconds. In this case, the average consumption of silver chloride required for one measurement can be determined to be 0.0006mC.
由于同样需考虑不同患者的分析物浓度或同一患者在不同时间的浓度可能会有很大程度上波动及体内环境变因多等因素,因此建议使用更大范围的所需卤化银的消耗量(亦即需要较大的初始量),例如,如果测定期间是每1分钟执行一次,并且一次测定持续30秒,一天需测定1440次,故所需的氯化银消耗量为0.864mC,这是将0.0006 mC乘以每天1440次而获得的,其值接近1mC,故可选择1mC内一个值作为缓冲量来决定氯化银的初始量。Since it is also necessary to consider the analyte concentration of different patients or the concentration of the same patient at different times may fluctuate to a large extent and the internal environment may vary, it is recommended to use a larger range of silver halide consumption ( That is, a larger initial amount is required). For example, if the measurement period is performed every 1 minute, and a measurement lasts for 30 seconds, 1440 measurements are required a day, so the required silver chloride consumption is 0.864mC, which is The value obtained by multiplying 0.0006 mC by 1440 times per day is close to 1 mC, so a value within 1 mC can be selected as the buffer amount to determine the initial amount of silver chloride.
其中上述实施例,所需卤化银的消耗量范围及缓冲量皆可基于生物传感器的预定使用期间来调整。预定使用期间的时间可以是一次测定期间的时间的任意倍数,例如1、2、4、10和100倍等等,或者根据传感器选择一适当的预定使用期间,例如1小时、2小时、6小时、1天、2天、3天、5天等等来准备充足但量少的初始量。In the above embodiment, the required silver halide consumption range and buffer amount can be adjusted based on the predetermined use period of the biosensor. The time of the scheduled use period can be any multiple of the time of the measurement period, such as 1, 2, 4, 10, 100 times, etc., or an appropriate scheduled use period is selected according to the sensor, such as 1 hour, 2 hours, 6 hours , 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 5 days, etc. to prepare a sufficient but small initial amount.
由于每个生物传感器进行一次测定所需的电流取决于不同制造商生产的生物传感器的设计和特性,因此所需卤化银的消耗范围也取决于不同的生物传感器。因此,可以了解,对所需消耗量的任何修改都在本发明的范围内。Since the current required for each biosensor to perform a measurement depends on the design and characteristics of the biosensors produced by different manufacturers, the consumption range of the required silver halide also depends on different biosensors. Therefore, it can be understood that any modification to the required consumption is within the scope of the present invention.
除了所需卤化银的消耗量范围外,还可考虑加上缓冲量以应付患者体内分析物浓度的波动。缓冲量可以大于0,并且可以基于生物传感器的预定使用期间来调整。可以根据生物传感器的预定使用期间中的多个测定时间来调整所需消耗量。In addition to the required silver halide consumption range, a buffer can also be added to cope with fluctuations in the analyte concentration in the patient's body. The amount of buffering can be greater than 0, and can be adjusted based on the predetermined period of use of the biosensor. The required consumption can be adjusted according to multiple measurement times during the predetermined use period of the biosensor.
可以依据所需消耗量范围的上限和缓冲量的总和来决定初始量,以确保在回充期间卤化银的所需回充量足以使卤化银的量保持在安全的库存范围内,以安然地确保在下一个测量期间中成功取得下一个生理信号和下一个生理参数并使其两者保持一稳定的比例关系。在将卤化银的回充量控制为足以支持下一次测定中的消耗量的情况下,缓冲量可以为零。The initial amount can be determined based on the upper limit of the required consumption range and the sum of the buffer amount to ensure that the required recharge amount of silver halide during the recharge period is sufficient to keep the amount of silver halide within a safe inventory range to safely Ensure that the next physiological signal and the next physiological parameter are successfully obtained during the next measurement period and maintain a stable proportional relationship between the two. In the case of controlling the refilling amount of silver halide to be sufficient to support the consumption in the next measurement, the buffering amount may be zero.
如果将所需的氯化银消耗范围的上限选择为1mC,并且将缓冲量选择为0.5mC,则可以将对电极上氯化银的初始量决定为1.5mC,其为1mC和0.5mC的总和。因此,所需的回充量范围可以大于零,大于1.5mC或小于1.5mC。If the upper limit of the required silver chloride consumption range is selected as 1mC, and the buffer amount is selected as 0.5mC, the initial amount of silver chloride on the counter electrode can be determined as 1.5mC, which is the sum of 1mC and 0.5mC . Therefore, the required recharge amount range can be greater than zero, greater than 1.5 mC, or less than 1.5 mC.
基于卤化银的初始量,可以至少进行第一次的测定。在执行第一次测定之后,执行第一次的回充,以回充被消耗的卤化银。Based on the initial amount of silver halide, at least the first measurement can be made. After performing the first measurement, perform the first recharge to recharge the consumed silver halide.
在决定初始量之后,因而决定了对电极的所需尺寸。对电极的尺寸与对电极上银和卤化银的总体积有关。卤化银的初始量可以转化为对电极上卤化银的总体积。可以由对电极上的银和卤化银的宽度、长度和厚度的算术乘积简单地定义银和卤化银的总体积。宽度、长度和厚度中的任何一种均可调整以改变银和卤化银的体积。通常,对电极上的银和卤化银的宽度和厚度是预先确定的,以满足设计和制造能力的限制。因此,可以藉由减小对电极上的银和卤化银的长度来减小对电极上的银和卤化银的体积,这意味着可以缩短对电极的长度。因此,利用本发明提供的决定卤化银的初始量的方法,可以实现具有延长使用寿命以及较短对电极的生物传感器。因此,患者对于 植入的生物传感器感受的痛苦和不适将大大减轻,并且不需要频繁地购买新的生物传感器来更换旧的生物传感器。After deciding the initial amount, the required size of the counter electrode is thus decided. The size of the counter electrode is related to the total volume of silver and silver halide on the counter electrode. The initial amount of silver halide can be converted into the total volume of silver halide on the counter electrode. The total volume of silver and silver halide can be simply defined by the arithmetic product of the width, length, and thickness of silver and silver halide on the counter electrode. Any of the width, length, and thickness can be adjusted to change the volume of silver and silver halide. Generally, the width and thickness of the silver and silver halide on the counter electrode are predetermined to meet the constraints of design and manufacturing capabilities. Therefore, the volume of silver and silver halide on the counter electrode can be reduced by reducing the length of the silver and silver halide on the counter electrode, which means that the length of the counter electrode can be shortened. Therefore, by using the method for determining the initial amount of silver halide provided by the present invention, a biosensor with a prolonged service life and a shorter counter electrode can be realized. Therefore, the patient's pain and discomfort for the implanted biosensor will be greatly reduced, and there is no need to frequently purchase new biosensors to replace old biosensors.
根据本发明的一个实施例,当用于一天的卤化银的初始量为1.5mC时,取决于不同制造商的生物传感器的特性的卤化银的单位量(或单位容量)为300mC/mm 3的情况下,所需的卤化银体积为0.005mm 3。当对电极的宽度为0.3mm且卤化银的厚度为0.01mm时,对电极上的卤化银的长度为1.67mm。按比例,如果所需卤化银的初始量需要3.6天的量,则卤化银的长度,即对电极的长度约为6mm,如果所需卤化银的初始量需要6天的量,则对电极的长度约为10mm。因为可以缩短对电极的长度,所以可以相应地缩短植入患者体内的生物传感器的长度,并且还可以将生物传感器垂直地植入患者体内,以使对患者的伤害最小化。因此,不仅由于本发明提供的回充期间而可以延长生物传感器的使用寿命,而且由于对电极的长度缩短,还可以减少对患者造成的痛苦和不适。 According to an embodiment of the present invention, when the initial amount of silver halide used for a day is 1.5 mC, the unit amount (or unit capacity) of silver halide depending on the characteristics of the biosensors of different manufacturers is 300 mC/mm 3 In this case, the required silver halide volume is 0.005 mm 3 . When the width of the counter electrode is 0.3 mm and the thickness of the silver halide is 0.01 mm, the length of the silver halide on the counter electrode is 1.67 mm. Proportionally, if the required initial amount of silver halide requires 3.6 days, the length of the silver halide, that is, the length of the counter electrode is about 6mm, if the required initial amount of silver halide requires 6 days, the counter electrode The length is about 10mm. Because the length of the counter electrode can be shortened, the length of the biosensor implanted in the patient can be correspondingly shortened, and the biosensor can also be implanted vertically in the patient to minimize damage to the patient. Therefore, not only can the life of the biosensor be prolonged due to the recharge period provided by the present invention, but also the pain and discomfort caused to the patient can be reduced due to the shortened length of the counter electrode.
当然,可以经由改变银和卤化银的长度、宽度和厚度中的至少其中之一来实现减少银和卤化银的体积。所有上述修改仍在本发明的范围内。Of course, reducing the volume of silver and silver halide can be achieved by changing at least one of the length, width, and thickness of silver and silver halide. All the above modifications are still within the scope of the present invention.
通过本发明的回充方法以及其中的第一阈值与第二阈值的设定值在适当的区间中选择,可以无需等到让卤化银耗尽信号出现(例如生理信号出现噪声)就可进行卤化银回充,以控制卤化银的库存量水平维持在此阈值区间内。而使用预定值S更可以鞤助卤化银回充后的库存量水平控制在偏好的特定范围内。而且,通过本发明的回充方法,使得氯化银的回充速率不须与测定期间的氯化银的减少速率完全成正相关、也无须紧接于每次测定之后立即回充氯化银。Through the recharging method of the present invention and the setting of the first threshold and the second threshold in an appropriate interval, the silver halide can be performed without waiting for the silver halide depletion signal to appear (for example, when the physiological signal appears noise) Recharge to control the inventory level of silver halide within this threshold range. The use of the predetermined value S can further help control the inventory level after silver halide refilling within a specific range of preference. Moreover, with the recharging method of the present invention, the recharging rate of silver chloride does not have to be completely positively correlated with the decrease rate of silver chloride during the measurement, and it is not necessary to refill the silver chloride immediately after each measurement.
本发明也适用于具有任意数量的对电极和任意数量的工作电极的生物传感器,例如具有一个工作电极、一个辅助电极和一个对电极的生物传感器、具有两个工作电极和一个对电极的生物传感器、或者具有两个工作电极和两个对电极的生物传感器。如果生物传感器具有两个或更多个对电极,则所有对电极可以具有相同的尺寸和/或相同卤化银的初始量。The present invention is also applicable to biosensors with any number of counter electrodes and any number of working electrodes, such as a biosensor with one working electrode, one auxiliary electrode and one counter electrode, and a biosensor with two working electrodes and one counter electrode. , Or a biosensor with two working electrodes and two counter electrodes. If the biosensor has two or more counter electrodes, all counter electrodes may have the same size and/or the same initial amount of silver halide.
因此与未使用本发明之卤化银的回充技术情况比较下,通过本发明卤化银的回充方法,能有效延长传感器使用寿命、且能大幅缩减对电极上Ag/AgCl材料的使用,而使对电极信号感测段的尺寸可缩小。由于缩减对电极上Ag/AgCl材料的使用,而使传感器可微型化且可降低生物毒性。此外,电极尺寸缩小特别是指缩短传感器的植入端长度,因此可降低使用者植入痛感。Therefore, compared with the case where the silver halide recharging technology of the present invention is not used, the silver halide recharging method of the present invention can effectively extend the service life of the sensor, and can greatly reduce the use of Ag/AgCl material on the counter electrode, so that The size of the counter electrode signal sensing section can be reduced. As the use of Ag/AgCl materials on the electrode is reduced, the sensor can be miniaturized and biological toxicity can be reduced. In addition, the reduction of the electrode size particularly refers to shortening the length of the implanted end of the sensor, thus reducing the pain of implantation of the user.
尽管已经根据当前被认为是最实际和优选的实施例描述了本发明,但是应当理解,本发明并不限于所公开的实施例。相反地,其意旨是涵盖包括在所附申请专利范围的精神和范围内的各种修改和类似配置,这些修改和类似被置应与最广泛的解释相一致,以涵盖所有此等的修改和类似结构。Although the present invention has been described in terms of what is currently considered to be the most practical and preferred embodiment, it should be understood that the present invention is not limited to the disclosed embodiment. On the contrary, its intent is to cover various modifications and similar configurations included in the spirit and scope of the scope of the appended patent application. These modifications and similar arrangements should be consistent with the broadest interpretation to cover all such modifications and Similar structure.
【符号说明】【Symbol Description】
10:生理信号测定装置10: Physiological signal measuring device
20:用户装置20: User device
61:有段切换的部分定电流电路61: Partial constant current circuit with segment switching
71:无段切换的部分定电流电路71: Partial constant current circuit with stepless switching
100、300、400:微型生物传感器100, 300, 400: Miniature biosensor
110、310、410:基板110, 310, 410: substrate
111、311、411:表面111, 311, 411: Surface
112、312、412:对侧表面112, 312, 412: Opposite side surface
113、313、413:第一端113, 313, 413: the first end
114、314、414:第二端114, 314, 414: second end
115、315、415:信号输出区域115, 315, 415: signal output area
116、316、416:感测区域116, 316, 416: sensing area
117、317、417:连接区域117, 317, 417: connection area
120、320:工作电极120, 320: working electrode
121、321:信号输出段121, 321: signal output section
122、322、332、342:信号感测段122, 322, 332, 342: signal sensing section
130、330:对电极130, 330: Counter electrode
131:信号输出段131: Signal output section
132:信号感测段132: Signal sensing section
140、350、460:化学试剂140, 350, 460: chemical reagents
200:传输单元200: Transmission unit
210:处理器210: Processor
220:电源220: power supply
230:电压施加单元230: Voltage applying unit
240:温度感测单元240: Temperature sensing unit
250:通信单元250: Communication unit
260:定时器260: Timer
318、418:短植入端318, 418: Short implant end
323、420:第一工作电极323, 420: the first working electrode
324、430:第二工作电极324, 430: second working electrode
325:第三工作电极325: Third working electrode
340:辅助电极340: auxiliary electrode
321:第一信号输出段321: The first signal output section
322:第一信号感测段322: The first signal sensing section
431:第二信号输出段431: The second signal output section
432:第二信号感测段432: The second signal sensing section
440:第一对电极440: The first pair of electrodes
441:第三信号输出段441: The third signal output section
442:第三信号感测段442: The third signal sensing section
450:第二对电极450: The second pair of electrodes
451:第四信号输出段451: The fourth signal output section
452:第四信号感测段452: The fourth signal sensing section
I0:初始量I0: initial quantity
M1、M2、M3、M4、M5、M6、M7、M8、M29:测定操作M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, M6, M7, M8, M29: measurement operation
R1、R2、R3、R4、R5、R6、R7、R8:回充操作R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8: recharge operation
N:测定次数N: Number of measurements
P:预定次数P: scheduled times
S:预定值S: predetermined value
S1、S2、S3、S4、S5、S6、S11、S12、S13、S14、S15、S16、S21、S22、S23、S24、S25、S26、S31、S32、S33、S34、S35、S36、S37、S38、S41、S42、S43、S44、S45、S46、S47、S48、S51、S52、S53、S54、S55、S56、S57、S58、S901、S902、S1001、S1002、S1003、S1004、S1005步骤S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, S11, S12, S13, S14, S15, S16, S21, S22, S23, S24, S25, S26, S31, S32, S33, S34, S35, S36, S37, S38, S41, S42, S43, S44, S45, S46, S47, S48, S51, S52, S53, S54, S55, S56, S57, S58, S901, S902, S1001, S1002, S1003, S1004, S1005 steps
Th1、Th3:第一阈值Th1, Th3: the first threshold
Th2、Th4:第二阈值Th2, Th4: second threshold

Claims (23)

  1. 一种用于生物传感器中卤化银材料的回充控制方法,所述生物传感器用于植入皮下以量测与生物流体中的待分析物所关联的生理参数的生理信号,所述生物传感器至少包含第一电极与对电极,所述对电极包括卤化银材料及银材料,所述卤化银材料于所述卤化银材料及所述银材料中具库存量水平,所述回充控制方法包括下列步骤:A method for controlling the recharge of silver halide material in a biosensor, the biosensor being used to implant subcutaneously to measure the physiological signal of the physiological parameter associated with the analyte in the biological fluid, and the biosensor is at least It includes a first electrode and a counter electrode. The counter electrode includes a silver halide material and a silver material. The silver halide material has an inventory level in the silver halide material and the silver material. The recharge control method includes the following step:
    于量测操作后,取得所述生理信号的量测值,其中于量测操作后所述库存量水平减少;After the measurement operation, obtain the measurement value of the physiological signal, wherein the inventory level decreases after the measurement operation;
    每经过各所述量测操作的预定次数被满足的条件下,计算所述预定次数的期间中所述库存量水平的变动值,启动第一回充操作,以回充所述库存量水平的所述变动值,所述预定次数为正整数,Every time the predetermined number of measurement operations is met, the change value of the inventory level during the predetermined number of times is calculated, and the first refill operation is initiated to refill the inventory level. The variation value, the predetermined number of times is a positive integer,
    其中所述库存量水平基本上于第一阈值与第二阈值之间变动。The inventory level basically varies between the first threshold and the second threshold.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的回充控制方法,所述方法还包括以下步骤:在所述库存量水平小于或等于所述第一阈值时,启动第二回充操作,直到所述库存量水平提高至所述第一阈值或大于所述第一阈值的所述第二阈值之间的预定值。The refill control method according to claim 1, further comprising the step of: when the inventory level is less than or equal to the first threshold, a second refill operation is initiated until the inventory level increases A predetermined value between the first threshold or the second threshold greater than the first threshold.
  3. 如权利要求2所述的回充控制方法,所述方法还包括以下步骤,在所述库存量水平大于或等于所述第二阈值时,不再执行所述第二回充操作或减少所述第二回充操作的次数或回充量,直到所述库存量水平降低至所述预定值。The recharge control method according to claim 2, further comprising the step of: when the inventory level is greater than or equal to the second threshold, the second recharge operation is no longer performed or the second recharge operation is reduced. The number of second refill operations or the refill amount until the inventory level decreases to the predetermined value.
  4. 如权利要求2所述的回充控制方法,所述方法还包括以下步骤:每经过各所述量测操作的固定时间间隔被满足的条件下,启动所述第二回充操作。2. The recharge control method according to claim 2, further comprising the step of: starting the second recharge operation every time when the fixed time interval of each of the measurement operations is satisfied.
  5. 如权利要求3所述的回充控制方法,其中所述固定时间间隔为15秒内、30秒内、一分钟内、十分钟内、一小时内、二小时内、四小时内、一天内、一周内或一个月内的一时间值。The recharge control method of claim 3, wherein the fixed time interval is within 15 seconds, within 30 seconds, within one minute, within ten minutes, within one hour, within two hours, within four hours, within one day, A time value within a week or a month.
  6. 如权利要求1所述的回充控制方法,其中当所述库存量水平为所述卤化银材料于所述卤化银材料与所述银材料中的占比时,所述第一阈值选自1%至98%之间的占比,以及所述第二阈值选自2%至99%之间的占比。The method of recharging control according to claim 1, wherein when the inventory level is the proportion of the silver halide material in the silver halide material and the silver material, the first threshold is selected from 1. % To 98%, and the second threshold is selected from 2% to 99%.
  7. 如权利要求1所述的回充控制方法,其中当所述库存量水平为各所述回充操作后所述卤化银材料的累积回充量减去各所述量测操作后所述卤化银材料的累积消耗量的差值时,所述第一阈值为所述初始库存量的-1%至-99%之间的值,以及所述第 二阈值为所述初始库存量的1%至99%之间的值。The method of recharging control according to claim 1, wherein when the inventory level is the cumulative recharging amount of the silver halide material after each recharging operation minus the silver halide material after each measuring operation When the difference in the cumulative consumption of materials is the value, the first threshold is a value between -1% and -99% of the initial inventory, and the second threshold is a value between 1% and -99% of the initial inventory. Values between 99%.
  8. 如权利要求1所述的回充控制方法,其中所述回充方法是藉由施加回充电压于所述对电极与所述第一电极之间来实施,且所述第一电极为工作电极,或所述生物传感器包括辅助电极,藉由施加回充电压于所述对电极与所述辅助电极之间来实施。The recharge control method of claim 1, wherein the recharge method is implemented by applying a recharge voltage between the counter electrode and the first electrode, and the first electrode is a working electrode , Or the biosensor includes an auxiliary electrode, which is implemented by applying a recharge voltage between the counter electrode and the auxiliary electrode.
  9. 如权利要求8所述的回充控制方法,其中施加所述回充电压是藉由施加固定电位差值或固定电流值来实施。8. The recharge control method of claim 8, wherein applying the recharge voltage is implemented by applying a fixed potential difference or a fixed current value.
  10. 如权利要求1所述的回充控制方法,其中于执行所述回充操作之前,还包括下列步骤:The method for controlling the recharging of claim 1, wherein before performing the recharging operation, the method further comprises the following steps:
    由生理信号量测装置强制执行所述回充操作;以及The recharging operation is forcibly performed by the physiological signal measuring device; and
    于所述库存量水平提高至大于或等于所述第二阈值时停止所述回充操作。Stop the refill operation when the inventory level increases to be greater than or equal to the second threshold.
  11. 一种可控制生物传感器之卤化银材料的库存量水平的生理信号量测装置,所述卤化银材料具初始库存量,所述库存量水平代表当时所述卤化银材料的库存量并被应用于使所述生理信号量测装置执行回充操作使所述卤化银材料恢复所述库存量水平,所述生理信号量测装置包括:A physiological signal measuring device that can control the inventory level of silver halide materials of a biosensor. The silver halide material has an initial inventory level, and the inventory level represents the inventory level of the silver halide material at the time and is applied The physiological signal measuring device is caused to perform a refill operation to restore the silver halide material to the inventory level, and the physiological signal measuring device includes:
    所述生物传感器,包括:The biosensor includes:
    第一电极,以及The first electrode, and
    第一对电极,包括所述卤化银材料及银材料;以及The first pair of electrodes includes the silver halide material and the silver material; and
    传输单元,耦接至所述生物传感器,且包括:The transmission unit is coupled to the biosensor and includes:
    处理器,被配置于启动执行量测操作时,使所述库存量减少消耗量,于启动所述回充操作时,使所述库存量增加回充量,并计算所述库存量水平,The processor is configured to reduce the consumption of the inventory when the measurement operation is started, increase the inventory by the refill when the refill operation is started, and calculate the inventory level,
    其中处理器控制所述库存量水平基本上于第一阈值与第二阈值之间变动。The processor controls the inventory level to substantially vary between a first threshold and a second threshold.
  12. 如权利要求11所述的生理信号量测装置,其中当所述处理器确定所述库存量水平小于或等于第一阈值时,所述处理器使所述生理信号量测装置执行所述回充操作,使所述库存量水平提高至所述第一阈值与大于所述第一阈值的第二阈值之间的预定值。The physiological signal measurement device of claim 11, wherein when the processor determines that the inventory level is less than or equal to a first threshold, the processor causes the physiological signal measurement device to perform the refilling Operation to increase the inventory level to a predetermined value between the first threshold and a second threshold greater than the first threshold.
  13. 如权利要求12所述的生理信号量测装置,其中当所述处理器确定所述库存量水平大于或等于所述第二阈值时,不再执行或减少所述回充操作次数或回充量,直到所述库存量水平降低至所述第一阈值与所述第二阈值之间的预定值。The physiological signal measurement device according to claim 12, wherein when the processor determines that the inventory level is greater than or equal to the second threshold, the number of recharging operations or the recharging amount is no longer executed or reduced , Until the inventory level decreases to a predetermined value between the first threshold and the second threshold.
  14. 如权利要求11所述的生理信号量测装置,更包括电压施加单元,受所述处理器控制而对所述生物传感器进行所述量测操作以获得所述生理信号、以及进行所述 回充操作以回复所述库存量水平。The physiological signal measurement device according to claim 11, further comprising a voltage applying unit, which is controlled by the processor to perform the measurement operation on the biosensor to obtain the physiological signal and perform the recharging Operate to restore the inventory level.
  15. 如权利要求11所述的生理信号量测装置,其中所述回充操作是藉由所述电压施加单元施加回充电压于所述第一对电极与所述第一电极之间来实施,且所述第一电极为工作电极。11. The physiological signal measuring device according to claim 11, wherein the recharging operation is performed by the voltage applying unit applying a recharging voltage between the first pair of electrodes and the first electrode, and The first electrode is a working electrode.
  16. 如权利要求11所述的生理信号量测装置,其中所述生物传感器还包括辅助电极,且所述回充操作是藉由所述电压施加单元施加回充电压于所述第一对电极与所述辅助电极之间来实施。The physiological signal measurement device of claim 11, wherein the biosensor further comprises an auxiliary electrode, and the recharging operation is performed by the voltage applying unit applying a recharging voltage to the first pair of electrodes and the Implemented between the auxiliary electrodes.
  17. 如权利要求11所述的生理信号量测装置,其中所述生物传感器还包括第二对电极及第二电极,且所述量测操作是藉由所述电压施加单元施加量测电压于所述第一电极及第二工作电极其中之一与所述第一对电极及所述第二对电极其中之一之间来实施,以及所述回充操作是藉由所述电压施加单元施加回充电压于所述第一对电极及所述第二对电极其中另一与所述第一电极及第二电极其中另一之间来实施。The physiological signal measurement device of claim 11, wherein the biosensor further comprises a second pair of electrodes and a second electrode, and the measurement operation is performed by the voltage applying unit applying a measurement voltage to the One of the first electrode and the second working electrode is implemented between one of the first pair of electrodes and the second pair of electrodes, and the recharging operation is applied by the voltage applying unit. It is implemented by pressing between the other of the first pair of electrodes and the second pair of electrodes and the other of the first electrode and the second electrode.
  18. 如权利要求15-17所述的生理信号量测装置,其中施加所述回充电压系藉由施加固定电位差值或固定电流值来实施,所述固定电位差值或固定电流值系本质地根据消耗量变动而动态调整。The physiological signal measurement device according to claims 15-17, wherein the application of the recharge voltage is implemented by applying a fixed potential difference or a fixed current value, and the fixed potential difference or a fixed current value is essentially It is dynamically adjusted according to changes in consumption.
  19. 如权利要求11所述的生理信号量测装置,其中所述处理器执行所述回充操作时的所述库存量水平的恢复时间与恢复量系可根据每次执行量测操作的总消耗量或平均消耗量、一段期间内的各量测操作的累积消耗量、以及所述卤化银材料的自然耗损量或其组合进行动态性调节。The physiological signal measurement device according to claim 11, wherein the recovery time and the recovery amount of the inventory level when the processor performs the refill operation can be based on the total consumption of each measurement operation performed Or the average consumption, the cumulative consumption of each measurement operation in a period of time, and the natural consumption of the silver halide material or a combination thereof are dynamically adjusted.
  20. 如权利要求11所述的生理信号量测装置,其中所述生物传感器被皮下植入生物体。11. The physiological signal measuring device according to claim 11, wherein the biosensor is implanted subcutaneously in a living body.
  21. 一种回复生物传感器至合适工作状态的方法,所述生物传感器包括第一电极与对电极、所述对电极包括卤化银材料及银材料,所述卤化银材料具库存量水平,且在量测操作中,使所述卤化银材料的所述库存量水平被消耗,所述方法包括下列步骤:A method for restoring a biosensor to a proper working state. The biosensor includes a first electrode and a counter electrode. The counter electrode includes a silver halide material and a silver material. The silver halide material has an inventory level and is under measurement. During operation, the inventory level of the silver halide material is consumed, and the method includes the following steps:
    于所述量测操作后,计算所述库存量水平之变化;以及启动第一回充操作,以回充所述库存量水平的所述变动值,After the measurement operation, calculate the change in the inventory level; and initiate a first refill operation to refill the change value of the inventory level,
    其中所述库存量水平被控制于基本地位于第一阈值与第二阈值之间变动。The inventory level is controlled to fluctuate between the first threshold and the second threshold.
  22. 如权利要求21所述的方法,当所述库存量水平变化至小于或等于所述第一阈值时,启动回复操作,以回充被消耗的所述卤化银材料,从而使所述库存量水平提高至所述第一阈值与高于所述第一阈值的第二阈值之间的预定值。The method of claim 21, when the inventory level changes to be less than or equal to the first threshold, a recovery operation is initiated to refill the consumed silver halide material, so that the inventory level Raise to a predetermined value between the first threshold and a second threshold higher than the first threshold.
  23. 如权利要求21所述的方法,所述方法还包括以下步骤其中至少一者:The method of claim 21, further comprising at least one of the following steps:
    每经过各所述量测操作的预定次数被满足的条件下,计算所述预定次数的期间中所述库存量水平的变动值,启动所述第一回充操作,以回充所述库存量水平的所述变动值;以及Every time the predetermined number of measurement operations is satisfied, calculate the change value of the inventory level during the predetermined number of times, and start the first refill operation to refill the inventory Said variation of the level; and
    每经过各所述量测操作的固定时间间隔被满足的条件下,启动所述第二回充操作。Each time the fixed time interval of each measurement operation is satisfied, the second recharging operation is started.
PCT/CN2021/080609 2020-03-12 2021-03-12 Method for restoring biosensor and device using said method WO2021180229A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202062988549P 2020-03-12 2020-03-12
US62/988,549 2020-03-12

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021180229A1 true WO2021180229A1 (en) 2021-09-16

Family

ID=77671205

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/080609 WO2021180229A1 (en) 2020-03-12 2021-03-12 Method for restoring biosensor and device using said method

Country Status (2)

Country Link
TW (1) TWI770871B (en)
WO (1) WO2021180229A1 (en)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20090294306A1 (en) * 2008-06-02 2009-12-03 Feldman Benjamin J Reference electrodes having an extended lifetime for use in long term amperometric sensors
CN107743584A (en) * 2015-06-15 2018-02-27 豪夫迈·罗氏有限公司 The method and testing element of at least one of Electrochemical Detection humoral sample analyte
KR20190002136A (en) * 2017-06-29 2019-01-08 주식회사 아이센스 A method of replenishing level of AgCl on a reference electrode of a electrochemical sensor
CN109946362A (en) * 2017-12-19 2019-06-28 恩德莱斯和豪瑟尔分析仪表两合公司 The manufacturing method of reference electrode and reference electrode
CN110268099A (en) * 2017-02-08 2019-09-20 西门子股份公司 Pulsed electrolysis is carried out referring to open circuit potential
CN112294322A (en) * 2019-08-02 2021-02-02 华广生技股份有限公司 Biosensor and method for determining counter electrode size and prolonging life thereof

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20090294306A1 (en) * 2008-06-02 2009-12-03 Feldman Benjamin J Reference electrodes having an extended lifetime for use in long term amperometric sensors
CN107743584A (en) * 2015-06-15 2018-02-27 豪夫迈·罗氏有限公司 The method and testing element of at least one of Electrochemical Detection humoral sample analyte
CN110268099A (en) * 2017-02-08 2019-09-20 西门子股份公司 Pulsed electrolysis is carried out referring to open circuit potential
KR20190002136A (en) * 2017-06-29 2019-01-08 주식회사 아이센스 A method of replenishing level of AgCl on a reference electrode of a electrochemical sensor
CN109946362A (en) * 2017-12-19 2019-06-28 恩德莱斯和豪瑟尔分析仪表两合公司 The manufacturing method of reference electrode and reference electrode
CN112294322A (en) * 2019-08-02 2021-02-02 华广生技股份有限公司 Biosensor and method for determining counter electrode size and prolonging life thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW202134645A (en) 2021-09-16
TWI770871B (en) 2022-07-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI736383B (en) Mirco biosensor and measuring method thereof
CN112294319A (en) Manufacturing method of implanted miniature biosensor
WO2021180229A1 (en) Method for restoring biosensor and device using said method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21768003

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21768003

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1